This manual is last updated 20 March 2024 for version 3.8.4 of GnuTLS.
Copyright © 2001-2024 Free Software Foundation, Inc.\\ Copyright © 2001-2024 Nikos Mavrogiannopoulos
Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the section entitled “GNU Free Documentation License”.
Next: Introduction to GnuTLS, Previous: Top, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This document demonstrates and explains the GnuTLS library API. A brief introduction to the protocols and the technology involved is also included so that an application programmer can better understand the GnuTLS purpose and actual offerings. Even if GnuTLS is a typical library software, it operates over several security and cryptographic protocols which require the programmer to make careful and correct usage of them. Otherwise it is likely to only obtain a false sense of security. The term of security is very broad even if restricted to computer software, and cannot be confined to a single cryptographic library. For that reason, do not consider any program secure just because it uses GnuTLS; there are several ways to compromise a program or a communication line and GnuTLS only helps with some of them.
Although this document tries to be self contained, basic network programming and public key infrastructure (PKI) knowledge is assumed in most of it. A good introduction to networking can be found in [STEVENS], to public key infrastructure in [GUTPKI] and to security engineering in [ANDERSON].
Updated versions of the GnuTLS software and this document will be available from https://www.gnutls.org/.
Next: Introduction to TLS, Previous: Preface, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
In brief GnuTLS can be described as a library which offers an API to access secure communication protocols. These protocols provide privacy over insecure lines, and were designed to prevent eavesdropping, tampering, or message forgery.
Technically GnuTLS is a portable ANSI C based library which implements the protocols ranging from SSL 3.0 to TLS 1.3 (see Introduction to TLS, for a detailed description of the protocols), accompanied with the required framework for authentication and public key infrastructure. Important features of the GnuTLS library include:
The GnuTLS library consists of three independent parts, namely the “TLS protocol part”, the “Certificate part”, and the “Cryptographic back-end” part. The “TLS protocol part” is the actual protocol implementation, and is entirely implemented within the GnuTLS library. The “Certificate part” consists of the certificate parsing, and verification functions and it uses functionality from the libtasn1 library. The “Cryptographic back-end” is provided by the nettle and gmplib libraries.
• Downloading and installing | ||
• Installing for a software distribution | ||
• Document overview |
GnuTLS is available for download at: https://www.gnutls.org/download.html
GnuTLS uses a development cycle where even minor version numbers indicate a stable release and a odd minor version number indicate a development release. For example, GnuTLS 1.6.3 denote a stable release since 6 is even, and GnuTLS 1.7.11 denote a development release since 7 is odd.
GnuTLS depends on nettle
and gmplib
, and you will need to install it
before installing GnuTLS. The nettle
library is available from
https://www.lysator.liu.se/~nisse/nettle/, while gmplib
is available
from https://www.gmplib.org/.
Don’t forget to verify the cryptographic signature after downloading
source code packages.
The package is then extracted, configured and built like many other
packages that use Autoconf. For detailed information on configuring
and building it, refer to the INSTALL file that is part of the
distribution archive. Typically you invoke ./configure
and
then make check install
. There are a number of compile-time
parameters, as discussed below.
Several parts of GnuTLS require ASN.1 functionality, which is provided by a library called libtasn1. A copy of libtasn1 is included in GnuTLS. If you want to install it separately (e.g., to make it possibly to use libtasn1 in other programs), you can get it from https://www.gnu.org/software/libtasn1/.
The compression library, libz
, the PKCS #11 helper library p11-kit
,
the TPM library trousers
, as well as the IDN library libidn
1 are
optional dependencies. Check the README file in the distribution on how
to obtain these libraries.
A few configure
options may be relevant, summarized below.
They disable or enable particular features,
to create a smaller library with only the required features.
Note however, that although a smaller library is generated, the
included programs are not guaranteed to compile if some of these
options are given.
--disable-srp-authentication --disable-psk-authentication --disable-anon-authentication --disable-dhe --disable-ecdhe --disable-openssl-compatibility --disable-dtls-srtp-support --disable-alpn-support --disable-heartbeat-support --disable-libdane --without-p11-kit --without-tpm --without-zlib
For the complete list, refer to the output from configure --help
.
Next: Document overview, Previous: Downloading and installing, Up: Introduction to GnuTLS [Contents][Index]
When installing for a software distribution, it is often desirable to preconfigure GnuTLS with the system-wide paths and files. There two important configuration options, one sets the trust store in system, which are the CA certificates to be used by programs by default (if they don’t override it), and the other sets to DNSSEC root key file used by unbound for DNSSEC verification.
For the latter the following configuration option is available, and if not specified GnuTLS will try to auto-detect the location of that file.
--with-unbound-root-key-file
To set the trust store the following options are available.
--with-default-trust-store-file --with-default-trust-store-dir --with-default-trust-store-pkcs11
The first option is used to set a PEM file which contains a list of trusted certificates, while the second will read all certificates in the given path. The recommended option is the last, which allows to use a PKCS #11 trust policy module. That module not only provides the trusted certificates, but allows the categorization of them using purpose, e.g., CAs can be restricted for e-mail usage only, or administrative restrictions of CAs, for examples by restricting a CA to only issue certificates for a given DNS domain using NameConstraints. A publicly available PKCS #11 trust module is p11-kit’s trust module2.
Previous: Installing for a software distribution, Up: Introduction to GnuTLS [Contents][Index]
In this document we present an overview of the supported security protocols in Introduction to TLS, and continue by providing more information on the certificate authentication in Certificate authentication, and shared-key as well anonymous authentication in Shared-key and anonymous authentication. We elaborate on certificate authentication by demonstrating advanced usage of the API in More on certificate authentication. The core of the TLS library is presented in How to use GnuTLS in applications and example applications are listed in GnuTLS application examples. In Other included programs the usage of few included programs that may assist debugging is presented. The last chapter is Internal architecture of GnuTLS that provides a short introduction to GnuTLS’ internal architecture.
Next: Authentication methods, Previous: Introduction to GnuTLS, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
TLS stands for “Transport Layer Security” and is the successor of SSL, the Secure Sockets Layer protocol [SSL3] designed by Netscape. TLS is an Internet protocol, defined by IETF3, described in [RFC5246]. The protocol provides confidentiality, and authentication layers over any reliable transport layer. The description, above, refers to TLS 1.0 but applies to all other TLS versions as the differences between the protocols are not major.
The DTLS protocol, or “Datagram TLS” [RFC4347] is a protocol with identical goals as TLS, but can operate under unreliable transport layers such as UDP. The discussions below apply to this protocol as well, except when noted otherwise.
Next: The transport layer, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
TLS is a layered protocol, and consists of the record protocol, the handshake protocol and the alert protocol. The record protocol is to serve all other protocols and is above the transport layer. The record protocol offers symmetric encryption, and data authenticity4. The alert protocol offers some signaling to the other protocols. It can help informing the peer for the cause of failures and other error conditions. See The Alert Protocol, for more information. The alert protocol is above the record protocol.
The handshake protocol is responsible for the security parameters’ negotiation, the initial key exchange and authentication. See The Handshake Protocol, for more information about the handshake protocol. The protocol layering in TLS is shown in Figure 3.1.
Next: The TLS record protocol, Previous: TLS layers, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
TLS is not limited to any transport layer and can be used above any transport layer, as long as it is a reliable one. DTLS can be used over reliable and unreliable transport layers. GnuTLS supports TCP and UDP layers transparently using the Berkeley sockets API. However, any transport layer can be used by providing callbacks for GnuTLS to access the transport layer (for details see Setting up the transport layer).
Next: The TLS Alert Protocol, Previous: The transport layer, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
The record protocol is the secure communications provider. Its purpose is to encrypt, and authenticate packets. The record layer functions can be called at any time after the handshake process is finished, when there is need to receive or send data. In DTLS however, due to re-transmission timers used in the handshake out-of-order handshake data might be received for some time (maximum 60 seconds) after the handshake process is finished.
The functions to access the record protocol are limited to send and receive functions, which might, given the importance of this protocol in TLS, seem awkward. This is because the record protocol’s parameters are all set by the handshake protocol. The record protocol initially starts with NULL parameters, which means no encryption, and no MAC is used. Encryption and authentication begin just after the handshake protocol has finished.
• Encryption algorithms used in the record layer | ||
• Compression algorithms and the record layer | ||
• On Record Padding |
Confidentiality in the record layer is achieved by using symmetric
ciphers like AES
or CHACHA20
. Ciphers are encryption algorithms
that use a single, secret, key to encrypt and decrypt data. Early
versions of TLS separated between block and stream ciphers and had
message authentication plugged in to them by the protocol, though later
versions switched to using authenticated-encryption (AEAD) ciphers. The AEAD
ciphers are defined to combine encryption and authentication, and as such
they are not only more efficient, as the primitives used are designed to
interoperate nicely, but they are also known to interoperate in a secure
way.
The supported in GnuTLS ciphers and MAC algorithms are shown in Table 3.1 and Table 3.2.
Algorithm | Type | Applicable Protocols | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AES-128-GCM, AES-256-GCM | AEAD | TLS 1.2, TLS 1.3 | This is the AES algorithm in the authenticated encryption GCM mode. This mode combines message authentication and encryption and can be extremely fast on CPUs that support hardware acceleration. |
AES-128-CCM, AES-256-CCM | AEAD | TLS 1.2, TLS 1.3 | This is the AES algorithm in the authenticated encryption CCM mode. This mode combines message authentication and encryption and is often used by systems without AES or GCM acceleration support. |
CHACHA20-POLY1305 | AEAD | TLS 1.2, TLS 1.3 | CHACHA20-POLY1305 is an authenticated encryption algorithm based on CHACHA20 cipher and POLY1305 MAC. CHACHA20 is a refinement of SALSA20 algorithm, an approved cipher by the European ESTREAM project. POLY1305 is Wegman-Carter, one-time authenticator. The combination provides a fast stream cipher suitable for systems where a hardware AES accelerator is not available. |
AES-128-CCM-8, AES-256-CCM-8 | AEAD | TLS 1.2, TLS 1.3 | This is the AES algorithm in the authenticated encryption CCM mode with a truncated to 64-bit authentication tag. This mode is for communication with restricted systems. |
CAMELLIA-128-GCM, CAMELLIA-256-GCM | AEAD | TLS 1.2 | This is the CAMELLIA algorithm in the authenticated encryption GCM mode. |
AES-128-CBC, AES-256-CBC | Legacy (block) | TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2 | AES or RIJNDAEL is the block cipher algorithm that replaces the old DES algorithm. It has 128 bits block size and is used in CBC mode. |
CAMELLIA-128-CBC, CAMELLIA-256-CBC | Legacy (block) | TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2 | This is an 128-bit block cipher developed by Mitsubishi and NTT. It is one of the approved ciphers of the European NESSIE and Japanese CRYPTREC projects. |
3DES-CBC | Legacy (block) | TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2 | This is the DES block cipher algorithm used with triple encryption (EDE). Has 64 bits block size and is used in CBC mode. |
ARCFOUR-128 | Legacy (stream) | TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2 | ARCFOUR-128 is a compatible algorithm with RSA’s RC4 algorithm, which is considered to be a trade secret. It is a considered to be broken, and is only used for compatibility purposed. For this reason it is not enabled by default. |
GOST28147-TC26Z-CNT | Legacy (stream) | TLS 1.2 | This is a 64-bit block cipher GOST 28147-89 with TC26Z S-Box working in CNT mode. It is one of the approved ciphers in Russia. It is not enabled by default. |
NULL | Legacy (stream) | TLS 1.0, TLS 1.1, TLS 1.2 | NULL is the empty/identity cipher which doesn’t encrypt any data. It can be combined with data authentication under TLS 1.2 or earlier, but is only used transiently under TLS 1.3 until encryption starts. This cipher cannot be negotiated by default (need to be explicitly enabled) under TLS 1.2, and cannot be negotiated at all under TLS 1.3. When enabled, TLS 1.3 (or later) support will be implicitly disabled. |
Algorithm | Description |
---|---|
MAC-MD5 | This is an HMAC based on MD5 a cryptographic hash algorithm designed by Ron Rivest. Outputs 128 bits of data. |
MAC-SHA1 | An HMAC based on the SHA1 cryptographic hash algorithm designed by NSA. Outputs 160 bits of data. |
MAC-SHA256 | An HMAC based on SHA2-256. Outputs 256 bits of data. |
MAC-SHA384 | An HMAC based on SHA2-384. Outputs 384 bits of data. |
GOST28147-TC26Z-IMIT | This is a 64-bit block cipher GOST 28147-89 with TC26Z S-Box working in special MAC mode called Imitovstavks. It is one of the approved MAC algorithms in Russia. Outputs 32 bits of data. It is not enabled by default. |
MAC-AEAD | This indicates that an authenticated encryption algorithm, such as GCM, is in use. |
Next: On Record Padding, Previous: Encryption algorithms used in the record layer, Up: The TLS record protocol [Contents][Index]
In early versions of TLS the record layer supported compression. However, that proved to be problematic in many ways, and enabled several attacks based on traffic analysis on the transported data. For that newer versions of the protocol no longer offer compression, and GnuTLS since 3.6.0 no longer implements any support for compression.
Previous: Compression algorithms and the record layer, Up: The TLS record protocol [Contents][Index]
The TLS 1.3 protocol allows for extra padding of records to prevent statistical analysis based on the length of exchanged messages. GnuTLS takes advantage of this feature, by allowing the user to specify the amount of padding for a particular message. The simplest interface is provided by gnutls_record_send2, and is made available when under TLS1.3; alternatively gnutls_record_can_use_length_hiding can be queried.
Note that this interface is not sufficient to completely hide the length of the
data. The application code may reveal the data transferred by leaking its
data processing time, or by leaking the TLS1.3 record processing time by
GnuTLS. That is because under TLS1.3 the padding removal time depends on the
padding data for an efficient implementation. To make that processing
constant time the gnutls_init function must be called with
the flag GNUTLS_SAFE_PADDING_CHECK
.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
data: contains the data to send
data_size: is the length of the data
pad: padding to be added to the record
flags: must be zero
This function is identical to gnutls_record_send()
except that it
takes an extra argument to specify padding to be added the record.
To determine the maximum size of padding, use
gnutls_record_get_max_size()
and gnutls_record_overhead_size()
.
Note that in order for GnuTLS to provide constant time processing
of padding and data in TLS1.3, the flag GNUTLS_SAFE_PADDING_CHECK
must be used in gnutls_init()
.
Returns: The number of bytes sent, or a negative error code. The
number of bytes sent might be less than data_size
. The maximum
number of bytes this function can send in a single call depends
on the negotiated maximum record size.
Since: 3.6.3
Older GnuTLS versions provided an API suitable for cases where the sender sends data that are always within a given range. That API is still available, and consists of the following functions.
unsigned gnutls_record_can_use_length_hiding (gnutls_session_t session)
ssize_t gnutls_record_send_range (gnutls_session_t session, const void * data, size_t data_size, const gnutls_range_st * range)
Next: The TLS Handshake Protocol, Previous: The TLS record protocol, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
The alert protocol is there to allow signals to be sent between peers.
These signals are mostly used to inform the peer about the cause of a
protocol failure. Some of these signals are used internally by the
protocol and the application protocol does not have to cope with them
(e.g. GNUTLS_A_CLOSE_NOTIFY
), and others refer to the
application protocol solely (e.g. GNUTLS_A_USER_CANCELLED
). An
alert signal includes a level indication which may be either fatal or
warning (under TLS1.3 all alerts are fatal). Fatal alerts always terminate
the current connection, and prevent future re-negotiations using the current
session ID. All supported alert messages are summarized in the table below.
The alert messages are protected by the record protocol, thus the information that is included does not leak. You must take extreme care for the alert information not to leak to a possible attacker, via public log files etc.
Alert | ID | Description |
---|---|---|
GNUTLS_A_CLOSE_NOTIFY | 0 | Close notify |
GNUTLS_A_UNEXPECTED_MESSAGE | 10 | Unexpected message |
GNUTLS_A_BAD_RECORD_MAC | 20 | Bad record MAC |
GNUTLS_A_DECRYPTION_FAILED | 21 | Decryption failed |
GNUTLS_A_RECORD_OVERFLOW | 22 | Record overflow |
GNUTLS_A_DECOMPRESSION_FAILURE | 30 | Decompression failed |
GNUTLS_A_HANDSHAKE_FAILURE | 40 | Handshake failed |
GNUTLS_A_SSL3_NO_CERTIFICATE | 41 | No certificate (SSL 3.0) |
GNUTLS_A_BAD_CERTIFICATE | 42 | Certificate is bad |
GNUTLS_A_UNSUPPORTED_CERTIFICATE | 43 | Certificate is not supported |
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_REVOKED | 44 | Certificate was revoked |
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_EXPIRED | 45 | Certificate is expired |
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_UNKNOWN | 46 | Unknown certificate |
GNUTLS_A_ILLEGAL_PARAMETER | 47 | Illegal parameter |
GNUTLS_A_UNKNOWN_CA | 48 | CA is unknown |
GNUTLS_A_ACCESS_DENIED | 49 | Access was denied |
GNUTLS_A_DECODE_ERROR | 50 | Decode error |
GNUTLS_A_DECRYPT_ERROR | 51 | Decrypt error |
GNUTLS_A_EXPORT_RESTRICTION | 60 | Export restriction |
GNUTLS_A_PROTOCOL_VERSION | 70 | Error in protocol version |
GNUTLS_A_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY | 71 | Insufficient security |
GNUTLS_A_INTERNAL_ERROR | 80 | Internal error |
GNUTLS_A_INAPPROPRIATE_FALLBACK | 86 | Inappropriate fallback |
GNUTLS_A_USER_CANCELED | 90 | User canceled |
GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION | 100 | No renegotiation is allowed |
GNUTLS_A_MISSING_EXTENSION | 109 | An extension was expected but was not seen |
GNUTLS_A_UNSUPPORTED_EXTENSION | 110 | An unsupported extension was sent |
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_UNOBTAINABLE | 111 | Could not retrieve the specified certificate |
GNUTLS_A_UNRECOGNIZED_NAME | 112 | The server name sent was not recognized |
GNUTLS_A_UNKNOWN_PSK_IDENTITY | 115 | The SRP/PSK username is missing or not known |
GNUTLS_A_CERTIFICATE_REQUIRED | 116 | Certificate is required |
GNUTLS_A_NO_APPLICATION_PROTOCOL | 120 | No supported application protocol could be negotiated |
Next: TLS Extensions, Previous: The TLS Alert Protocol, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
The handshake protocol is responsible for the ciphersuite negotiation, the initial key exchange, and the authentication of the two peers. This is fully controlled by the application layer, thus your program has to set up the required parameters. The main handshake function is gnutls_handshake. In the next paragraphs we elaborate on the handshake protocol, i.e., the ciphersuite negotiation.
• TLS Cipher Suites | TLS session parameters. | |
• Authentication | TLS authentication. | |
• Client Authentication | Requesting a certificate from the client. | |
• Resuming Sessions | Reusing previously established keys. |
Next: Authentication, Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol [Contents][Index]
The TLS cipher suites have slightly different meaning under different protocols. Under TLS 1.3, a cipher suite indicates the symmetric encryption algorithm in use, as well as the pseudo-random function (PRF) used in the TLS session.
Under TLS 1.2 or early the handshake protocol negotiates cipher suites of
a special form illustrated by the TLS_DHE_RSA_WITH_3DES_CBC_SHA
cipher suite name.
A typical cipher suite contains these parameters:
DHE_RSA
in the example.
3DES_CBC
in this example.
MAC_SHA
is used in the above example.
The cipher suite negotiated in the handshake protocol will affect the record protocol, by enabling encryption and data authentication. Note that you should not over rely on TLS to negotiate the strongest available cipher suite. Do not enable ciphers and algorithms that you consider weak.
All the supported ciphersuites are listed in ciphersuites.
Next: Client Authentication, Previous: TLS Cipher Suites, Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol [Contents][Index]
The key exchange algorithms of the TLS protocol offer authentication, which is a prerequisite for a secure connection. The available authentication methods in GnuTLS, under TLS 1.3 or earlier versions, follow.
Under TLS 1.2 or earlier versions, the following authentication methods are also available.
Next: Resuming Sessions, Previous: Authentication, Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol [Contents][Index]
In the case of ciphersuites that use certificate authentication, the authentication of the client is optional in TLS. A server may request a certificate from the client using the gnutls_certificate_server_set_request function. We elaborate in Certificate credentials.
Previous: Client Authentication, Up: The TLS Handshake Protocol [Contents][Index]
The TLS handshake process performs expensive calculations and a busy server might easily be put under load. To reduce the load, session resumption may be used. This is a feature of the TLS protocol which allows a client to connect to a server after a successful handshake, without the expensive calculations. This is achieved by re-using the previously established keys, meaning the server needs to store the state of established connections (unless session tickets are used – Session tickets).
Session resumption is an integral part of GnuTLS, and Session resumption, ex-resume-client illustrate typical uses of it.
Next: How to use TLS in application protocols, Previous: The TLS Handshake Protocol, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
A number of extensions to the TLS protocol have been proposed mainly in [TLSEXT]. The extensions supported in GnuTLS are discussed in the subsections that follow.
Next: Server name indication, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
This extension allows a TLS implementation to negotiate a smaller value for record packet maximum length. This extension may be useful to clients with constrained capabilities. The functions shown below can be used to control this extension.
size_t gnutls_record_get_max_size (gnutls_session_t session)
ssize_t gnutls_record_set_max_size (gnutls_session_t session, size_t size)
Next: Session tickets, Previous: Maximum fragment length negotiation, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
A common problem in HTTPS servers is the fact that the TLS protocol is not aware of the hostname that a client connects to, when the handshake procedure begins. For that reason the TLS server has no way to know which certificate to send.
This extension solves that problem within the TLS protocol, and allows a client to send the HTTP hostname before the handshake begins within the first handshake packet. The functions gnutls_server_name_set and gnutls_server_name_get can be used to enable this extension, or to retrieve the name sent by a client.
int gnutls_server_name_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_server_name_type_t type, const void * name, size_t name_length)
int gnutls_server_name_get (gnutls_session_t session, void * data, size_t * data_length, unsigned int * type, unsigned int indx)
Next: HeartBeat, Previous: Server name indication, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
To resume a TLS session, the server normally stores session parameters. This complicates deployment, and can be avoided by delegating the storage to the client. Because session parameters are sensitive they are encrypted and authenticated with a key only known to the server and then sent to the client. The Session Tickets extension is described in RFC 5077 [TLSTKT].
A disadvantage of session tickets is that they eliminate the effects of forward secrecy when a server uses the same key for long time. That is, the secrecy of all sessions on a server using tickets depends on the ticket key being kept secret. For that reason server keys should be rotated and discarded regularly.
Since version 3.1.3 GnuTLS clients transparently support session tickets, unless forward secrecy is explicitly requested (with the PFS priority string).
Under TLS 1.3 session tickets are mandatory for session resumption, and they do not share the forward secrecy concerns as with TLS 1.2 or earlier.
Next: Safe renegotiation, Previous: Session tickets, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
This is a TLS extension that allows to ping and receive confirmation from the peer,
and is described in [RFC6520]. The extension is disabled by default and
gnutls_heartbeat_enable can be used to enable it. A policy
may be negotiated to only allow sending heartbeat messages or sending and receiving.
The current session policy can be checked with gnutls_heartbeat_allowed.
The requests coming from the peer result to GNUTLS_E_HEARTBEAT_PING_RECEIVED
being returned from the receive function. Ping requests to peer can be send via
gnutls_heartbeat_ping.
unsigned gnutls_heartbeat_allowed (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int type)
void gnutls_heartbeat_enable (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int type)
int gnutls_heartbeat_ping (gnutls_session_t session, size_t data_size, unsigned int max_tries, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_heartbeat_pong (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int flags)
void gnutls_heartbeat_set_timeouts (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int retrans_timeout, unsigned int total_timeout)
unsigned int gnutls_heartbeat_get_timeout (gnutls_session_t session)
Next: OCSP status request, Previous: HeartBeat, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
TLS gives the option to two communicating parties to renegotiate and update their security parameters. One useful example of this feature was for a client to initially connect using anonymous negotiation to a server, and the renegotiate using some authenticated ciphersuite. This occurred to avoid having the client sending its credentials in the clear.
However this renegotiation, as initially designed would not ensure that the party one is renegotiating is the same as the one in the initial negotiation. For example one server could forward all renegotiation traffic to an other server who will see this traffic as an initial negotiation attempt.
This might be seen as a valid design decision, but it seems it was not widely known or understood, thus today some application protocols use the TLS renegotiation feature in a manner that enables a malicious server to insert content of his choice in the beginning of a TLS session.
The most prominent vulnerability was with HTTPS. There servers request a renegotiation to enforce an anonymous user to use a certificate in order to access certain parts of a web site. The attack works by having the attacker simulate a client and connect to a server, with server-only authentication, and send some data intended to cause harm. The server will then require renegotiation from him in order to perform the request. When the proper client attempts to contact the server, the attacker hijacks that connection and forwards traffic to the initial server that requested renegotiation. The attacker will not be able to read the data exchanged between the client and the server. However, the server will (incorrectly) assume that the initial request sent by the attacker was sent by the now authenticated client. The result is a prefix plain-text injection attack.
The above is just one example. Other vulnerabilities exists that do not rely on the TLS renegotiation to change the client’s authenticated status (either TLS or application layer).
While fixing these application protocols and implementations would be one natural reaction, an extension to TLS has been designed that cryptographically binds together any renegotiated handshakes with the initial negotiation. When the extension is used, the attack is detected and the session can be terminated. The extension is specified in [RFC5746].
GnuTLS supports the safe renegotiation extension. The default behavior is as follows. Clients will attempt to negotiate the safe renegotiation extension when talking to servers. Servers will accept the extension when presented by clients. Clients and servers will permit an initial handshake to complete even when the other side does not support the safe renegotiation extension. Clients and servers will refuse renegotiation attempts when the extension has not been negotiated.
Note that permitting clients to connect to servers when the safe renegotiation extension is not enabled, is open up for attacks. Changing this default behavior would prevent interoperability against the majority of deployed servers out there. We will reconsider this default behavior in the future when more servers have been upgraded. Note that it is easy to configure clients to always require the safe renegotiation extension from servers.
To modify the default behavior, we have introduced some new priority
strings (see Priority Strings).
The %UNSAFE_RENEGOTIATION
priority string permits
(re-)handshakes even when the safe renegotiation extension was not
negotiated. The default behavior is %PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION
that will
prevent renegotiation with clients and servers not supporting the
extension. This is secure for servers but leaves clients vulnerable
to some attacks, but this is a trade-off between security and compatibility
with old servers. The %SAFE_RENEGOTIATION
priority string makes
clients and servers require the extension for every handshake. The latter
is the most secure option for clients, at the cost of not being able
to connect to legacy servers. Servers will also deny clients that
do not support the extension from connecting.
It is possible to disable use of the extension completely, in both
clients and servers, by using the %DISABLE_SAFE_RENEGOTIATION
priority string however we strongly recommend you to only do this for
debugging and test purposes.
The default values if the flags above are not specified are:
Server:
%PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION
Client:
%PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION
For applications we have introduced a new API related to safe renegotiation. The gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status function is used to check if the extension has been negotiated on a session, and can be used both by clients and servers.
Next: SRTP, Previous: Safe renegotiation, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
The Online Certificate Status Protocol (OCSP) is a protocol that allows the
client to verify the server certificate for revocation without messing with
certificate revocation lists. Its drawback is that it requires the client
to connect to the server’s CA OCSP server and request the status of the
certificate. This extension however, enables a TLS server to include
its CA OCSP server response in the handshake. That is an HTTPS server
may periodically run ocsptool
(see ocsptool Invocation) to obtain
its certificate revocation status and serve it to the clients. That
way a client avoids an additional connection to the OCSP server.
See OCSP stapling for further information.
Since version 3.1.3 GnuTLS clients transparently support the certificate status request.
Next: False Start, Previous: OCSP status request, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
The TLS protocol was extended in [RFC5764] to provide keying material to the Secure RTP (SRTP) protocol. The SRTP protocol provides an encapsulation of encrypted data that is optimized for voice data. With the SRTP TLS extension two peers can negotiate keys using TLS or DTLS and obtain keying material for use with SRTP. The available SRTP profiles are listed below.
GNUTLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_80
128 bit AES with a 80 bit HMAC-SHA1
GNUTLS_SRTP_AES128_CM_HMAC_SHA1_32
128 bit AES with a 32 bit HMAC-SHA1
GNUTLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_80
NULL cipher with a 80 bit HMAC-SHA1
GNUTLS_SRTP_NULL_HMAC_SHA1_32
NULL cipher with a 32 bit HMAC-SHA1
GNUTLS_SRTP_AEAD_AES_128_GCM
128 bit AES with GCM
GNUTLS_SRTP_AEAD_AES_256_GCM
256 bit AES with GCM
To enable use the following functions.
int gnutls_srtp_set_profile (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_srtp_profile_t profile)
int gnutls_srtp_set_profile_direct (gnutls_session_t session, const char * profiles, const char ** err_pos)
To obtain the negotiated keys use the function below.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
key_material: Space to hold the generated key material
key_material_size: The maximum size of the key material
client_key: The master client write key, pointing inside the key material
client_salt: The master client write salt, pointing inside the key material
server_key: The master server write key, pointing inside the key material
server_salt: The master server write salt, pointing inside the key material
This is a helper function to generate the keying material for SRTP.
It requires the space of the key material to be pre-allocated (should be at least
2x the maximum key size and salt size). The client_key
, client_salt
, server_key
and server_salt
are convenience datums that point inside the key material. They may
be NULL
.
Returns: On success the size of the key material is returned,
otherwise, GNUTLS_E_SHORT_MEMORY_BUFFER
if the buffer given is not
sufficient, or a negative error code.
Since 3.1.4
Other helper functions are listed below.
int gnutls_srtp_get_selected_profile (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_srtp_profile_t * profile)
const char * gnutls_srtp_get_profile_name (gnutls_srtp_profile_t profile)
int gnutls_srtp_get_profile_id (const char * name, gnutls_srtp_profile_t * profile)
Next: Application Layer Protocol Negotiation (ALPN), Previous: SRTP, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
The TLS protocol was extended in [RFC7918] to allow the client to send data to server in a single round trip. This change however operates on the borderline of the TLS protocol security guarantees and should be used for the cases where the reduced latency outperforms the risk of an adversary intercepting the transferred data. In GnuTLS applications can use the GNUTLS_ENABLE_FALSE_START as option to gnutls_init to request an early return of the gnutls_handshake function. After that early return the application is expected to transfer any data to be piggybacked on the last handshake message.
After handshake’s early termination, the application is expected to transmit data using gnutls_record_send, and call gnutls_record_recv on any received data as soon, to ensure that handshake completes timely. That is, especially relevant for applications which set an explicit time limit for the handshake process via gnutls_handshake_set_timeout.
Note however, that the API ensures that the early return will not happen if the false start requirements are not satisfied. That is, on ciphersuites which are not enabled for false start or on insufficient key sizes, the handshake process will complete properly (i.e., no early return). To verify that false start was used you may use gnutls_session_get_flags and check for the GNUTLS_SFLAGS_FALSE_START flag. For GnuTLS the false start is enabled for the following key exchange methods (see [RFC7918] for rationale)
but only when the negotiated parameters exceed GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_HIGH
–see Table 6.7, and when under (D)TLS 1.2 or later.
Next: Extensions and Supplemental Data, Previous: False Start, Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
The TLS protocol was extended in RFC7301
to provide the application layer a method of
negotiating the application protocol version. This allows for negotiation
of the application protocol during the TLS handshake, thus reducing
round-trips. The application protocol is described by an opaque
string. To enable, use the following functions.
int gnutls_alpn_set_protocols (gnutls_session_t session, const gnutls_datum_t * protocols, unsigned protocols_size, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_alpn_get_selected_protocol (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * protocol)
Note that these functions are intended to be used with protocols that are registered in the Application Layer Protocol Negotiation IANA registry. While you can use them for other protocols (at the risk of collisions), it is preferable to register them.
Previous: Application Layer Protocol Negotiation (ALPN), Up: TLS Extensions [Contents][Index]
It is possible to transfer supplemental data during the TLS handshake, following [RFC4680]. This is for "custom" protocol modifications for applications which may want to transfer additional data (e.g. additional authentication messages). Such an exchange requires a custom extension to be registered. The provided API for this functionality is low-level and described in TLS Hello Extension Handling.
Next: On SSL 2 and older protocols, Previous: TLS Extensions, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
This chapter is intended to provide some hints on how to use TLS over simple custom made application protocols. The discussion below mainly refers to the TCP/IP transport layer but may be extended to other ones too.
• Separate ports | ||
• Upward negotiation |
Traditionally SSL was used in application protocols by assigning a new port number for the secure services. By doing this two separate ports were assigned, one for the non-secure sessions, and one for the secure sessions. This method ensures that if a user requests a secure session then the client will attempt to connect to the secure port and fail otherwise. The only possible attack with this method is to perform a denial of service attack. The most famous example of this method is “HTTP over TLS” or HTTPS protocol [RFC2818].
Despite its wide use, this method has several issues. This approach starts the TLS Handshake procedure just after the client connects on the —so called— secure port. That way the TLS protocol does not know anything about the client, and popular methods like the host advertising in HTTP do not work6. There is no way for the client to say “I connected to YYY server” before the Handshake starts, so the server cannot possibly know which certificate to use.
Other than that it requires two separate ports to run a single service, which is unnecessary complication. Due to the fact that there is a limitation on the available privileged ports, this approach was soon deprecated in favor of upward negotiation.
Previous: Separate ports, Up: How to use TLS in application protocols [Contents][Index]
Other application protocols7 use a different approach to enable the secure layer. They use something often called as the “TLS upgrade” method. This method is quite tricky but it is more flexible. The idea is to extend the application protocol to have a “STARTTLS” request, whose purpose it to start the TLS protocols just after the client requests it. This approach does not require any extra port to be reserved. There is even an extension to HTTP protocol to support this method [RFC2817].
The tricky part, in this method, is that the “STARTTLS” request is sent in the clear, thus is vulnerable to modifications. A typical attack is to modify the messages in a way that the client is fooled and thinks that the server does not have the “STARTTLS” capability. See a typical conversation of a hypothetical protocol:
(client connects to the server)
CLIENT: HELLO I’M MR. XXX
SERVER: NICE TO MEET YOU XXX
CLIENT: PLEASE START TLS
SERVER: OK
*** TLS STARTS
CLIENT: HERE ARE SOME CONFIDENTIAL DATA
And an example of a conversation where someone is acting in between:
(client connects to the server)
CLIENT: HELLO I’M MR. XXX
SERVER: NICE TO MEET YOU XXX
CLIENT: PLEASE START TLS
(here someone inserts this message)
SERVER: SORRY I DON’T HAVE THIS CAPABILITY
CLIENT: HERE ARE SOME CONFIDENTIAL DATA
As you can see above the client was fooled, and was naïve enough to send the confidential data in the clear, despite the server telling the client that it does not support “STARTTLS”.
How do we avoid the above attack? As you may have already noticed this situation is easy to avoid. The client has to ask the user before it connects whether the user requests TLS or not. If the user answered that he certainly wants the secure layer the last conversation should be:
(client connects to the server)
CLIENT: HELLO I’M MR. XXX
SERVER: NICE TO MEET YOU XXX
CLIENT: PLEASE START TLS
(here someone inserts this message)
SERVER: SORRY I DON’T HAVE THIS CAPABILITY
CLIENT: BYE
(the client notifies the user that the secure connection was not possible)
This method, if implemented properly, is far better than the traditional method, and the security properties remain the same, since only denial of service is possible. The benefit is that the server may request additional data before the TLS Handshake protocol starts, in order to send the correct certificate, use the correct password file, or anything else!
Previous: How to use TLS in application protocols, Up: Introduction to TLS [Contents][Index]
One of the initial decisions in the GnuTLS development was to implement the known security protocols for the transport layer. Initially TLS 1.0 was implemented since it was the latest at that time, and was considered to be the most advanced in security properties. Later the SSL 3.0 protocol was implemented since it is still the only protocol supported by several servers and there are no serious security vulnerabilities known.
One question that may arise is why we didn’t implement SSL 2.0 in the library. There are several reasons, most important being that it has serious security flaws, unacceptable for a modern security library. Other than that, this protocol is barely used by anyone these days since it has been deprecated since 1996. The security problems in SSL 2.0 include:
Other protocols such as Microsoft’s PCT 1 and PCT 2 were not implemented because they were also abandoned and deprecated by SSL 3.0 and later TLS 1.0.
Next: Hardware security modules and abstract key types, Previous: Introduction to TLS, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
The initial key exchange of the TLS protocol performs authentication of the peers. In typical scenarios the server is authenticated to the client, and optionally the client to the server.
While many associate TLS with X.509 certificates and public key authentication, the protocol supports various authentication methods, including pre-shared keys, and passwords. In this chapter a description of the existing authentication methods is provided, as well as some guidance on which use-cases each method can be used at.
• Certificate authentication | ||
• More on certificate authentication | ||
• Shared-key and anonymous authentication | ||
• Selecting an appropriate authentication method |
The most known authentication method of TLS are certificates. The PKIX [PKIX] public key infrastructure is daily used by anyone using a browser today. GnuTLS provides a simple API to verify the X.509 certificates as in [PKIX].
The key exchange algorithms supported by certificate authentication are shown in Table 4.1.
Key exchange | Description |
---|---|
RSA | The RSA algorithm is used to encrypt a key and send it to the peer. The certificate must allow the key to be used for encryption. |
DHE_RSA | The RSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The key in the certificate must allow the key to be used for signing. Note that key exchange algorithms which use ephemeral Diffie-Hellman parameters, offer perfect forward secrecy. That means that even if the private key used for signing is compromised, it cannot be used to reveal past session data. |
ECDHE_RSA | The RSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The key in the certificate must allow the key to be used for signing. It also offers perfect forward secrecy. That means that even if the private key used for signing is compromised, it cannot be used to reveal past session data. |
DHE_DSS | The DSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The certificate must contain DSA parameters to use this key exchange algorithm. DSA is the algorithm of the Digital Signature Standard (DSS). |
ECDHE_ECDSA | The Elliptic curve DSA algorithm is used to sign ephemeral elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman parameters which are sent to the peer. The certificate must contain ECDSA parameters (i.e., EC and marked for signing) to use this key exchange algorithm. |
• X.509 certificates | ||
• OpenPGP certificates | ||
• Raw public-keys | ||
• Advanced certificate verification | ||
• Digital signatures |
Next: OpenPGP certificates, Up: Certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
The X.509 protocols rely on a hierarchical trust model. In this trust model Certification Authorities (CAs) are used to certify entities. Usually more than one certification authorities exist, and certification authorities may certify other authorities to issue certificates as well, following a hierarchical model.
One needs to trust one or more CAs for his secure communications. In that case only the certificates issued by the trusted authorities are acceptable. The framework is illustrated on Figure 4.1.
Next: Importing an X.509 certificate, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
An X.509 certificate usually contains information about the certificate holder, the signer, a unique serial number, expiration dates and some other fields [PKIX] as shown in Table 4.2.
Field | Description |
---|---|
version | The field that indicates the version of the certificate. |
serialNumber | This field holds a unique serial number per certificate. |
signature | The issuing authority’s signature. |
issuer | Holds the issuer’s distinguished name. |
validity | The activation and expiration dates. |
subject | The subject’s distinguished name of the certificate. |
extensions | The extensions are fields only present in version 3 certificates. |
The certificate’s subject or issuer name is not just a single string. It is a Distinguished name and in the ASN.1 notation is a sequence of several object identifiers with their corresponding values. Some of available OIDs to be used in an X.509 distinguished name are defined in gnutls/x509.h.
The Version field in a certificate has values either 1 or 3 for version 3 certificates. Version 1 certificates do not support the extensions field so it is not possible to distinguish a CA from a person, thus their usage should be avoided.
The validity dates are there to indicate the date that the specific certificate was activated and the date the certificate’s key would be considered invalid.
In GnuTLS the X.509 certificate structures are
handled using the gnutls_x509_crt_t
type and the corresponding
private keys with the gnutls_x509_privkey_t
type. All the
available functions for X.509 certificate handling have
their prototypes in gnutls/x509.h. An example program to
demonstrate the X.509 parsing capabilities can be found in
ex-x509-info.
Next: X.509 certificate names, Previous: X.509 certificate structure, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
The certificate structure should be initialized using gnutls_x509_crt_init, and a certificate structure can be imported using gnutls_x509_crt_import.
int gnutls_x509_crt_init (gnutls_x509_crt_t * cert)
int gnutls_x509_crt_import (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
void gnutls_x509_crt_deinit (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert)
In several functions an array of certificates is required. To assist in initialization and import the following two functions are provided.
int gnutls_x509_crt_list_import (gnutls_x509_crt_t * certs, unsigned int * cert_max, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crt_list_import2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t ** certs, unsigned int * size, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)
In all cases after use a certificate must be deinitialized using gnutls_x509_crt_deinit.
Note that although the functions above apply to gnutls_x509_crt_t
structure, similar functions
exist for the CRL structure gnutls_x509_crl_t
.
Next: X.509 distinguished names, Previous: Importing an X.509 certificate, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
X.509 certificates allow for multiple names and types of names to be specified. CA certificates often rely on X.509 distinguished names (see X.509 distinguished names) for unique identification, while end-user and server certificates rely on the ’subject alternative names’. The subject alternative names provide a typed name, e.g., a DNS name, or an email address, which identifies the owner of the certificate. The following functions provide access to that names.
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_subject_alt_name2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned int seq, void * san, size_t * san_size, unsigned int * san_type, unsigned int * critical)
int gnutls_x509_crt_set_subject_alt_name (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const void * data, unsigned int data_size, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_subject_alt_names_init (gnutls_subject_alt_names_t * sans)
int gnutls_subject_alt_names_get (gnutls_subject_alt_names_t sans, unsigned int seq, unsigned int * san_type, gnutls_datum_t * san, gnutls_datum_t * othername_oid)
int gnutls_subject_alt_names_set (gnutls_subject_alt_names_t sans, unsigned int san_type, const gnutls_datum_t * san, const char * othername_oid)
Note however, that server certificates often used the Common Name (CN), part of the certificate DistinguishedName to place a single DNS address. That practice is discouraged (see [RFC6125]), because only a single address can be specified, and the CN field is free-form making matching ambiguous.
Next: X.509 extensions, Previous: X.509 certificate names, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
The “subject” of an X.509 certificate is not described by a single name, but rather with a distinguished name. This in X.509 terminology is a list of strings each associated an object identifier. To make things simple GnuTLS provides gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn2 which follows the rules in [RFC4514] and returns a single string. Access to each string by individual object identifiers can be accessed using gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn_by_oid.
cert: should contain a gnutls_x509_crt_t
type
dn: a pointer to a structure to hold the name; must be freed using gnutls_free()
This function will allocate buffer and copy the name of the Certificate. The name will be in the form "C=xxxx,O=yyyy,CN=zzzz" as described in RFC4514. The output string will be ASCII or UTF-8 encoded, depending on the certificate data.
This function does not output a fully RFC4514 compliant string, if
that is required see gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn3()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.10
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, char * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn_by_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const char * oid, unsigned indx, unsigned int raw_flag, void * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, void * oid, size_t * oid_size)
Similar functions exist to access the distinguished name of the issuer of the certificate.
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, char * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_datum_t * dn)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn_by_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const char * oid, unsigned indx, unsigned int raw_flag, void * buf, size_t * buf_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn_oid (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, void * oid, size_t * oid_size)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_dn_t * dn)
The more powerful gnutls_x509_crt_get_subject and gnutls_x509_dn_get_rdn_ava provide efficient but low-level access to the contents of the distinguished name structure.
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_subject (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_dn_t * dn)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_dn_t * dn)
dn: a pointer to DN
irdn: index of RDN
iava: index of AVA.
ava: Pointer to structure which will hold output information.
Get pointers to data within the DN. The format of the ava
structure
is shown below.
struct gnutls_x509_ava_st { gnutls_datum_t oid; gnutls_datum_t value; unsigned long value_tag; };
The X.509 distinguished name is a sequence of sequences of strings
and this is what the irdn
and iava
indexes model.
Note that ava
will contain pointers into the dn
structure which
in turns points to the original certificate. Thus you should not
modify any data or deallocate any of those.
This is a low-level function that requires the caller to do the value conversions when necessary (e.g. from UCS-2).
Returns: Returns 0 on success, or an error code.
Next: X.509 public and private keys, Previous: X.509 distinguished names, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
X.509 version 3 certificates include a list of extensions that can be used to obtain additional information on the subject or the issuer of the certificate. Those may be e-mail addresses, flags that indicate whether the belongs to a CA etc. All the supported X.509 version 3 extensions are shown in Table 4.3.
The certificate extensions access is split into two parts. The first requires to retrieve the extension, and the second is the parsing part.
To enumerate and retrieve the DER-encoded extension data available in a certificate the following two functions are available.
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_extension_info (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, void * oid, size_t * oid_size, unsigned int * critical)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_extension_data2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_extension_by_oid2 (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, const char * oid, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * output, unsigned int * critical)
After a supported DER-encoded extension is retrieved it can be parsed using the APIs in x509-ext.h
.
Complex extensions may require initializing an intermediate structure that holds the
parsed extension data. Examples of simple parsing functions are shown below.
int gnutls_x509_ext_import_basic_constraints (const gnutls_datum_t * ext, unsigned int * ca, int * pathlen)
int gnutls_x509_ext_export_basic_constraints (unsigned int ca, int pathlen, gnutls_datum_t * ext)
int gnutls_x509_ext_import_key_usage (const gnutls_datum_t * ext, unsigned int * key_usage)
int gnutls_x509_ext_export_key_usage (unsigned int usage, gnutls_datum_t * ext)
More complex extensions, such as Name Constraints, require an intermediate structure, in that
case gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t
to be initialized in order to store the parsed
extension data.
int gnutls_x509_ext_import_name_constraints (const gnutls_datum_t * ext, gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_ext_export_name_constraints (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_datum_t * ext)
After the name constraints are extracted in the structure, the following functions can be used to access them.
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_get_permitted (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, unsigned idx, unsigned * type, gnutls_datum_t * name)
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_get_excluded (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, unsigned idx, unsigned * type, gnutls_datum_t * name)
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_add_permitted (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * name)
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_add_excluded (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * name)
unsigned gnutls_x509_name_constraints_check (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * name)
unsigned gnutls_x509_name_constraints_check_crt (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc, gnutls_x509_subject_alt_name_t type, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert)
Other utility functions are listed below.
int gnutls_x509_name_constraints_init (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t * nc)
void gnutls_x509_name_constraints_deinit (gnutls_x509_name_constraints_t nc)
Similar functions exist for all of the other supported extensions, listed in Table 4.3.
Extension | OID | Description |
---|---|---|
Subject key id | 2.5.29.14 | An identifier of the key of the subject. |
Key usage | 2.5.29.15 | Constraints the key’s usage of the certificate. |
Private key usage period | 2.5.29.16 | Constraints the validity time of the private key. |
Subject alternative name | 2.5.29.17 | Alternative names to subject’s distinguished name. |
Issuer alternative name | 2.5.29.18 | Alternative names to the issuer’s distinguished name. |
Basic constraints | 2.5.29.19 | Indicates whether this is a CA certificate or not, and specify the maximum path lengths of certificate chains. |
Name constraints | 2.5.29.30 | A field in CA certificates that restricts the scope of the name of issued certificates. |
CRL distribution points | 2.5.29.31 | This extension is set by the CA, in order to inform about the location of issued Certificate Revocation Lists. |
Certificate policy | 2.5.29.32 | This extension is set to indicate the certificate policy as object identifier and may contain a descriptive string or URL. |
Extended key usage | 2.5.29.54 | Inhibit any policy extension. Constraints the any policy OID
(GNUTLS_X509_OID_POLICY_ANY ) use in the policy extension. |
Authority key identifier | 2.5.29.35 | An identifier of the key of the issuer of the certificate. That is used to distinguish between different keys of the same issuer. |
Extended key usage | 2.5.29.37 | Constraints the purpose of the certificate. |
Authority information access | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.1.1 | Information on services by the issuer of the certificate. |
Proxy Certification Information | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.1.14 | Proxy Certificates includes this extension that contains the OID of the proxy policy language used, and can specify limits on the maximum lengths of proxy chains. Proxy Certificates are specified in [RFC3820]. |
Note, that there are also direct APIs to access extensions that may
be simpler to use for non-complex extensions. They are available
in x509.h
and some examples are listed below.
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_basic_constraints (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned int * critical, unsigned int * ca, int * pathlen)
int gnutls_x509_crt_set_basic_constraints (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int ca, int pathLenConstraint)
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_key_usage (gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, unsigned int * key_usage, unsigned int * critical)
int gnutls_x509_crt_set_key_usage (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int usage)
Next: Verifying X.509 certificate paths, Previous: X.509 extensions, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
Each X.509 certificate contains a public key that corresponds to a private key. To
get a unique identifier of the public key the gnutls_x509_crt_get_key_id
function is provided. To export the public key or its parameters you may need
to convert the X.509 structure to a gnutls_pubkey_t
. See
Abstract public keys for more information.
crt: Holds the certificate
flags: should be one of the flags from gnutls_keyid_flags_t
output_data: will contain the key ID
output_data_size: holds the size of output_data (and will be replaced by the actual size of parameters)
This function will return a unique ID that depends on the public key parameters. This ID can be used in checking whether a certificate corresponds to the given private key.
If the buffer provided is not long enough to hold the output, then *output_data_size is updated and GNUTLS_E_SHORT_MEMORY_BUFFER will be returned. The output will normally be a SHA-1 hash output, which is 20 bytes.
Returns: In case of failure a negative error code will be returned, and 0 on success.
The private key parameters may be directly accessed by using one of the following functions.
int gnutls_x509_privkey_get_pk_algorithm2 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, unsigned int * bits)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_rsa_raw2 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * m, gnutls_datum_t * e, gnutls_datum_t * d, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * u, gnutls_datum_t * e1, gnutls_datum_t * e2)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_ecc_raw (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_ecc_curve_t * curve, gnutls_datum_t * x, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * k)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_dsa_raw (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * g, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * x)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_get_key_id (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags, unsigned char * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
Next: Verifying a certificate in the context of TLS session, Previous: X.509 public and private keys, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
Verifying certificate paths is important in X.509 authentication. For this purpose the following functions are provided.
list: The list
clist: A list of CAs
clist_size: The length of the CA list
flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t
This function will add the given certificate authorities
to the trusted list. The CAs in clist
must not be deinitialized
during the lifetime of list
.
If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES
is specified, then
this function will ensure that no duplicates will be
present in the final trust list.
If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATE_KEY
is specified, then
this function will ensure that no certificates with the
same key are present in the final trust list.
If either GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATE_KEY
or GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES
are given, gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit()
must be called with parameter
all
being 1.
Returns: The number of added elements is returned; that includes duplicate entries.
Since: 3.0.0
list: The list
cert: A certificate
name: An identifier for the certificate
name_size: The size of the identifier
flags: should be 0.
This function will add the given certificate to the trusted
list and associate it with a name. The certificate will not be
be used for verification with gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt()
but with gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt()
or
gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2()
- the latter only since
GnuTLS 3.4.0 and if a hostname is provided.
In principle this function can be used to set individual "server" certificates that are trusted by the user for that specific server but for no other purposes.
The certificate cert
must not be deinitialized during the lifetime
of the list
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.0.0
list: The list
crl_list: A list of CRLs
crl_size: The length of the CRL list
flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t
verification_flags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL
This function will add the given certificate revocation lists
to the trusted list. The CRLs in crl_list
must not be deinitialized
during the lifetime of list
.
This function must be called after gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_cas()
to allow verifying the CRLs for validity. If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES
is given, then the final CRL list will not contain duplicate entries.
If the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES
is given, gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit()
must be
called with parameter all
being 1.
If flag GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL
is given the CRLs will be verified before being added,
and if verification fails, they will be skipped.
Returns: The number of added elements is returned; that includes duplicate entries.
Since: 3.0
list: The list
cert_list: is the certificate list to be verified
cert_list_size: is the certificate list size
flags: Flags that may be used to change the verification algorithm. Use OR of the gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumerations.
voutput: will hold the certificate verification output.
func: If non-null will be called on each chain element verification with the output.
This function will try to verify the given certificate and return
its status. The voutput
parameter will hold an OR’ed sequence of
gnutls_certificate_status_t
flags.
The details of the verification are the same as in gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.0
list: The list
cert_list: is the certificate list to be verified
cert_list_size: is the certificate list size
data: an array of typed data
elements: the number of data elements
flags: Flags that may be used to change the verification algorithm. Use OR of the gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumerations.
voutput: will hold the certificate verification output.
func: If non-null will be called on each chain element verification with the output.
This function will attempt to verify the given certificate chain and return
its status. The voutput
parameter will hold an OR’ed sequence of
gnutls_certificate_status_t
flags.
When a certificate chain of cert_list_size
with more than one certificates is
provided, the verification status will apply to the first certificate in the chain
that failed verification. The verification process starts from the end of the chain
(from CA to end certificate). The first certificate in the chain must be the end-certificate
while the rest of the members may be sorted or not.
Additionally a certificate verification profile can be specified
from the ones in gnutls_certificate_verification_profiles_t
by
ORing the result of GNUTLS_PROFILE_TO_VFLAGS()
to the verification
flags.
Additional verification parameters are possible via the data
types; the
acceptable types are GNUTLS_DT_DNS_HOSTNAME
, GNUTLS_DT_IP_ADDRESS
and GNUTLS_DT_KEY_PURPOSE_OID
.
The former accepts as data a null-terminated hostname, and the latter a null-terminated
object identifier (e.g., GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER
).
If a DNS hostname is provided then this function will compare
the hostname in the end certificate against the given. If names do not match the
GNUTLS_CERT_UNEXPECTED_OWNER
status flag will be set. In addition it
will consider certificates provided with gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt()
.
If a key purpose OID is provided and the end-certificate contains the extended key
usage PKIX extension, it will be required to match the provided OID
or be marked for any purpose, otherwise verification will fail with
GNUTLS_CERT_PURPOSE_MISMATCH
status.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value. Note that verification failure will not result to an
error code, only voutput
will be updated.
Since: 3.3.8
list: The list
cert: is the certificate to be verified
name: is the certificate’s name
name_size: is the certificate’s name size
flags: Flags that may be used to change the verification algorithm. Use OR of the gnutls_certificate_verify_flags enumerations.
voutput: will hold the certificate verification output.
func: If non-null will be called on each chain element verification with the output.
This function will try to find a certificate that is associated with the provided
name –see gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt()
. If a match is found the
certificate is considered valid. In addition to that this function will also
check CRLs. The voutput
parameter will hold an OR’ed sequence of
gnutls_certificate_status_t
flags.
Additionally a certificate verification profile can be specified
from the ones in gnutls_certificate_verification_profiles_t
by
ORing the result of GNUTLS_PROFILE_TO_VFLAGS()
to the verification
flags.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.0.0
list: The list
ca_file: A file containing a list of CAs (optional)
crl_file: A file containing a list of CRLs (optional)
type: The format of the certificates
tl_flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t
tl_vflags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL
This function will add the given certificate authorities
to the trusted list. PKCS 11
URLs are also accepted, instead
of files, by this function. A PKCS 11
URL implies a trust
database (a specially marked module in p11-kit); the URL "pkcs11:"
implies all trust databases in the system. Only a single URL specifying
trust databases can be set; they cannot be stacked with multiple calls.
Returns: The number of added elements is returned.
Since: 3.1
list: The list
cas: A buffer containing a list of CAs (optional)
crls: A buffer containing a list of CRLs (optional)
type: The format of the certificates
tl_flags: flags from gnutls_trust_list_flags_t
tl_vflags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL
This function will add the given certificate authorities to the trusted list.
If this function is used gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit()
must be called
with parameter all
being 1.
Returns: The number of added elements is returned.
Since: 3.1
list: The structure of the list
tl_flags: GNUTLS_TL_*
tl_vflags: gnutls_certificate_verify_flags if flags specifies GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL
This function adds the system’s default trusted certificate
authorities to the trusted list. Note that on unsupported systems
this function returns GNUTLS_E_UNIMPLEMENTED_FEATURE
.
This function implies the flag GNUTLS_TL_NO_DUPLICATES
.
Returns: The number of added elements or a negative error code on error.
Since: 3.1
The verification function will verify a given certificate chain against a list of certificate
authorities and certificate revocation lists, and output
a bit-wise OR of elements of the gnutls_certificate_status_t
enumeration shown in Figure 4.2. The GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID
flag
is always set on a verification error and more detailed flags will also be set when appropriate.
GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID
The certificate is not signed by one of the
known authorities or the signature is invalid (deprecated by the flags
GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE
and GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_NOT_FOUND
).
GNUTLS_CERT_REVOKED
Certificate is revoked by its authority. In X.509 this will be set only if CRLs are checked.
GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_NOT_FOUND
The certificate’s issuer is not known. This is the case if the issuer is not included in the trusted certificate list.
GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_NOT_CA
The certificate’s signer was not a CA. This may happen if this was a version 1 certificate, which is common with some CAs, or a version 3 certificate without the basic constrains extension.
GNUTLS_CERT_INSECURE_ALGORITHM
The certificate was signed using an insecure algorithm such as MD2 or MD5. These algorithms have been broken and should not be trusted.
GNUTLS_CERT_NOT_ACTIVATED
The certificate is not yet activated.
GNUTLS_CERT_EXPIRED
The certificate has expired.
GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNATURE_FAILURE
The signature verification failed.
GNUTLS_CERT_REVOCATION_DATA_SUPERSEDED
The revocation data are old and have been superseded.
GNUTLS_CERT_UNEXPECTED_OWNER
The owner is not the expected one.
GNUTLS_CERT_REVOCATION_DATA_ISSUED_IN_FUTURE
The revocation data have a future issue date.
GNUTLS_CERT_SIGNER_CONSTRAINTS_FAILURE
The certificate’s signer constraints were violated.
GNUTLS_CERT_MISMATCH
The certificate presented isn’t the expected one (TOFU)
GNUTLS_CERT_PURPOSE_MISMATCH
The certificate or an intermediate does not match the intended purpose (extended key usage).
GNUTLS_CERT_MISSING_OCSP_STATUS
The certificate requires the server to send the certificate status, but no status was received.
GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID_OCSP_STATUS
The received OCSP status response is invalid.
GNUTLS_CERT_UNKNOWN_CRIT_EXTENSIONS
The certificate has extensions marked as critical which are not supported.
An example of certificate verification is shown in ex-verify2. It is also possible to have a set of certificates that are trusted for a particular server but not to authorize other certificates. This purpose is served by the functions gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_named_crt and gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt.
Next: Verification using PKCS11, Previous: Verifying X.509 certificate paths, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
When operating in the context of a TLS session, the trusted certificate authority list may also be set using:
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * cafile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_dir (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * ca_dir, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * crlfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred)
These functions allow the specification of the trusted certificate authorities, either via a file, a directory or use the system-specified certificate authorities. Unless the authorities are application specific, it is generally recommended to use the system trust storage (see gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust).
Unlike the previous section it is not required to setup a trusted list, and there are two approaches to verify the peer’s certificate and identity. The recommended in GnuTLS 3.5.0 and later is via the gnutls_session_set_verify_cert, but for older GnuTLS versions you may use an explicit callback set via gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function and then utilize gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 for verification. The reported verification status is identical to the verification functions described in the previous section.
Note that in certain cases it is required to check the marked purpose of
the end certificate (e.g. GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER
); in these cases
the more advanced gnutls_session_set_verify_cert2 and
gnutls_certificate_verify_peers should be used instead.
There is also the possibility to pass some input to the verification
functions in the form of flags. For gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2 the
flags are passed directly, but for
gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3, the flags are set using
gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags. All the available
flags are part of the enumeration
gnutls_certificate_verify_flags
shown in Figure 4.3.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CA_SIGN
If set a signer does not have to be a certificate authority. This flag should normally be disabled, unless you know what this means.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_IP_MATCHES
When verifying a hostname prevent textual IP addresses from matching IP addresses in the certificate. Treat the input only as a DNS name.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_SAME
If a certificate is not signed by anyone trusted but exists in the trusted CA list do not treat it as trusted.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_ANY_X509_V1_CA_CRT
Allow CA certificates that have version 1 (both root and intermediate). This might be dangerous since those haven’t the basicConstraints extension.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD2
Allow certificates to be signed using the broken MD2 algorithm.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5
Allow certificates to be signed using the broken MD5 algorithm.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_TIME_CHECKS
Disable checking of activation and expiration validity periods of certificate chains. Don’t set this unless you understand the security implications.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_TRUSTED_TIME_CHECKS
If set a signer in the trusted list is never checked for expiration or activation.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_X509_V1_CA_CRT
Do not allow trusted CA certificates that have version 1. This option is to be used to deprecate all certificates of version 1.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS
Disable checking for validity using certificate revocation lists or the available OCSP data.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_UNSORTED_CHAIN
A certificate chain is tolerated if unsorted (the case with many TLS servers out there). This is the default since GnuTLS 3.1.4.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_UNSORTED_CHAIN
Do not tolerate an unsorted certificate chain.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_DO_NOT_ALLOW_WILDCARDS
When including a hostname check in the verification, do not consider any wildcards.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_USE_TLS1_RSA
This indicates that a (raw) RSA signature is provided as in the TLS 1.0 protocol. Not all functions accept this flag.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_IGNORE_UNKNOWN_CRIT_EXTENSIONS
This signals the verification process, not to fail on unknown critical extensions.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_WITH_SHA1
Allow certificates to be signed using the broken SHA1 hash algorithm.
GNUTLS_VERIFY_RSA_PSS_FIXED_SALT_LENGTH
Disallow RSA-PSS signatures made with mismatching salt length with digest length, as mandated in RFC 8446 4.2.3.
Previous: Verifying a certificate in the context of TLS session, Up: X.509 certificates [Contents][Index]
Some systems provide a system wide trusted certificate storage accessible using the PKCS #11 API. That is, the trusted certificates are queried and accessed using the PKCS #11 API, and trusted certificate properties, such as purpose, are marked using attached extensions. One example is the p11-kit trust module8.
These special PKCS #11 modules can be used for GnuTLS certificate verification if marked as trust
policy modules, i.e., with trust-policy: yes
in the p11-kit module file.
The way to use them is by specifying to the file verification function (e.g., gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file),
a pkcs11 URL, or simply pkcs11:
to use all the marked with trust policy modules.
The trust modules of p11-kit assign a purpose to trusted authorities using the extended key usage object identifiers. The common purposes are shown in Table 4.4. Note that typically according to [RFC5280] the extended key usage object identifiers apply to end certificates. Their application to CA certificates is an extension used by the trust modules.
Purpose | OID | Description |
---|---|---|
GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1 | The certificate is to be used for TLS WWW authentication. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for TLS WWW authentication. |
GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_CLIENT | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.2 | The certificate is to be used for TLS WWW client authentication. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for TLS WWW client authentication. |
GNUTLS_KP_CODE_SIGNING | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.3 | The certificate is to be used for code signing. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for code signing. |
GNUTLS_KP_EMAIL_PROTECTION | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4 | The certificate is to be used for email protection. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates for email users. |
GNUTLS_KP_OCSP_SIGNING | 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.9 | The certificate is to be used for signing OCSP responses. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign certificates which sign OCSP responses. |
GNUTLS_KP_ANY | 2.5.29.37.0 | The certificate is to be used for any purpose. When in a CA certificate, it indicates that the CA is allowed to sign any kind of certificates. |
With such modules, it is recommended to use the verification functions gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt2,
or gnutls_certificate_verify_peers, which allow to explicitly specify the key purpose. The
other verification functions which do not allow setting a purpose, would operate as if
GNUTLS_KP_TLS_WWW_SERVER
was requested from the trusted authorities.
Next: Raw public-keys, Previous: X.509 certificates, Up: Certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
Previous versions of GnuTLS supported limited OpenPGP key authentication. That functionality has been deprecated and is no longer made available. The reason is that, supporting alternative authentication methods, when X.509 and PKIX were new on the Internet and not well established, seemed like a good idea, in today’s Internet X.509 is unquestionably the main container for certificates. As such supporting more options with no clear use-cases, is a distraction that consumes considerable resources for improving and testing the library. For that we have decided to drop this functionality completely in 3.6.0.
Next: Advanced certificate verification, Previous: OpenPGP certificates, Up: Certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
There are situations in which a rather large certificate / certificate chain is undesirable or impractical. An example could be a resource constrained sensor network in which you do want to use authentication of and encryption between your devices but where your devices lack loads of memory or processing power. Furthermore, there are situations in which you don’t want to or can’t rely on a PKIX. TLS is, next to a PKIX environment, also commonly used with self-signed certificates in smaller deployments where the self-signed certificates are distributed to all involved protocol endpoints out-of-band. This practice does, however, still require the overhead of the certificate generation even though none of the information found in the certificate is actually used.
With raw public-keys, only a subset of the information found in typical certificates is utilized: namely, the SubjectPublicKeyInfo structure (in ASN.1 format) of a PKIX certificate that carries the parameters necessary to describe the public-key. Other parameters found in PKIX certificates are omitted. By omitting various certificate-related structures, the resulting raw public-key is kept fairly small in comparison to the original certificate, and the code to process the keys can be simpler.
It should be noted however, that the authenticity of these raw keys must be verified by an out-of-band mechanism or something like TOFU.
• Importing raw public-keys |
Up: Raw public-keys [Contents][Index]
Raw public-keys and their private counterparts can best be handled by using the abstract types
gnutls_pubkey_t
and gnutls_privkey_t
respectively. To learn how to use these
see Abstract key types.
Next: Digital signatures, Previous: Raw public-keys, Up: Certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
The verification of X.509 certificates in the HTTPS and other Internet protocols is typically done by loading a trusted list of commercial Certificate Authorities (see gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust), and using them as trusted anchors. However, there are several examples (eg. the Diginotar incident) where one of these authorities was compromised. This risk can be mitigated by using in addition to CA certificate verification, other verification methods. In this section we list the available in GnuTLS methods.
• Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication | ||
• Verifying a certificate using DANE |
It is possible to use a trust on first use (TOFU) authentication method in GnuTLS. That is the concept used by the SSH programs, where the public key of the peer is not verified, or verified in an out-of-bound way, but subsequent connections to the same peer require the public key to remain the same. Such a system in combination with the typical CA verification of a certificate, and OCSP revocation checks, can help to provide multiple factor verification, where a single point of failure is not enough to compromise the system. For example a server compromise may be detected using OCSP, and a CA compromise can be detected using the trust on first use method. Such a hybrid system with X.509 and trust on first use authentication is shown in Client example with SSH-style certificate verification.
See Certificate verification on how to use the available functionality.
Previous: Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication, Up: Advanced certificate verification [Contents][Index]
The DANE protocol is a protocol that can be used to verify TLS certificates using the DNS (or better DNSSEC) protocols. The DNS security extensions (DNSSEC) provide an alternative public key infrastructure to the commercial CAs that are typically used to sign TLS certificates. The DANE protocol takes advantage of the DNSSEC infrastructure to verify TLS certificates. This can be in addition to the verification by CA infrastructure or may even replace it where DNSSEC is fully deployed. Note however, that DNSSEC deployment is fairly new and it would be better to use it as an additional verification method rather than the only one.
The DANE functionality is provided by the libgnutls-dane
library that is shipped
with GnuTLS and the function prototypes are in gnutls/dane.h
.
See Certificate verification for information on how to use the library.
Note however, that the DANE RFC mandates the verification methods one should use in addition to the validation via DNSSEC TLSA entries. GnuTLS doesn’t follow that RFC requirement, and the term DANE verification in this manual refers to the TLSA entry verification. In GnuTLS any other verification methods can be used (e.g., PKIX or TOFU) on top of DANE.
Previous: Advanced certificate verification, Up: Certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
In this section we will provide some information about digital signatures, how they work, and give the rationale for disabling some of the algorithms used.
Digital signatures work by using somebody’s secret key to sign some arbitrary data. Then anybody else could use the public key of that person to verify the signature. Since the data may be arbitrary it is not suitable input to a cryptographic digital signature algorithm. For this reason and also for performance cryptographic hash algorithms are used to preprocess the input to the signature algorithm. This works as long as it is difficult enough to generate two different messages with the same hash algorithm output. In that case the same signature could be used as a proof for both messages. Nobody wants to sign an innocent message of donating 1 euro to Greenpeace and find out that they donated 1.000.000 euros to Bad Inc.
For a hash algorithm to be called cryptographic the following three requirements must hold:
The last two requirements in the list are the most important in digital signatures. These protect against somebody who would like to generate two messages with the same hash output. When an algorithm is considered broken usually it means that the Collision resistance of the algorithm is less than brute force. Using the birthday paradox the brute force attack takes 2^{((hash size) / 2)} operations. Today colliding certificates using the MD5 hash algorithm have been generated as shown in [WEGER].
There has been cryptographic results for the SHA-1 hash algorithms as well, although they are not yet critical. Before 2004, MD5 had a presumed collision strength of 2^{64}, but it has been showed to have a collision strength well under 2^{50}. As of November 2005, it is believed that SHA-1’s collision strength is around 2^{63}. We consider this sufficiently hard so that we still support SHA-1. We anticipate that SHA-256/386/512 will be used in publicly-distributed certificates in the future. When 2^{63} can be considered too weak compared to the computer power available sometime in the future, SHA-1 will be disabled as well. The collision attacks on SHA-1 may also get better, given the new interest in tools for creating them.
If you connect to a server and use GnuTLS’ functions to verify the
certificate chain, and get a GNUTLS_CERT_INSECURE_ALGORITHM
validation error (see Verifying X.509 certificate paths), it means
that somewhere in the certificate chain there is a certificate signed
using RSA-MD2
or RSA-MD5
. These two digital signature
algorithms are considered broken, so GnuTLS fails verifying
the certificate. In some situations, it may be useful to be
able to verify the certificate chain anyway, assuming an attacker did
not utilize the fact that these signatures algorithms are broken.
This section will give help on how to achieve that.
It is important to know that you do not have to enable any of
the flags discussed here to be able to use trusted root CA
certificates self-signed using RSA-MD2
or RSA-MD5
. The
certificates in the trusted list are considered trusted irrespective
of the signature.
If you are using gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 to verify the certificate chain, you can call gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags with the flags:
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD2
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_WITH_SHA1
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKEN
as in the following example:
gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags (x509cred, GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5);
This will signal the verifier algorithm to enable RSA-MD5
when
verifying the certificates.
If you are using gnutls_x509_crt_verify or
gnutls_x509_crt_list_verify, you can pass the
GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5
parameter directly in the
flags
parameter.
If you are using these flags, it may also be a good idea to warn the
user when verification failure occur for this reason. The simplest is
to not use the flags by default, and only fall back to using them
after warning the user. If you wish to inspect the certificate chain
yourself, you can use gnutls_certificate_get_peers to extract
the raw server’s certificate chain, gnutls_x509_crt_list_import to parse each of the certificates, and
then gnutls_x509_crt_get_signature_algorithm to find out the
signing algorithm used for each certificate. If any of the
intermediary certificates are using GNUTLS_SIGN_RSA_MD2
or
GNUTLS_SIGN_RSA_MD5
, you could present a warning.
Next: Shared-key and anonymous authentication, Previous: Certificate authentication, Up: Authentication methods [Contents][Index]
Certificates are not the only structures involved in a public key infrastructure. Several other structures that are used for certificate requests, encrypted private keys, revocation lists, GnuTLS abstract key structures, etc., are discussed in this chapter.
• PKCS 10 certificate requests | ||
• PKIX certificate revocation lists | ||
• OCSP certificate status checking | ||
• OCSP stapling | ||
• Managing encrypted keys | ||
• certtool Invocation | Invoking certtool | |
• ocsptool Invocation | Invoking ocsptool | |
• danetool Invocation | Invoking danetool |
A certificate request is a structure, which contain information about an applicant of a certificate service. It typically contains a public key, a distinguished name and secondary data such as a challenge password. GnuTLS supports the requests defined in PKCS #10 [RFC2986]. Other formats of certificate requests are not currently supported by GnuTLS.
A certificate request can be generated by associating it with a private key, setting the subject’s information and finally self signing it. The last step ensures that the requester is in possession of the private key.
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_version (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, unsigned int version)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, const char * dn, const char ** err)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn_by_oid (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, const char * oid, unsigned int raw_flag, const void * data, unsigned int sizeof_data)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_key_usage (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, unsigned int usage)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_key_purpose_oid (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, const void * oid, unsigned int critical)
int gnutls_x509_crq_set_basic_constraints (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, unsigned int ca, int pathLenConstraint)
The gnutls_x509_crq_set_key and gnutls_x509_crq_sign2 functions associate the request with a private key and sign it. If a request is to be signed with a key residing in a PKCS #11 token it is recommended to use the signing functions shown in Abstract key types.
crq: should contain a gnutls_x509_crq_t
type
key: holds a private key
This function will set the public parameters from the given private key to the request.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
crq: should contain a gnutls_x509_crq_t
type
key: holds a private key
dig: The message digest to use, i.e., GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256
flags: must be 0
This function will sign the certificate request with a private key.
This must be the same key as the one used in
gnutls_x509_crt_set_key()
since a certificate request is self
signed.
This must be the last step in a certificate request generation since all the previously set parameters are now signed.
A known limitation of this function is, that a newly-signed request will not be fully functional (e.g., for signature verification), until it is exported an re-imported.
After GnuTLS 3.6.1 the value of dig
may be GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN
,
and in that case, a suitable but reasonable for the key algorithm will be selected.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, otherwise a negative error code.
GNUTLS_E_ASN1_VALUE_NOT_FOUND
is returned if you didn’t set all
information in the certificate request (e.g., the version using
gnutls_x509_crq_set_version()
).
The following example is about generating a certificate request, and a private key. A certificate request can be later be processed by a CA which should return a signed certificate.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include <gnutls/abstract.h> #include <time.h> /* This example will generate a private key and a certificate * request. */ int main(void) { gnutls_x509_crq_t crq; gnutls_x509_privkey_t key; unsigned char buffer[10 * 1024]; size_t buffer_size = sizeof(buffer); unsigned int bits; gnutls_global_init(); /* Initialize an empty certificate request, and * an empty private key. */ gnutls_x509_crq_init(&crq); gnutls_x509_privkey_init(&key); /* Generate an RSA key of moderate security. */ bits = gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits(GNUTLS_PK_RSA, GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM); gnutls_x509_privkey_generate(key, GNUTLS_PK_RSA, bits, 0); /* Add stuff to the distinguished name */ gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn_by_oid(crq, GNUTLS_OID_X520_COUNTRY_NAME, 0, "GR", 2); gnutls_x509_crq_set_dn_by_oid(crq, GNUTLS_OID_X520_COMMON_NAME, 0, "Nikos", strlen("Nikos")); /* Set the request version. */ gnutls_x509_crq_set_version(crq, 1); /* Set a challenge password. */ gnutls_x509_crq_set_challenge_password(crq, "something to remember here"); /* Associate the request with the private key */ gnutls_x509_crq_set_key(crq, key); /* Self sign the certificate request. */ gnutls_x509_crq_sign2(crq, key, GNUTLS_DIG_SHA1, 0); /* Export the PEM encoded certificate request, and * display it. */ gnutls_x509_crq_export(crq, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM, buffer, &buffer_size); printf("Certificate Request: \n%s", buffer); /* Export the PEM encoded private key, and * display it. */ buffer_size = sizeof(buffer); gnutls_x509_privkey_export(key, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM, buffer, &buffer_size); printf("\n\nPrivate key: \n%s", buffer); gnutls_x509_crq_deinit(crq); gnutls_x509_privkey_deinit(key); return 0; }
Next: OCSP certificate status checking, Previous: PKCS 10 certificate requests, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
A certificate revocation list (CRL) is a structure issued by an authority periodically containing a list of revoked certificates serial numbers. The CRL structure is signed with the issuing authorities’ keys. A typical CRL contains the fields as shown in Table 4.5. Certificate revocation lists are used to complement the expiration date of a certificate, in order to account for other reasons of revocation, such as compromised keys, etc.
Each CRL is valid for limited amount of time and is required to provide, except for the current issuing time, also the issuing time of the next update.
Field | Description |
---|---|
version | The field that indicates the version of the CRL structure. |
signature | A signature by the issuing authority. |
issuer | Holds the issuer’s distinguished name. |
thisUpdate | The issuing time of the revocation list. |
nextUpdate | The issuing time of the revocation list that will update that one. |
revokedCertificates | List of revoked certificates serial numbers. |
extensions | Optional CRL structure extensions. |
The basic CRL structure functions follow.
int gnutls_x509_crl_init (gnutls_x509_crl_t * crl)
int gnutls_x509_crl_import (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
int gnutls_x509_crl_export (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
int gnutls_x509_crl_export (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
The most important function that extracts the certificate revocation information from a CRL is gnutls_x509_crl_get_crt_serial. Other functions that return other fields of the CRL structure are also provided.
crl: should contain a gnutls_x509_crl_t
type
indx: the index of the certificate to extract (starting from 0)
serial: where the serial number will be copied
serial_size: initially holds the size of serial
t: if non null, will hold the time this certificate was revoked
This function will retrieve the serial number of the specified, by the index, revoked certificate.
Note that this function will have performance issues in large sequences
of revoked certificates. In that case use gnutls_x509_crl_iter_crt_serial()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_version (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_issuer_dn (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, char * buf, size_t * sizeof_buf)
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_issuer_dn2 (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_datum_t * dn)
time_t gnutls_x509_crl_get_this_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
time_t gnutls_x509_crl_get_next_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
int gnutls_x509_crl_get_crt_count (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
The following functions can be used to generate a CRL.
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_version (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, unsigned int version)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_crt_serial (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const void * serial, size_t serial_size, time_t revocation_time)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_crt (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, time_t revocation_time)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_next_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, time_t exp_time)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_this_update (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, time_t act_time)
The gnutls_x509_crl_sign2 and gnutls_x509_crl_privkey_sign functions sign the revocation list with a private key. The latter function can be used to sign with a key residing in a PKCS #11 token.
crl: should contain a gnutls_x509_crl_t type
issuer: is the certificate of the certificate issuer
issuer_key: holds the issuer’s private key
dig: The message digest to use. GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256 is the safe choice unless you know what you’re doing.
flags: must be 0
This function will sign the CRL with the issuer’s private key, and will copy the issuer’s information into the CRL.
This must be the last step in a certificate CRL since all the previously set parameters are now signed.
A known limitation of this function is, that a newly-signed CRL will not be fully functional (e.g., for signature verification), until it is exported an re-imported.
After GnuTLS 3.6.1 the value of dig
may be GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN
,
and in that case, a suitable but reasonable for the key algorithm will be selected.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
crl: should contain a gnutls_x509_crl_t type
issuer: is the certificate of the certificate issuer
issuer_key: holds the issuer’s private key
dig: The message digest to use. GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256 is the safe choice unless you know what you’re doing.
flags: must be 0
This function will sign the CRL with the issuer’s private key, and will copy the issuer’s information into the CRL.
This must be the last step in a certificate CRL since all the previously set parameters are now signed.
A known limitation of this function is, that a newly-signed CRL will not be fully functional (e.g., for signature verification), until it is exported an re-imported.
After GnuTLS 3.6.1 the value of dig
may be GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN
,
and in that case, a suitable but reasonable for the key algorithm will be selected.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since 2.12.0
Few extensions on the CRL structure are supported, including the CRL number extension and the authority key identifier.
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_number (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const void * nr, size_t nr_size)
int gnutls_x509_crl_set_authority_key_id (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, const void * id, size_t id_size)
Next: OCSP stapling, Previous: PKIX certificate revocation lists, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
Certificates may be revoked before their expiration time has been reached. There are several reasons for revoking certificates, but a typical situation is when the private key associated with a certificate has been compromised. Traditionally, Certificate Revocation Lists (CRLs) have been used by application to implement revocation checking, however, several problems with CRLs have been identified [RIVESTCRL].
The Online Certificate Status Protocol, or OCSP [RFC2560], is a widely implemented protocol which performs certificate revocation status checking. An application that wish to verify the identity of a peer will verify the certificate against a set of trusted certificates and then check whether the certificate is listed in a CRL and/or perform an OCSP check for the certificate.
Applications are typically expected to contact the OCSP server in order to request the certificate validity status. The OCSP server replies with an OCSP response. This section describes this online communication (which can be avoided when using OCSP stapled responses, for that, see OCSP stapling).
Before performing the OCSP query, the application will need to figure out the address of the OCSP server. The OCSP server address can be provided by the local user in manual configuration or may be stored in the certificate that is being checked. When stored in a certificate the OCSP server is in the extension field called the Authority Information Access (AIA). The following function extracts this information from a certificate.
int gnutls_x509_crt_get_authority_info_access (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int seq, int what, gnutls_datum_t * data, unsigned int * critical)
There are several functions in GnuTLS for creating and manipulating OCSP requests and responses. The general idea is that a client application creates an OCSP request object, stores some information about the certificate to check in the request, and then exports the request in DER format. The request will then need to be sent to the OCSP responder, which needs to be done by the application (GnuTLS does not send and receive OCSP packets). Normally an OCSP response is received that the application will need to import into an OCSP response object. The digital signature in the OCSP response needs to be verified against a set of trust anchors before the information in the response can be trusted.
The ASN.1 structure of OCSP requests are briefly as follows. It is useful to review the structures to get an understanding of which fields are modified by GnuTLS functions.
OCSPRequest ::= SEQUENCE { tbsRequest TBSRequest, optionalSignature [0] EXPLICIT Signature OPTIONAL } TBSRequest ::= SEQUENCE { version [0] EXPLICIT Version DEFAULT v1, requestorName [1] EXPLICIT GeneralName OPTIONAL, requestList SEQUENCE OF Request, requestExtensions [2] EXPLICIT Extensions OPTIONAL } Request ::= SEQUENCE { reqCert CertID, singleRequestExtensions [0] EXPLICIT Extensions OPTIONAL } CertID ::= SEQUENCE { hashAlgorithm AlgorithmIdentifier, issuerNameHash OCTET STRING, -- Hash of Issuer's DN issuerKeyHash OCTET STRING, -- Hash of Issuers public key serialNumber CertificateSerialNumber }
The basic functions to initialize, import, export and deallocate OCSP requests are the following.
int gnutls_ocsp_req_init (gnutls_ocsp_req_t * req)
void gnutls_ocsp_req_deinit (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_import (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_export (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_print (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, gnutls_ocsp_print_formats_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)
To generate an OCSP request the issuer name hash, issuer key hash, and
the checked certificate’s serial number are required. There are two
interfaces available for setting those in an OCSP request.
The is a low-level function when you have the
issuer name hash, issuer key hash, and certificate serial number in
binary form. The second is more useful if you have the
certificate (and its issuer) in a gnutls_x509_crt_t
type.
There is also a function to extract this information from existing an OCSP
request.
int gnutls_ocsp_req_add_cert_id (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t digest, const gnutls_datum_t * issuer_name_hash, const gnutls_datum_t * issuer_key_hash, const gnutls_datum_t * serial_number)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_add_cert (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t digest, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_get_cert_id (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, unsigned indx, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t * digest, gnutls_datum_t * issuer_name_hash, gnutls_datum_t * issuer_key_hash, gnutls_datum_t * serial_number)
Each OCSP request may contain a number of extensions. Extensions are identified by an Object Identifier (OID) and an opaque data buffer whose syntax and semantics is implied by the OID. You can extract or set those extensions using the following functions.
int gnutls_ocsp_req_get_extension (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * oid, unsigned int * critical, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_set_extension (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, const char * oid, unsigned int critical, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
A common OCSP Request extension is the nonce extension (OID 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.48.1.2), which is used to avoid replay attacks of earlier recorded OCSP responses. The nonce extension carries a value that is intended to be sufficiently random and unique so that an attacker will not be able to give a stale response for the same nonce.
int gnutls_ocsp_req_get_nonce (gnutls_ocsp_req_const_t req, unsigned int * critical, gnutls_datum_t * nonce)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_set_nonce (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req, unsigned int critical, const gnutls_datum_t * nonce)
int gnutls_ocsp_req_randomize_nonce (gnutls_ocsp_req_t req)
The OCSP response structures is a complex structure. A simplified overview of it is in Table 4.6. Note that a response may contain information on multiple certificates.
Field | Description |
---|---|
version | The OCSP response version number (typically 1). |
responder ID | An identifier of the responder (DN name or a hash of its key). |
issue time | The time the response was generated. |
thisUpdate | The issuing time of the revocation information. |
nextUpdate | The issuing time of the revocation information that will update that one. |
Revoked certificates | |
certificate status | The status of the certificate. |
certificate serial | The certificate’s serial number. |
revocationTime | The time the certificate was revoked. |
revocationReason | The reason the certificate was revoked. |
We provide basic functions for initialization, importing, exporting and deallocating OCSP responses.
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_init (gnutls_ocsp_resp_t * resp)
void gnutls_ocsp_resp_deinit (gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_import (gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_export (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_print (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_ocsp_print_formats_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)
The utility function that extracts the revocation as well as other information from a response is shown below.
resp: should contain a gnutls_ocsp_resp_t
type
indx: Specifies response number to get. Use (0) to get the first one.
digest: output variable with gnutls_digest_algorithm_t
hash algorithm
issuer_name_hash: output buffer with hash of issuer’s DN
issuer_key_hash: output buffer with hash of issuer’s public key
serial_number: output buffer with serial number of certificate to check
cert_status: a certificate status, a gnutls_ocsp_cert_status_t
enum.
this_update: time at which the status is known to be correct.
next_update: when newer information will be available, or (time_t)-1 if unspecified
revocation_time: when cert_status
is GNUTLS_OCSP_CERT_REVOKED
, holds time of revocation.
revocation_reason: revocation reason, a gnutls_x509_crl_reason_t
enum.
This function will return the certificate information of the
indx
’ed response in the Basic OCSP Response resp
. The
information returned corresponds to the OCSP SingleResponse structure
except the final singleExtensions.
Each of the pointers to output variables may be NULL to indicate that the caller is not interested in that value.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error code is returned. If you have reached the last
CertID available GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE
will be
returned.
The possible revocation reasons available in an OCSP response are shown below.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_UNSPECIFIED
Unspecified reason.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_KEYCOMPROMISE
Private key compromised.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_CACOMPROMISE
CA compromised.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_AFFILIATIONCHANGED
Affiliation has changed.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_SUPERSEDED
Certificate superseded.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_CESSATIONOFOPERATION
Operation has ceased.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_CERTIFICATEHOLD
Certificate is on hold.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_REMOVEFROMCRL
Will be removed from delta CRL.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_PRIVILEGEWITHDRAWN
Privilege withdrawn.
GNUTLS_X509_CRLREASON_AACOMPROMISE
AA compromised.
Note, that the OCSP response needs to be verified against some set of trust anchors before it can be relied upon. It is also important to check whether the received OCSP response corresponds to the certificate being checked.
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_verify (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_x509_trust_list_t trustlist, unsigned int * verify, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_verify_direct (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, unsigned int * verify, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_ocsp_resp_check_crt (gnutls_ocsp_resp_const_t resp, unsigned int indx, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt)
Next: Managing encrypted keys, Previous: OCSP certificate status checking, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
To avoid applications contacting the OCSP server directly, TLS servers
can provide a "stapled" OCSP response in the TLS handshake. That way
the client application needs to do nothing more. GnuTLS will automatically
consider the stapled OCSP response during the TLS certificate verification
(see gnutls_certificate_verify_peers2). To disable the automatic
OCSP verification the flag GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS
should be
specified to gnutls_certificate_set_verify_flags.
Since GnuTLS 3.5.1 the client certificate verification will consider the [RFC7633]
OCSP-Must-staple certificate extension, and will consider it while checking for stapled
OCSP responses. If the extension is present and no OCSP staple is found, the certificate
verification will fail and the status code GNUTLS_CERT_MISSING_OCSP_STATUS
will
returned from the verification function.
Under TLS 1.2 only one stapled response can be sent by a server, the OCSP response associated with the end-certificate. Under TLS 1.3 a server can send multiple OCSP responses, typically one for each certificate in the certificate chain. The following functions can be used by a client application to retrieve the OCSP responses as sent by the server.
int gnutls_ocsp_status_request_get (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * response)
int gnutls_ocsp_status_request_get2 (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned idx, gnutls_datum_t * response)
GnuTLS servers can provide OCSP responses to their clients using the following functions.
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function3 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function3 * func)
int gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t sc, const char * response_file, unsigned idx, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t fmt)
unsigned gnutls_ocsp_status_request_is_checked (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int flags)
A server is expected to provide the relevant certificate’s OCSP responses using gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file2, and ensure a periodic reload/renew of the credentials. An estimation of the OCSP responses expiration can be obtained using the gnutls_certificate_get_ocsp_expiration function.
sc: is a credentials structure.
idx: is a certificate chain index as returned by gnutls_certificate_set_key()
and friends
oidx: is an OCSP response index
flags: should be zero
This function returns the validity of the loaded OCSP responses, to provide information on when to reload/refresh them.
Note that the credentials structure should be read-only when in use, thus when reloading, either the credentials structure must not be in use by any sessions, or a new credentials structure should be allocated for new sessions.
When oidx
is (-1) then the minimum refresh time for all responses
is returned. Otherwise the index specifies the response corresponding
to the odix
certificate in the certificate chain.
Returns: On success, the expiration time of the OCSP response. Otherwise (time_t)(-1) on error, or (time_t)-2 on out of bounds.
Since: 3.6.3
Prior to GnuTLS 3.6.4, the functions gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_function2 gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file were provided to set OCSP responses. These functions are still functional, but cannot be used to set multiple OCSP responses as allowed by TLS1.3.
The responses can be updated periodically using the ’ocsptool’ command (see also ocsptool Invocation).
ocsptool --ask --load-cert server_cert.pem --load-issuer the_issuer.pem --load-signer the_issuer.pem --outfile ocsp.resp
In order to allow multiple OCSP responses to be concatenated, GnuTLS supports PEM-encoded OCSP responses. These can be generated using ’ocsptool’ with the ’–no-outder’ parameter.
Next: certtool Invocation, Previous: OCSP stapling, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
Transferring or storing private keys in plain may not be a good idea, since any compromise is irreparable. Storing the keys in hardware security modules (see Smart cards and HSMs) could solve the storage problem but it is not always practical or efficient enough. This section describes ways to store and transfer encrypted private keys.
There are methods for key encryption, namely the PKCS #8, PKCS #12 and OpenSSL’s custom encrypted private key formats. The PKCS #8 and the OpenSSL’s method allow encryption of the private key, while the PKCS #12 method allows, in addition, the bundling of accompanying data into the structure. That is typically the corresponding certificate, as well as a trusted CA certificate.
Generic and higher level private key import functions are available, that import plain or encrypted keys and will auto-detect the encrypted key format.
pkey: The private key
data: The private key data to be imported
format: The format of the private key
password: A password (optional)
flags: an ORed sequence of gnutls_pkcs_encrypt_flags_t
This function will import the given private key to the abstract
gnutls_privkey_t
type.
The supported formats are basic unencrypted key, PKCS8, PKCS12, TSS2, and the openssl format.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
key: The data to store the parsed key
data: The DER or PEM encoded key.
format: One of DER or PEM
password: A password (optional)
flags: an ORed sequence of gnutls_pkcs_encrypt_flags_t
This function will import the given DER or PEM encoded key, to
the native gnutls_x509_privkey_t
format, irrespective of the
input format. The input format is auto-detected.
The supported formats are basic unencrypted key, PKCS8, PKCS12, and the openssl format.
If the provided key is encrypted but no password was given, then
GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED
is returned. Since GnuTLS 3.4.0 this
function will utilize the PIN callbacks if any.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Any keys imported using those functions can be imported to a certificate credentials structure using gnutls_certificate_set_key, or alternatively they can be directly imported using gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2.
PKCS #8 keys can be imported and exported as normal private keys using
the functions below. An addition to the normal import functions, are
a password and a flags argument. The flags can be any element of the gnutls_pkcs_encrypt_flags_t
enumeration. Note however, that GnuTLS only supports the PKCS #5 PBES2
encryption scheme. Keys encrypted with the obsolete PBES1 scheme cannot
be decrypted.
int gnutls_x509_privkey_import_pkcs8 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export_pkcs8 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
int gnutls_x509_privkey_export2_pkcs8 (gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags, gnutls_datum_t * out)
GNUTLS_PKCS_PLAIN
Unencrypted private key.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PKCS12_3DES
PKCS-12 3DES.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PKCS12_ARCFOUR
PKCS-12 ARCFOUR.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PKCS12_RC2_40
PKCS-12 RC2-40.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_3DES
PBES2 3DES.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_AES_128
PBES2 AES-128.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_AES_192
PBES2 AES-192.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_AES_256
PBES2 AES-256.
GNUTLS_PKCS_NULL_PASSWORD
Some schemas distinguish between an empty and a NULL password.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_DES
PBES2 single DES.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES1_DES_MD5
PBES1 with single DES; for compatibility with openssl only.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_TC26Z
PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with TC26-Z S-box.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPA
PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-A S-box.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPB
PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-B S-box.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPC
PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-C S-box.
GNUTLS_PKCS_PBES2_GOST_CPD
PBES2 GOST 28147-89 CFB with CryptoPro-D S-box.
A PKCS #12 structure [PKCS12] usually contains a user’s private keys and certificates. It is commonly used in browsers to export and import the user’s identities. A file containing such a key can be directly imported to a certificate credentials structure by using gnutls_certificate_set_x509_simple_pkcs12_file.
In GnuTLS the PKCS #12 structures are handled
using the gnutls_pkcs12_t
type. This is an abstract type that
may hold several gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t
types. The bag types are
the holders of the actual data, which may be certificates, private
keys or encrypted data. A bag of type encrypted should be decrypted
in order for its data to be accessed.
To reduce the complexity in parsing the structures the simple helper function gnutls_pkcs12_simple_parse is provided. For more advanced uses, manual parsing of the structure is required using the functions below.
int gnutls_pkcs12_get_bag (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, int indx, gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag)
int gnutls_pkcs12_verify_mac (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, const char * pass)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_decrypt (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, const char * pass)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_count (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag)
p12: A pkcs12 type
password: optional password used to decrypt the structure, bags and keys.
key: a structure to store the parsed private key.
chain: the corresponding to key certificate chain (may be NULL
)
chain_len: will be updated with the number of additional (may be NULL
)
extra_certs: optional pointer to receive an array of additional
certificates found in the PKCS12 structure (may be NULL
).
extra_certs_len: will be updated with the number of additional
certs (may be NULL
).
crl: an optional structure to store the parsed CRL (may be NULL
).
flags: should be zero or one of GNUTLS_PKCS12_SP_*
This function parses a PKCS12 structure in pkcs12
and extracts the
private key, the corresponding certificate chain, any additional
certificates and a CRL. The structures in key
, chain
crl
, and extra_certs
must not be initialized.
The extra_certs
and extra_certs_len
parameters are optional
and both may be set to NULL
. If either is non-NULL
, then both must
be set. The value for extra_certs
is allocated
using gnutls_malloc()
.
Encrypted PKCS12 bags and PKCS8 private keys are supported, but only with password based security and the same password for all operations.
Note that a PKCS12 structure may contain many keys and/or certificates, and there is no way to identify which key/certificate pair you want. For this reason this function is useful for PKCS12 files that contain only one key/certificate pair and/or one CRL.
If the provided structure has encrypted fields but no password
is provided then this function returns GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED
.
Note that normally the chain constructed does not include self signed
certificates, to comply with TLS’ requirements. If, however, the flag
GNUTLS_PKCS12_SP_INCLUDE_SELF_SIGNED
is specified then
self signed certificates will be included in the chain.
Prior to using this function the PKCS 12
structure integrity must
be verified using gnutls_pkcs12_verify_mac()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_data (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_key_id (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * id)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_get_friendly_name (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, char ** name)
The functions below are used to generate a PKCS #12 structure. An example of their usage is shown at PKCS12 structure generation example.
int gnutls_pkcs12_set_bag (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_encrypt (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pkcs12_generate_mac (gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12, const char * pass)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_data (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, gnutls_pkcs12_bag_type_t type, const gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_crl (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_crt (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_key_id (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, const gnutls_datum_t * id)
int gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_friendly_name (gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, unsigned indx, const char * name)
Unfortunately the structures discussed in the previous sections are not the only structures that may hold an encrypted private key. For example the OpenSSL library offers a custom key encryption method. Those structures are also supported in GnuTLS with gnutls_x509_privkey_import_openssl.
key: The data to store the parsed key
data: The DER or PEM encoded key.
password: the password to decrypt the key (if it is encrypted).
This function will convert the given PEM encrypted to
the native gnutls_x509_privkey_t format. The
output will be stored in key
.
The password
should be in ASCII. If the password is not provided
or wrong then GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED
will be returned.
If the Certificate is PEM encoded it should have a header of "PRIVATE KEY" and the "DEK-Info" header.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Next: ocsptool Invocation, Previous: Managing encrypted keys, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
Tool to parse and generate X.509 certificates, requests and private keys. It can be used interactively or non interactively by specifying the template command line option.
The tool accepts files or supported URIs via the –infile option. In case PIN is required for URI access you can provide it using the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
certtool - GnuTLS certificate tool Usage: certtool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -V, --verbose More verbose output --infile=file Input file - file must pre-exist --outfile=str Output file --attime=str Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time Certificate related options: -i, --certificate-info Print information on the given certificate --pubkey-info Print information on a public key -s, --generate-self-signed Generate a self-signed certificate -c, --generate-certificate Generate a signed certificate --generate-proxy Generates a proxy certificate -u, --update-certificate Update a signed certificate --fingerprint Print the fingerprint of the given certificate --key-id Print the key ID of the given certificate --v1 Generate an X.509 version 1 certificate (with no extensions) --sign-params=str Sign a certificate with a specific signature algorithm Certificate request related options: --crq-info Print information on the given certificate request -q, --generate-request Generate a PKCS #10 certificate request - prohibits the option 'infile' --no-crq-extensions Do not use extensions in certificate requests PKCS#12 file related options: --p12-info Print information on a PKCS #12 structure --p12-name=str The PKCS #12 friendly name to use --to-p12 Generate a PKCS #12 structure Private key related options: -k, --key-info Print information on a private key --p8-info Print information on a PKCS #8 structure --to-rsa Convert an RSA-PSS key to raw RSA format -p, --generate-privkey Generate a private key --key-type=str Specify the key type to use on key generation --bits=num Specify the number of bits for key generation --curve=str Specify the curve used for EC key generation --sec-param=str Specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra] --to-p8 Convert a given key to a PKCS #8 structure -8, --pkcs8 Use PKCS #8 format for private keys --provable Generate a private key or parameters from a seed using a provable method --verify-provable-privkey Verify a private key generated from a seed using a provable method --seed=str When generating a private key use the given hex-encoded seed CRL related options: -l, --crl-info Print information on the given CRL structure --generate-crl Generate a CRL --verify-crl Verify a Certificate Revocation List using a trusted list - requires the option 'load-ca-certificate' Certificate verification related options: -e, --verify-chain Verify a PEM encoded certificate chain --verify Verify a PEM encoded certificate (chain) against a trusted set --verify-hostname=str Specify a hostname to be used for certificate chain verification --verify-email=str Specify a email to be used for certificate chain verification - prohibits the option 'verify-hostname' --verify-purpose=str Specify a purpose OID to be used for certificate chain verification --verify-allow-broken Allow broken algorithms, such as MD5 for verification --verify-profile=str Specify a security level profile to be used for verification PKCS#7 structure options: --p7-generate Generate a PKCS #7 structure --p7-sign Signs using a PKCS #7 structure --p7-detached-sign Signs using a detached PKCS #7 structure --p7-include-cert The signer's certificate will be included in the cert list - enabled by default - disabled as '--no-p7-include-cert' --p7-time Will include a timestamp in the PKCS #7 structure --p7-show-data Will show the embedded data in the PKCS #7 structure --p7-info Print information on a PKCS #7 structure --p7-verify Verify the provided PKCS #7 structure --smime-to-p7 Convert S/MIME to PKCS #7 structure Other options: --get-dh-params List the included PKCS #3 encoded Diffie-Hellman parameters --dh-info Print information PKCS #3 encoded Diffie-Hellman parameters --load-privkey=str Loads a private key file --load-pubkey=str Loads a public key file --load-request=str Loads a certificate request file --load-certificate=str Loads a certificate file --load-ca-privkey=str Loads the certificate authority's private key file --load-ca-certificate=str Loads the certificate authority's certificate file --load-crl=str Loads the provided CRL --load-data=str Loads auxiliary data --password=str Password to use --null-password Enforce a NULL password --empty-password Enforce an empty password --hex-numbers Print big number in an easier format to parse --cprint In certain operations it prints the information in C-friendly format --hash=str Hash algorithm to use for signing --salt-size=num Specify the RSA-PSS key default salt size --label=str Specify the RSA-OAEP label, encoded in hexadecimal --inder Use DER format for input certificates, private keys, and DH parameters --inraw an alias for the 'inder' option --outder Use DER format for output certificates, private keys, and DH parameters --outraw an alias for the 'outder' option --template=str Template file to use for non-interactive operation --stdout-info Print information to stdout instead of stderr --ask-pass Enable interaction for entering password when in batch mode --pkcs-cipher=str Cipher to use for PKCS #8 and #12 operations --provider=str Specify the PKCS #11 provider library --text Output textual information before PEM-encoded certificates, private keys, etc - enabled by default - disabled as '--no-text' Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Tool to parse and generate X.509 certificates, requests and private keys. It can be used interactively or non interactively by specifying the template command line option. The tool accepts files or supported URIs via the --infile option. In case PIN is required for URI access you can provide it using the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.
Certificate related options.
This is the “print information on a public key” option. The option combined with –load-request, –load-pubkey, –load-privkey and –load-certificate will extract the public key of the object in question.
This is the “print the fingerprint of the given certificate” option. This is a simple hash of the DER encoding of the certificate. It can be combined with the –hash parameter. However, it is recommended for identification to use the key-id which depends only on the certificate’s key.
This is the “print the key id of the given certificate” option. This is a hash of the public key of the given certificate. It identifies the key uniquely, remains the same on a certificate renewal and depends only on signed fields of the certificate.
This is the “print certificate’s public key” option. This option is deprecated as a duplicate of –pubkey-info
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “sign a certificate with a specific signature algorithm” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with –generate-certificate, to sign the certificate with a specific signature algorithm variant. The only option supported is ’RSA-PSS’, and should be specified when the signer does not have a certificate which is marked for RSA-PSS use only.
Certificate request related options.
This is the “generate a pkcs #10 certificate request” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Will generate a PKCS #10 certificate request. To specify a private key use –load-privkey.
PKCS#12 file related options.
This is the “print information on a pkcs #12 structure” option. This option will dump the contents and print the metadata of the provided PKCS #12 structure.
This is the “the pkcs #12 friendly name to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. The name to be used for the primary certificate and private key in a PKCS #12 file.
This is the “generate a pkcs #12 structure” option. It requires a certificate, a private key and possibly a CA certificate to be specified.
Private key related options.
This is the “print information on a pkcs #8 structure” option. This option will print information about encrypted PKCS #8 structures. That option does not require the decryption of the structure.
This is the “convert an rsa-pss key to raw rsa format” option. It requires an RSA-PSS key as input and will output a raw RSA key. This command is necessary for compatibility with applications that cannot read RSA-PSS keys.
This is the “generate a private key” option. When generating RSA-PSS or RSA-OAEP private keys, the –hash option will restrict the allowed hash for the key; For RSA-PSS keys the –salt-size option is also acceptable.
This is the “specify the key type to use on key generation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with –generate-privkey, to specify the key type to be generated. Valid options are, ’rsa’, ’rsa-pss’, ’rsa-oaep’, ’dsa’, ’ecdsa’, ’ed25519, ’ed448’, ’x25519’, and ’x448’.’. When combined with certificate generation it can be used to specify an RSA-PSS certificate when an RSA key is given.
This is the “specify the curve used for ec key generation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Supported values are secp192r1, secp224r1, secp256r1, secp384r1 and secp521r1.
This is the “specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra]” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Security parameter. This is alternative to the bits option.
This is the “convert a given key to a pkcs #8 structure” option. This needs to be combined with –load-privkey.
This is the “generate a private key or parameters from a seed using a provable method” option. This will use the FIPS PUB186-4 algorithms (i.e., Shawe-Taylor) for provable key generation. When specified the private keys or parameters will be generated from a seed, and can be later validated with –verify-provable-privkey to be correctly generated from the seed. You may specify –seed or allow GnuTLS to generate one (recommended). This option can be combined with –generate-privkey or –generate-dh-params.
That option applies to RSA and DSA keys. On the DSA keys the PQG parameters are generated using the seed, and on RSA the two primes.
This is the “verify a private key generated from a seed using a provable method” option. This will use the FIPS-186-4 algorithms for provable key generation. You may specify –seed or use the seed stored in the private key structure.
This is the “when generating a private key use the given hex-encoded seed” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. The seed acts as a security parameter for the private key, and thus a seed size which corresponds to the security level of the private key should be provided (e.g., 256-bits seed).
CRL related options.
This is the “generate a crl” option. This option generates a Certificate Revocation List. When combined with –load-crl it would use the loaded CRL as base for the generated (i.e., all revoked certificates in the base will be copied to the new CRL). To add new certificates to the CRL use –load-certificate.
This is the “verify a certificate revocation list using a trusted list” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
The trusted certificate list must be loaded with –load-ca-certificate.
Certificate verification related options.
This is the “verify a pem encoded certificate chain” option. Verifies the validity of a certificate chain. That is, an ordered set of certificates where each one is the issuer of the previous, and the first is the end-certificate to be validated. In a proper chain the last certificate is a self signed one. It can be combined with –verify-purpose or –verify-hostname.
This is the “verify a pem encoded certificate (chain) against a trusted set” option. The trusted certificate list can be loaded with –load-ca-certificate. If no certificate list is provided, then the system’s trusted certificate list is used. Note that during verification multiple paths may be explored. On a successful verification the successful path will be the last one. It can be combined with –verify-purpose or –verify-hostname.
This is the “specify a hostname to be used for certificate chain verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This is to be combined with one of the verify certificate options.
This is the “specify a email to be used for certificate chain verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
This is to be combined with one of the verify certificate options.
This is the “specify a purpose oid to be used for certificate chain verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This object identifier restricts the purpose of the certificates to be verified. Example purposes are 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1 (TLS WWW), 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4 (EMAIL) etc. Note that a CA certificate without a purpose set (extended key usage) is valid for any purpose.
This is the “allow broken algorithms, such as md5 for verification” option. This can be combined with –p7-verify, –verify or –verify-chain.
This is the “specify a security level profile to be used for verification” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used to specify a certificate verification profile. Certificate verification profiles correspond to the security level. This should be one of ’none’, ’very weak’, ’low’, ’legacy’, ’medium’, ’high’, ’ultra’, ’future’. Note that by default no profile is applied, unless one is set as minimum in the gnutls configuration file.
PKCS#7 structure options.
This is the “generate a pkcs #7 structure” option. This option generates a PKCS #7 certificate container structure. To add certificates in the structure use –load-certificate and –load-crl.
This is the “signs using a pkcs #7 structure” option. This option generates a PKCS #7 structure containing a signature for the provided data from infile. The data are stored within the structure. The signer certificate has to be specified using –load-certificate and –load-privkey. The input to –load-certificate can be a list of certificates. In case of a list, the first certificate is used for signing and the other certificates are included in the structure.
This is the “signs using a detached pkcs #7 structure” option. This option generates a PKCS #7 structure containing a signature for the provided data from infile. The signer certificate has to be specified using –load-certificate and –load-privkey. The input to –load-certificate can be a list of certificates. In case of a list, the first certificate is used for signing and the other certificates are included in the structure.
This is the “the signer’s certificate will be included in the cert list” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
This options works with –p7-sign or –p7-detached-sign and will include or exclude the signer’s certificate into the generated signature.
This is the “will include a timestamp in the pkcs #7 structure” option. This option will include a timestamp in the generated signature
This is the “will show the embedded data in the pkcs #7 structure” option. This option can be combined with –p7-verify or –p7-info and will display the embedded signed data in the PKCS #7 structure.
This is the “verify the provided pkcs #7 structure” option. This option verifies the signed PKCS #7 structure. The certificate list to use for verification can be specified with –load-ca-certificate. When no certificate list is provided, then the system’s certificate list is used. Alternatively a direct signer can be provided using –load-certificate. A key purpose can be enforced with the –verify-purpose option, and the –load-data option will utilize detached data.
Other options.
This is the “generate pkcs #3 encoded diffie-hellman parameters” option. The will generate random parameters to be used with Diffie-Hellman key exchange. The output parameters will be in PKCS #3 format. Note that it is recommended to use the –get-dh-params option instead.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “list the included pkcs #3 encoded diffie-hellman parameters” option. Returns stored DH parameters in GnuTLS. Those parameters returned are defined in RFC7919, and can be considered standard parameters for a TLS key exchange. This option is provided for old applications which require DH parameters to be specified; modern GnuTLS applications should not require them.
This is the “loads a private key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL
This is the “loads a public key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL
This is the “loads a certificate request file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file
This is the “loads a certificate file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file
This is the “loads the certificate authority’s private key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL
This is the “loads the certificate authority’s certificate file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL
This is the “loads the provided crl” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file
This is the “loads auxiliary data” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be used with a file
This is the “password to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. You can use this option to specify the password in the command line instead of reading it from the tty. Note, that the command line arguments are available for view in others in the system. Specifying password as ” is the same as specifying no password.
This is the “enforce a null password” option. This option enforces a NULL password. This is different than the empty or no password in schemas like PKCS #8.
This is the “enforce an empty password” option. This option enforces an empty password. This is different than the NULL or no password in schemas like PKCS #8.
This is the “in certain operations it prints the information in c-friendly format” option. In certain operations it prints the information in C-friendly format, suitable for including into C programs.
This is the “generate rsa key” option. When combined with –generate-privkey generates an RSA private key.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “generate dsa key” option. When combined with –generate-privkey generates a DSA private key.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “generate ecc (ecdsa) key” option. When combined with –generate-privkey generates an elliptic curve private key to be used with ECDSA.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is an alias for the ecc
option,
see the ecc option documentation.
This is the “hash algorithm to use for signing” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Available hash functions are SHA1, RMD160, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512, SHA3-224, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512.
This is the “specify the rsa-pss key default salt size” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Typical keys shouldn’t set or restrict this option.
This is the “specify the rsa-oaep label, encoded in hexadecimal” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Typical keys shouldn’t set or restrict this option.
This is the “use der format for input certificates, private keys, and dh parameters ” option. The input files will be assumed to be in DER or RAW format. Unlike options that in PEM input would allow multiple input data (e.g. multiple certificates), when reading in DER format a single data structure is read.
This is an alias for the inder
option,
see the inder option documentation.
This is the “use der format for output certificates, private keys, and dh parameters” option. The output will be in DER or RAW format.
This is an alias for the outder
option,
see the outder option documentation.
This is the “enable interaction for entering password when in batch mode” option. This option will enable interaction to enter password when in batch mode. That is useful when the template option has been specified.
This is the “cipher to use for pkcs #8 and #12 operations” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Cipher. Cipher may be one of 3des, 3des-pkcs12, aes-128, aes-192, aes-256, rc2-40, arcfour.
This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf
This is the “output textual information before pem-encoded certificates, private keys, etc” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Output textual information before PEM-encoded data
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
p11tool (1), psktool (1), srptool (1)
To create an RSA private key, run:
$ certtool --generate-privkey --outfile key.pem --rsa
To create a DSA or elliptic curves (ECDSA) private key use the above command combined with ’dsa’ or ’ecc’ options.
To create a certificate request (needed when the certificate is issued by another party), run:
certtool --generate-request --load-privkey key.pem \ --outfile request.pem
If the private key is stored in a smart card you can generate a request by specifying the private key object URL.
$ ./certtool --generate-request --load-privkey "pkcs11:..." \ --load-pubkey "pkcs11:..." --outfile request.pem
To create a self signed certificate, use the command:
$ certtool --generate-privkey --outfile ca-key.pem $ certtool --generate-self-signed --load-privkey ca-key.pem \ --outfile ca-cert.pem
Note that a self-signed certificate usually belongs to a certificate authority, that signs other certificates.
To generate a certificate using the previous request, use the command:
$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-request request.pem \ --outfile cert.pem --load-ca-certificate ca-cert.pem \ --load-ca-privkey ca-key.pem
To generate a certificate using the private key only, use the command:
$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey key.pem \ --outfile cert.pem --load-ca-certificate ca-cert.pem \ --load-ca-privkey ca-key.pem
To view the certificate information, use:
$ certtool --certificate-info --infile cert.pem
To convert the certificate from PEM to DER format, use:
$ certtool --certificate-info --infile cert.pem --outder --outfile cert.der
To generate a PKCS #12 structure using the previous key and certificate, use the command:
$ certtool --load-certificate cert.pem --load-privkey key.pem \ --to-p12 --outder --outfile key.p12
Some tools (reportedly web browsers) have problems with that file because it does not contain the CA certificate for the certificate. To work around that problem in the tool, you can use the –load-ca-certificate parameter as follows:
$ certtool --load-ca-certificate ca.pem \ --load-certificate cert.pem --load-privkey key.pem \ --to-p12 --outder --outfile key.p12
To obtain the RFC7919 parameters for Diffie-Hellman key exchange, use the command:
$ certtool --get-dh-params --outfile dh.pem --sec-param medium
To verify a certificate in a file against the system’s CA trust store use the following command:
$ certtool --verify --infile cert.pem
It is also possible to simulate hostname verification with the following options:
$ certtool --verify --verify-hostname www.example.com --infile cert.pem
Proxy certificate can be used to delegate your credential to a temporary, typically short-lived, certificate. To create one from the previously created certificate, first create a temporary key and then generate a proxy certificate for it, using the commands:
$ certtool --generate-privkey > proxy-key.pem $ certtool --generate-proxy --load-ca-privkey key.pem \ --load-privkey proxy-key.pem --load-certificate cert.pem \ --outfile proxy-cert.pem
To create an empty Certificate Revocation List (CRL) do:
$ certtool --generate-crl --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \ --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem
To create a CRL that contains some revoked certificates, place the
certificates in a file and use --load-certificate
as follows:
$ certtool --generate-crl --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \ --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-certificate revoked-certs.pem
To verify a Certificate Revocation List (CRL) do:
$ certtool --verify-crl --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem < crl.pem
A template file can be used to avoid the interactive questions of certtool. Initially create a file named ’cert.cfg’ that contains the information about the certificate. The template can be used as below:
$ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey key.pem \ --template cert.cfg --outfile cert.pem \ --load-ca-certificate ca-cert.pem --load-ca-privkey ca-key.pem
An example certtool template file that can be used to generate a certificate request or a self signed certificate follows.
# X.509 Certificate options # # DN options # The organization of the subject. organization = "Koko inc." # The organizational unit of the subject. unit = "sleeping dept." # The locality of the subject. # locality = # The state of the certificate owner. state = "Attiki" # The country of the subject. Two letter code. country = GR # The common name of the certificate owner. cn = "Cindy Lauper" # A user id of the certificate owner. #uid = "clauper" # Set domain components #dc = "name" #dc = "domain" # If the supported DN OIDs are not adequate you can set # any OID here. # For example set the X.520 Title and the X.520 Pseudonym # by using OID and string pairs. #dn_oid = "2.5.4.12 Dr." #dn_oid = "2.5.4.65 jackal" # This is deprecated and should not be used in new # certificates. # pkcs9_email = "none@none.org" # An alternative way to set the certificate's distinguished name directly # is with the "dn" option. The attribute names allowed are: # C (country), street, O (organization), OU (unit), title, CN (common name), # L (locality), ST (state), placeOfBirth, gender, countryOfCitizenship, # countryOfResidence, serialNumber, telephoneNumber, surName, initials, # generationQualifier, givenName, pseudonym, dnQualifier, postalCode, name, # businessCategory, DC, UID, jurisdictionOfIncorporationLocalityName, # jurisdictionOfIncorporationStateOrProvinceName, # jurisdictionOfIncorporationCountryName, XmppAddr, and numeric OIDs. #dn = "cn = Nikos,st = New\, Something,C=GR,surName=Mavrogiannopoulos,2.5.4.9=Arkadias" # The serial number of the certificate # The value is in decimal (i.e. 1963) or hex (i.e. 0x07ab). # Comment the field for a random serial number. serial = 007 # In how many days, counting from today, this certificate will expire. # Use -1 if there is no expiration date. expiration_days = 700 # Alternatively you may set concrete dates and time. The GNU date string # formats are accepted. See: # https://www.gnu.org/software/tar/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html #activation_date = "2004-02-29 16:21:42" #expiration_date = "2025-02-29 16:24:41" # X.509 v3 extensions # A dnsname in case of a WWW server. #dns_name = "www.none.org" #dns_name = "www.morethanone.org" # An othername defined by an OID and a hex encoded string #other_name = "1.3.6.1.5.2.2 302ca00d1b0b56414e5245494e2e4f5247a11b3019a006020400000002a10f300d1b047269636b1b0561646d696e" #other_name_utf8 = "1.2.4.5.6 A UTF8 string" #other_name_octet = "1.2.4.5.6 A string that will be encoded as ASN.1 octet string" # Allows writing an XmppAddr Identifier #xmpp_name = juliet@im.example.com # Names used in PKINIT #krb5_principal = user@REALM.COM #krb5_principal = HTTP/user@REALM.COM # A subject alternative name URI #uri = "https://www.example.com" # An IP address in case of a server. #ip_address = "192.168.1.1" # An email in case of a person email = "none@none.org" # TLS feature (rfc7633) extension. That can is used to indicate mandatory TLS # extension features to be provided by the server. In practice this is used # to require the Status Request (extid: 5) extension from the server. That is, # to require the server holding this certificate to provide a stapled OCSP response. # You can have multiple lines for multiple TLS features. # To ask for OCSP status request use: #tls_feature = 5 # Challenge password used in certificate requests challenge_password = 123456 # Password when encrypting a private key #password = secret # An URL that has CRLs (certificate revocation lists) # available. Needed in CA certificates. #crl_dist_points = "https://www.getcrl.crl/getcrl/" # Whether this is a CA certificate or not #ca # Subject Unique ID (in hex) #subject_unique_id = 00153224 # Issuer Unique ID (in hex) #issuer_unique_id = 00153225 #### Key usage # The following key usage flags are used by CAs and end certificates # Whether this certificate will be used to sign data (needed # in TLS DHE ciphersuites). This is the digitalSignature flag # in RFC5280 terminology. signing_key # Whether this certificate will be used to encrypt data (needed # in TLS RSA ciphersuites). Note that it is preferred to use different # keys for encryption and signing. This is the keyEncipherment flag # in RFC5280 terminology. encryption_key # Whether this key will be used to sign other certificates. The # keyCertSign flag in RFC5280 terminology. #cert_signing_key # Whether this key will be used to sign CRLs. The # cRLSign flag in RFC5280 terminology. #crl_signing_key # The keyAgreement flag of RFC5280. Its purpose is loosely # defined. Not use it unless required by a protocol. #key_agreement # The dataEncipherment flag of RFC5280. Its purpose is loosely # defined. Not use it unless required by a protocol. #data_encipherment # The nonRepudiation flag of RFC5280. Its purpose is loosely # defined. Not use it unless required by a protocol. #non_repudiation #### Extended key usage (key purposes) # The following extensions are used in an end certificate # to clarify its purpose. Some CAs also use it to indicate # the types of certificates they are purposed to sign. # Whether this certificate will be used for a TLS client; # this sets the id-kp-clientAuth (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.2) of # extended key usage. #tls_www_client # Whether this certificate will be used for a TLS server; # this sets the id-kp-serverAuth (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.1) of # extended key usage. #tls_www_server # Whether this key will be used to sign code. This sets the # id-kp-codeSigning (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.3) of extended key usage # extension. #code_signing_key # Whether this key will be used to sign OCSP data. This sets the # id-kp-OCSPSigning (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.9) of extended key usage extension. #ocsp_signing_key # Whether this key will be used for time stamping. This sets the # id-kp-timeStamping (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.8) of extended key usage extension. #time_stamping_key # Whether this key will be used for email protection. This sets the # id-kp-emailProtection (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4) of extended key usage extension. #email_protection_key # Whether this key will be used for IPsec IKE operations (1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.17). #ipsec_ike_key ## adding custom key purpose OIDs # for microsoft smart card logon # key_purpose_oid = 1.3.6.1.4.1.311.20.2.2 # for email protection # key_purpose_oid = 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.3.4 # for any purpose (must not be used in intermediate CA certificates) # key_purpose_oid = 2.5.29.37.0 ### end of key purpose OIDs ### Adding arbitrary extensions # This requires to provide the extension OIDs, as well as the extension data in # hex format. The following two options are available since GnuTLS 3.5.3. #add_extension = "1.2.3.4 0x0AAB01ACFE" # As above but encode the data as an octet string #add_extension = "1.2.3.4 octet_string(0x0AAB01ACFE)" # For portability critical extensions shouldn't be set to certificates. #add_critical_extension = "5.6.7.8 0x1AAB01ACFE" # When generating a certificate from a certificate # request, then honor the extensions stored in the request # and store them in the real certificate. #honor_crq_extensions # Alternatively only specific extensions can be copied. #honor_crq_ext = 2.5.29.17 #honor_crq_ext = 2.5.29.15 # Path length constraint. Sets the maximum number of # certificates that can be used to certify this certificate. # (i.e. the certificate chain length) #path_len = -1 #path_len = 2 # OCSP URI # ocsp_uri = https://my.ocsp.server/ocsp # CA issuers URI # ca_issuers_uri = https://my.ca.issuer # Certificate policies #policy1 = 1.3.6.1.4.1.5484.1.10.99.1.0 #policy1_txt = "This is a long policy to summarize" #policy1_url = https://www.example.com/a-policy-to-read #policy2 = 1.3.6.1.4.1.5484.1.10.99.1.1 #policy2_txt = "This is a short policy" #policy2_url = https://www.example.com/another-policy-to-read # The number of additional certificates that may appear in a # path before the anyPolicy is no longer acceptable. #inhibit_anypolicy_skip_certs 1 # Name constraints # DNS #nc_permit_dns = example.com #nc_exclude_dns = test.example.com # EMAIL #nc_permit_email = "nmav@ex.net" # Exclude subdomains of example.com #nc_exclude_email = .example.com # Exclude all e-mail addresses of example.com #nc_exclude_email = example.com # IP #nc_permit_ip = 192.168.0.0/16 #nc_exclude_ip = 192.168.5.0/24 #nc_permit_ip = fc0a:eef2:e7e7:a56e::/64 # Options for proxy certificates #proxy_policy_language = 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.21.1 # Options for generating a CRL # The number of days the next CRL update will be due. # next CRL update will be in 43 days #crl_next_update = 43 # this is the 5th CRL by this CA # The value is in decimal (i.e. 1963) or hex (i.e. 0x07ab). # Comment the field for a time-based number. # Time-based CRL numbers generated in GnuTLS 3.6.3 and later # are significantly larger than those generated in previous # versions. Since CRL numbers need to be monotonic, you need # to specify the CRL number here manually if you intend to # downgrade to an earlier version than 3.6.3 after publishing # the CRL as it is not possible to specify CRL numbers greater # than 2**63-2 using hex notation in those versions. #crl_number = 5 # Specify the update dates more precisely. #crl_this_update_date = "2004-02-29 16:21:42" #crl_next_update_date = "2025-02-29 16:24:41" # The date that the certificates will be made seen as # being revoked. #crl_revocation_date = "2025-02-29 16:24:41"
Next: danetool Invocation, Previous: certtool Invocation, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
Responses are typically signed/issued by designated certificates or certificate authorities and thus this tool requires on verification the certificate of the issuer or the full certificate chain in order to determine the appropriate signing authority. The specified certificate of the issuer is assumed trusted.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
ocsptool - GnuTLS OCSP tool Usage: ocsptool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -V, --verbose More verbose output --infile=file Input file - file must pre-exist --outfile=str Output file --ask[=str] Ask an OCSP/HTTP server on a certificate validity -e, --verify-response Verify response -i, --request-info Print information on a OCSP request -j, --response-info Print information on a OCSP response -q, --generate-request Generates an OCSP request --nonce Use (or not) a nonce to OCSP request --load-chain=file Reads a set of certificates forming a chain from file - file must pre-exist --load-issuer=file Reads issuer's certificate from file - file must pre-exist --load-cert=file Reads the certificate to check from file - file must pre-exist --load-trust=file Read OCSP trust anchors from file - prohibits the option 'load-signer' - file must pre-exist --load-signer=file Reads the OCSP response signer from file - prohibits the option 'load-trust' - file must pre-exist --inder Use DER format for input certificates and private keys --outder Use DER format for output of responses (this is the default) --outpem Use PEM format for output of responses -Q, --load-request=file Reads the DER encoded OCSP request from file - file must pre-exist -S, --load-response=file Reads the DER encoded OCSP response from file - file must pre-exist --ignore-errors Ignore any verification errors --verify-allow-broken Allow broken algorithms, such as MD5 for verification --attime=str Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. ocsptool is a program that can parse and print information about OCSP requests/responses, generate requests and verify responses. Unlike other GnuTLS applications it outputs DER encoded structures by default unless the '--outpem' option is specified. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “ask an ocsp/http server on a certificate validity” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument server name|url. Connects to the specified HTTP OCSP server and queries on the validity of the loaded certificate. Its argument can be a URL or a plain server name. It can be combined with –load-chain, where it checks all certificates in the provided chain, or with –load-cert and –load-issuer options. The latter checks the provided certificate against its specified issuer certificate.
This is the “verify response” option. Verifies the provided OCSP response against the system trust anchors (unless –load-trust is provided). It requires the –load-signer or –load-chain options to obtain the signer of the OCSP response.
This is the “print information on a ocsp request” option. Display detailed information on the provided OCSP request.
This is the “print information on a ocsp response” option. Display detailed information on the provided OCSP response.
This is the “read ocsp trust anchors from file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
When verifying an OCSP response read the trust anchors from the provided file. When this is not provided, the system’s trust anchors will be used.
This is the “use der format for output of responses (this is the default)” option. The output will be in DER encoded format. Unlike other GnuTLS tools, this is the default for this tool
This is the “use pem format for output of responses” option. The output will be in PEM format.
This is the “allow broken algorithms, such as md5 for verification” option. This can be combined with –verify-response.
This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
certtool (1)
To parse an OCSP request and print information about the content, the
-i
or --request-info
parameter may be used as follows.
The -Q
parameter specify the name of the file containing the
OCSP request, and it should contain the OCSP request in binary DER
format.
$ ocsptool -i -Q ocsp-request.der
The input file may also be sent to standard input like this:
$ cat ocsp-request.der | ocsptool --request-info
Similar to parsing OCSP requests, OCSP responses can be parsed using
the -j
or --response-info
as follows.
$ ocsptool -j -Q ocsp-response.der $ cat ocsp-response.der | ocsptool --response-info
The -q
or --generate-request
parameters are used to
generate an OCSP request. By default the OCSP request is written to
standard output in binary DER format, but can be stored in a file
using --outfile
. To generate an OCSP request the issuer of the
certificate to check needs to be specified with --load-issuer
and the certificate to check with --load-cert
. By default PEM
format is used for these files, although --inder
can be used to
specify that the input files are in DER format.
$ ocsptool -q --load-issuer issuer.pem --load-cert client.pem \ --outfile ocsp-request.der
When generating OCSP requests, the tool will add an OCSP extension
containing a nonce. This behaviour can be disabled by specifying
--no-nonce
.
To verify the signature in an OCSP response the -e
or
--verify-response
parameter is used. The tool will read an
OCSP response in DER format from standard input, or from the file
specified by --load-response
. The OCSP response is verified
against a set of trust anchors, which are specified using
--load-trust
. The trust anchors are concatenated certificates
in PEM format. The certificate that signed the OCSP response needs to
be in the set of trust anchors, or the issuer of the signer
certificate needs to be in the set of trust anchors and the OCSP
Extended Key Usage bit has to be asserted in the signer certificate.
$ ocsptool -e --load-trust issuer.pem \ --load-response ocsp-response.der
The tool will print status of verification.
It is possible to override the normal trust logic if you know that a
certain certificate is supposed to have signed the OCSP response, and
you want to use it to check the signature. This is achieved using
--load-signer
instead of --load-trust
. This will load
one certificate and it will be used to verify the signature in the
OCSP response. It will not check the Extended Key Usage bit.
$ ocsptool -e --load-signer ocsp-signer.pem \ --load-response ocsp-response.der
This approach is normally only relevant in two situations. The first
is when the OCSP response does not contain a copy of the signer
certificate, so the --load-trust
code would fail. The second
is if you want to avoid the indirect mode where the OCSP response
signer certificate is signed by a trust anchor.
Here is an example of how to generate an OCSP request for a
certificate and to verify the response. For illustration we’ll use
the blog.josefsson.org
host, which (as of writing) uses a
certificate from CACert. First we’ll use gnutls-cli
to get a
copy of the server certificate chain. The server is not required to
send this information, but this particular one is configured to do so.
$ echo | gnutls-cli -p 443 blog.josefsson.org --save-cert chain.pem
The saved certificates normally contain a pointer to where the OCSP
responder is located, in the Authority Information Access Information
extension. For example, from certtool -i < chain.pem
there is
this information:
Authority Information Access Information (not critical): Access Method: 1.3.6.1.5.5.7.48.1 (id-ad-ocsp) Access Location URI: https://ocsp.CAcert.org/
This means that ocsptool can discover the servers to contact over HTTP. We can now request information on the chain certificates.
$ ocsptool --ask --load-chain chain.pem
The request is sent via HTTP to the OCSP server address found in the certificates. It is possible to override the address of the OCSP server as well as ask information on a particular certificate using –load-cert and –load-issuer.
$ ocsptool --ask https://ocsp.CAcert.org/ --load-chain chain.pem
Previous: ocsptool Invocation, Up: More on certificate authentication [Contents][Index]
Tool to generate and check DNS resource records for the DANE protocol.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
danetool - GnuTLS DANE tool Usage: danetool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -V, --verbose More verbose output --outfile=str Output file --load-pubkey=str Loads a public key file --load-certificate=str Loads a certificate file --dlv=str Sets a DLV file --hash=str Hash algorithm to use for signing --check=str Check a host's DANE TLSA entry --check-ee Check only the end-entity's certificate --check-ca Check only the CA's certificate --tlsa-rr Print the DANE RR data on a certificate or public key - requires the option 'host' --host=str Specify the hostname to be used in the DANE RR --proto=str The protocol set for DANE data (tcp, udp etc.) --port=str The port or service to connect to, for DANE data --app-proto an alias for the 'starttls-proto' option --starttls-proto=str The application protocol to be used to obtain the server's certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres) --ca Whether the provided certificate or public key is a Certificate Authority --x509 Use the hash of the X.509 certificate, rather than the public key --local an alias for the 'domain' option --domain The provided certificate or public key is issued by the local domain - enabled by default - disabled as '--no-domain' --local-dns Use the local DNS server for DNSSEC resolving --insecure Do not verify any DNSSEC signature --inder Use DER format for input certificates and private keys --inraw an alias for the 'inder' option --print-raw Print the received DANE data in raw format --quiet Suppress several informational messages Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Tool to generate and check DNS resource records for the DANE protocol. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “loads a public key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL
This is the “loads a certificate file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This can be either a file or a PKCS #11 URL
This is the “sets a dlv file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This sets a DLV file to be used for DNSSEC verification.
This is the “hash algorithm to use for signing” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Available hash functions are SHA1, RMD160, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512.
This is the “check a host’s dane tlsa entry” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Obtains the DANE TLSA entry from the given hostname and prints information. Note that the actual certificate of the host can be provided using –load-certificate, otherwise danetool will connect to the server to obtain it. The exit code on verification success will be zero.
This is the “check only the end-entity’s certificate” option. Checks the end-entity’s certificate only. Trust anchors or CAs are not considered.
This is the “check only the ca’s certificate” option. Checks the trust anchor’s and CA’s certificate only. End-entities are not considered.
This is the “print the dane rr data on a certificate or public key” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
This command prints the DANE RR data needed to enable DANE on a DNS server.
This is the “specify the hostname to be used in the dane rr” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Hostname. This command sets the hostname for the DANE RR.
This is the “the protocol set for dane data (tcp, udp etc.)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Protocol. This command specifies the protocol for the service set in the DANE data.
This is an alias for the starttls-proto
option,
see the starttls-proto option documentation.
This is the “the application protocol to be used to obtain the server’s certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. When the server’s certificate isn’t provided danetool will connect to the server to obtain the certificate. In that case it is required to know the protocol to talk with the server prior to initiating the TLS handshake.
This is the “whether the provided certificate or public key is a certificate authority” option. Marks the DANE RR as a CA certificate if specified.
This is the “use the hash of the x.509 certificate, rather than the public key” option. This option forces the generated record to contain the hash of the full X.509 certificate. By default only the hash of the public key is used.
This is an alias for the domain
option,
see the domain option documentation.
This is the “the provided certificate or public key is issued by the local domain” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
DANE distinguishes certificates and public keys offered via the DNSSEC to trusted and local entities. This flag indicates that this is a domain-issued certificate, meaning that there could be no CA involved.
This is the “use the local dns server for dnssec resolving” option. This option will use the local DNS server for DNSSEC. This is disabled by default due to many servers not allowing DNSSEC.
This is the “do not verify any dnssec signature” option. Ignores any DNSSEC signature verification results.
This is the “use der format for input certificates and private keys” option. The input files will be assumed to be in DER or RAW format. Unlike options that in PEM input would allow multiple input data (e.g. multiple certificates), when reading in DER format a single data structure is read.
This is an alias for the inder
option,
see the inder option documentation.
This is the “print the received dane data in raw format” option. This option will print the received DANE data.
This is the “suppress several informational messages” option. In that case on the exit code can be used as an indication of verification success
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
certtool (1)
To create a DANE TLSA resource record for a certificate (or public key) that was issued locally and may or may not be signed by a CA use the following command.
$ danetool --tlsa-rr --host www.example.com --load-certificate cert.pem
To create a DANE TLSA resource record for a CA signed certificate, which will be marked as such use the following command.
$ danetool --tlsa-rr --host www.example.com --load-certificate cert.pem \ --no-domain
The former is useful to add in your DNS entry even if your certificate is signed by a CA. That way even users who do not trust your CA will be able to verify your certificate using DANE.
In order to create a record for the CA signer of your certificate use the following.
$ danetool --tlsa-rr --host www.example.com --load-certificate cert.pem \ --ca --no-domain
To read a server’s DANE TLSA entry, use:
$ danetool --check www.example.com --proto tcp --port 443
To verify an HTTPS server’s DANE TLSA entry, use:
$ danetool --check www.example.com --proto tcp --port 443 --load-certificate chain.pem
To verify an SMTP server’s DANE TLSA entry, use:
$ danetool --check www.example.com --proto tcp --starttls-proto=smtp --load-certificate chain.pem
Next: Selecting an appropriate authentication method, Previous: More on certificate authentication, Up: Authentication methods [Contents][Index]
In addition to certificate authentication, the TLS protocol may be used with password, shared-key and anonymous authentication methods. The rest of this chapter discusses details of these methods.
• PSK authentication | ||
• SRP authentication | ||
• Anonymous authentication |
• Authentication using PSK | ||
• psktool Invocation | Invoking psktool |
Next: psktool Invocation, Up: PSK authentication [Contents][Index]
Authentication using Pre-shared keys is a method to authenticate using usernames and binary keys. This protocol avoids making use of public key infrastructure and expensive calculations, thus it is suitable for constraint clients. It is available under all TLS protocol versions.
The implementation in GnuTLS is based on [TLSPSK]. The supported PSK key exchange methods are:
PSK:
Authentication using the PSK protocol (no forward secrecy).
DHE-PSK:
Authentication using the PSK protocol and Diffie-Hellman key exchange. This method offers perfect forward secrecy.
ECDHE-PSK:
Authentication using the PSK protocol and Elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman key exchange. This method offers perfect forward secrecy.
RSA-PSK:
Authentication using the PSK protocol for the client and an RSA certificate for the server. This is not available under TLS 1.3.
Helper functions to generate and maintain PSK keys are also included in GnuTLS.
int gnutls_key_generate (gnutls_datum_t * key, unsigned int key_size)
int gnutls_hex_encode (const gnutls_datum_t * data, char * result, size_t * result_size)
int gnutls_hex_decode (const gnutls_datum_t * hex_data, void * result, size_t * result_size)
Previous: Authentication using PSK, Up: PSK authentication [Contents][Index]
Program that generates random keys for use with TLS-PSK. The keys are stored in hexadecimal format in a key file.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
psktool - GnuTLS PSK tool Usage: psktool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -s, --keysize=num Specify the key size in bytes (default is 32-bytes or 256-bits) - it must be in the range: 0 to 512 -u, --username=str Specify the username to use -p, --pskfile=str Specify a pre-shared key file Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Program that generates random keys for use with TLS-PSK. The keys are stored in hexadecimal format in a key file. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “specify a pre-shared key file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option will specify the pre-shared key file to store the generated keys.
This is an alias for the pskfile
option,
see the pskfile option documentation.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
gnutls-cli-debug (1), gnutls-serv (1), srptool (1), certtool (1)
To add a user ’psk_identity’ in keys.psk for use with GnuTLS run:
$ ./psktool -u psk_identity -p keys.psk Generating a random key for user 'psk_identity' Key stored to keys.psk $ cat keys.psk psk_identity:88f3824b3e5659f52d00e959bacab954b6540344 $
This command will create keys.psk if it does not exist and will add user ’psk_identity’.
Next: Anonymous authentication, Previous: PSK authentication, Up: Shared-key and anonymous authentication [Contents][Index]
• Authentication using SRP | ||
• srptool Invocation | Invoking srptool |
Next: srptool Invocation, Up: SRP authentication [Contents][Index]
GnuTLS supports authentication via the Secure Remote Password or SRP protocol (see [TOMSRP] for a description). The SRP key exchange is an extension to the TLS protocol, and it provides an authenticated with a password key exchange. The peers can be identified using a single password, or there can be combinations where the client is authenticated using SRP and the server using a certificate. It is only available under TLS 1.2 or earlier versions.
The advantage of SRP authentication, over other proposed secure password authentication schemes, is that SRP is not susceptible to off-line dictionary attacks. Moreover, SRP does not require the server to hold the user’s password. This kind of protection is similar to the one used traditionally in the UNIX /etc/passwd file, where the contents of this file did not cause harm to the system security if they were revealed. The SRP needs instead of the plain password something called a verifier, which is calculated using the user’s password, and if stolen cannot be used to impersonate the user.
Typical conventions in SRP are a password file, called tpasswd that holds the SRP verifiers (encoded passwords) and another file, tpasswd.conf, which holds the allowed SRP parameters. The included in GnuTLS helper follow those conventions. The srptool program, discussed in the next section is a tool to manipulate the SRP parameters.
The implementation in GnuTLS is based on [TLSSRP]. The supported key exchange methods are shown below. Enabling any of these key exchange methods in a session disables support for TLS1.3.
SRP:
Authentication using the SRP protocol.
SRP_DSS:
Client authentication using the SRP protocol. Server is authenticated using a certificate with DSA parameters.
SRP_RSA:
Client authentication using the SRP protocol. Server is authenticated using a certificate with RSA parameters.
username: is the user’s name
password: is the user’s password
salt: should be some randomly generated bytes
generator: is the generator of the group
prime: is the group’s prime
res: where the verifier will be stored.
This function will create an SRP verifier, as specified in
RFC2945. The prime
and generator
should be one of the static
parameters defined in gnutls/gnutls.h or may be generated.
The verifier will be allocated with gnutls_malloc
() and will be stored in
res
using binary format.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, or an
error code.
int gnutls_srp_base64_encode2 (const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_datum_t * result)
int gnutls_srp_base64_decode2 (const gnutls_datum_t * b64_data, gnutls_datum_t * result)
Previous: Authentication using SRP, Up: SRP authentication [Contents][Index]
Simple program that emulates the programs in the Stanford SRP (Secure Remote Password) libraries using GnuTLS. It is intended for use in places where you don’t expect SRP authentication to be the used for system users.
In brief, to use SRP you need to create two files. These are the password file that holds the users and the verifiers associated with them and the configuration file to hold the group parameters (called tpasswd.conf).
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
srptool - GnuTLS SRP tool Usage: srptool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -i, --index=num specify the index of the group parameters in tpasswd.conf to use -u, --username=str specify a username -p, --passwd=str specify a password file -s, --salt=num specify salt size --verify just verify the password -v, --passwd-conf=str specify a password conf file --create-conf=str Generate a password configuration file Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Simple program that emulates the programs in the Stanford SRP (Secure Remote Password) libraries using GnuTLS. It is intended for use in places where you don't expect SRP authentication to be the used for system users. In brief, to use SRP you need to create two files. These are the password file that holds the users and the verifiers associated with them and the configuration file to hold the group parameters (called tpasswd.conf). Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “just verify the password” option. Verifies the password provided against the password file.
This is the “specify a password conf file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify a filename or a PKCS #11 URL to read the CAs from.
This is the “generate a password configuration file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This generates a password configuration file (tpasswd.conf) containing the required for TLS parameters.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
gnutls-cli-debug (1), gnutls-serv (1), srptool (1), psktool (1), certtool (1)
To create tpasswd.conf which holds the g and n values for SRP protocol (generator and a large prime), run:
$ srptool --create-conf /etc/tpasswd.conf
This command will create /etc/tpasswd and will add user ’test’ (you will also be prompted for a password). Verifiers are stored by default in the way libsrp expects.
$ srptool --passwd /etc/tpasswd --passwd-conf /etc/tpasswd.conf -u test
This command will check against a password. If the password matches the one in /etc/tpasswd you will get an ok.
$ srptool --passwd /etc/tpasswd --passwd\-conf /etc/tpasswd.conf --verify -u test
Previous: SRP authentication, Up: Shared-key and anonymous authentication [Contents][Index]
The anonymous key exchange offers encryption without any indication of the peer’s identity. This kind of authentication is vulnerable to a man in the middle attack, but can be used even if there is no prior communication or shared trusted parties with the peer. It is useful to establish a session over which certificate authentication will occur in order to hide the identities of the participants from passive eavesdroppers. It is only available under TLS 1.2 or earlier versions.
Unless in the above case, it is not recommended to use anonymous authentication. In the cases where there is no prior communication with the peers, an alternative with better properties, such as key continuity, is trust on first use (see Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication).
The available key exchange algorithms for anonymous authentication are shown below, but note that few public servers support them, and they have to be explicitly enabled. These ciphersuites are negotiated only under TLS 1.2.
ANON_DH:
This algorithm exchanges Diffie-Hellman parameters.
ANON_ECDH:
This algorithm exchanges elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman parameters. It is more efficient than ANON_DH on equivalent security levels.
Previous: Shared-key and anonymous authentication, Up: Authentication methods [Contents][Index]
This section provides some guidance on how to use the available authentication methods in GnuTLS in various scenarios.
Let’s consider two peers who need to communicate over an untrusted channel (the Internet), but have an out-of-band channel available. The latter channel is considered safe from eavesdropping and message modification and thus can be used for an initial bootstrapping of the protocol. The options available are:
Provided that the out-of-band channel is trusted all of the above provide a similar level of protection. An out-of-band channel may be the initial bootstrapping of a user’s PC in a corporate environment, in-person communication, communication over an alternative network (e.g. the phone network), etc.
When an out-of-band channel is not available a peer cannot be reliably authenticated. What can be done, however, is to allow some form of registration of users connecting for the first time and ensure that their keys remain the same after that initial connection. This is termed key continuity or trust on first use (TOFU).
The available option is to use public key authentication (see Certificate authentication). The client and the server store each other’s public keys (or fingerprints of them) and associate them with their identity. On future sessions over the untrusted channel they verify the keys being the same (see Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication).
To mitigate the uncertainty of the information exchanged in the first connection other channels over the Internet may be used, e.g., DNSSEC (see Verifying a certificate using DANE).
When a trusted third party is available (or a certificate authority) the most suitable option is to use certificate authentication (see Certificate authentication). The client and the server obtain certificates that associate their identity and public keys using a digital signature by the trusted party and use them to on the subsequent communications with each other. Each party verifies the peer’s certificate using the trusted third party’s signature. The parameters of the third party’s signature are present in its certificate which must be available to all communicating parties.
While the above is the typical authentication method for servers in the Internet by using the commercial CAs, the users that act as clients in the protocol rarely possess such certificates. In that case a hybrid method can be used where the server is authenticated by the client using the commercial CAs and the client is authenticated based on some information the client provided over the initial server-authenticated channel. The available options are:
Next: How to use GnuTLS in applications, Previous: Authentication methods, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
In several cases storing the long term cryptographic keys in a hard disk or even in memory poses a significant risk. Once the system they are stored is compromised the keys must be replaced as the secrecy of future sessions is no longer guaranteed. Moreover, past sessions that were not protected by a perfect forward secrecy offering ciphersuite are also to be assumed compromised.
If such threats need to be addressed, then it may be wise storing the keys in a security module such as a smart card, an HSM or the TPM chip. Those modules ensure the protection of the cryptographic keys by only allowing operations on them and preventing their extraction. The purpose of the abstract key API is to provide an API that will allow the handle of keys in memory and files, as well as keys stored in such modules.
In GnuTLS the approach is to handle all keys transparently by the high level API, e.g., the API that loads a key or certificate from a file. The high-level API will accept URIs in addition to files that specify keys on an HSM or in TPM, and a callback function will be used to obtain any required keys. The URI format is defined in [PKCS11URI].
More information on the API is provided in the next sections. Examples of a URI of a certificate
stored in an HSM, as well as a key stored in the TPM chip are shown below. To discover the URIs
of the objects the p11tool
(see p11tool Invocation).
pkcs11:token=Nikos;serial=307521161601031;model=PKCS%2315; \ manufacturer=EnterSafe;object=test1;type=cert
• Abstract key types | ||
• Application-specific keys | ||
• Smart cards and HSMs | ||
• Trusted Platform Module |
Next: Application-specific keys, Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types [Contents][Index]
Since there are many forms of a public or private keys supported by GnuTLS such as
X.509, PKCS #11 or TPM it is desirable to allow common operations
on them. For these reasons the abstract gnutls_privkey_t
and gnutls_pubkey_t
were
introduced in gnutls/abstract.h
header. Those types are initialized using a specific type of
key and then can be used to perform operations in an abstract way. For example in order
to sign an X.509 certificate with a key that resides in a token the following steps can be
used.
#include <gnutls/abstract.h> void sign_cert( gnutls_x509_crt_t to_be_signed) { gnutls_x509_crt_t ca_cert; gnutls_privkey_t abs_key; /* initialize the abstract key */ gnutls_privkey_init(&abs_key); /* keys stored in tokens are identified by URLs */ gnutls_privkey_import_url(abs_key, key_url); gnutls_x509_crt_init(&ca_cert); gnutls_x509_crt_import_url(&ca_cert, cert_url); /* sign the certificate to be signed */ gnutls_x509_crt_privkey_sign(to_be_signed, ca_cert, abs_key, GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256, 0); }
• Abstract public keys | ||
• Abstract private keys | ||
• Operations |
Next: Abstract private keys, Up: Abstract key types [Contents][Index]
An abstract gnutls_pubkey_t
can be initialized and freed by
using the functions below.
int gnutls_pubkey_init (gnutls_pubkey_t * key)
void gnutls_pubkey_deinit (gnutls_pubkey_t key)
After initialization its values can be imported from
an existing structure like gnutls_x509_crt_t
,
or through an ASN.1 encoding of the X.509 SubjectPublicKeyInfo
sequence.
int gnutls_pubkey_import_x509 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_url (gnutls_pubkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_privkey (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_privkey_t pkey, unsigned int usage, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import (gnutls_pubkey_t key, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
int gnutls_pubkey_export (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, void * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
key: Holds the certificate
format: the format of output params. One of PEM or DER.
out: will contain a certificate PEM or DER encoded
This function will export the public key to DER or PEM format. The contents of the exported data is the SubjectPublicKeyInfo X.509 structure.
The output buffer will be allocated using gnutls_malloc()
.
If the structure is PEM encoded, it will have a header of "BEGIN CERTIFICATE".
Returns: In case of failure a negative error code will be returned, and 0 on success.
Since: 3.1.3
Other helper functions that allow directly importing from raw X.509 structures are shown below.
int gnutls_pubkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_pubkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)
An important function is gnutls_pubkey_import_url which will import public keys from URLs that identify objects stored in tokens (see Smart cards and HSMs and Trusted Platform Module). A function to check for a supported by GnuTLS URL is gnutls_url_is_supported.
url: A URI to be tested
Check whether the provided url
is supported. Depending on the system libraries
GnuTLS may support pkcs11, tpmkey or other URLs.
Returns: return non-zero if the given URL is supported, and zero if it is not known.
Since: 3.1.0
Additional functions are available that will return information over a public key, such as a unique key ID, as well as a function that given a public key fingerprint would provide a memorable sketch.
Note that gnutls_pubkey_get_key_id calculates a SHA1 digest of the public key as a DER-formatted, subjectPublicKeyInfo object. Other implementations use different approaches, e.g., some use the “common method” described in section 4.2.1.2 of [RFC5280] which calculates a digest on a part of the subjectPublicKeyInfo object.
int gnutls_pubkey_get_pk_algorithm (gnutls_pubkey_t key, unsigned int * bits)
int gnutls_pubkey_get_preferred_hash_algorithm (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t * hash, unsigned int * mand)
int gnutls_pubkey_get_key_id (gnutls_pubkey_t key, unsigned int flags, unsigned char * output_data, size_t * output_data_size)
int gnutls_random_art (gnutls_random_art_t type, const char * key_type, unsigned int key_size, void * fpr, size_t fpr_size, gnutls_datum_t * art)
To export the key-specific parameters, or obtain a unique key ID the following functions are provided.
int gnutls_pubkey_export_rsa_raw2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * m, gnutls_datum_t * e, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_export_dsa_raw2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * g, gnutls_datum_t * y, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_export_ecc_raw2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_ecc_curve_t * curve, gnutls_datum_t * x, gnutls_datum_t * y, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_export_ecc_x962 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * parameters, gnutls_datum_t * ecpoint)
Next: Operations, Previous: Abstract public keys, Up: Abstract key types [Contents][Index]
An abstract gnutls_privkey_t
can be initialized and freed by
using the functions below.
int gnutls_privkey_init (gnutls_privkey_t * key)
void gnutls_privkey_deinit (gnutls_privkey_t key)
After initialization its values can be imported from
an existing structure like gnutls_x509_privkey_t
,
but unlike public keys it cannot be exported. That is
to allow abstraction over keys stored in hardware that
makes available only operations.
int gnutls_privkey_import_x509 (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, gnutls_pkcs11_privkey_t key, unsigned int flags)
Other helper functions that allow directly importing from raw X.509 structures are shown below. Again, as with public keys, private keys can be imported from a hardware module using URLs.
key: A key of type gnutls_privkey_t
url: A PKCS 11 url
flags: should be zero
This function will import a PKCS11 or TPM URL as a
private key. The supported URL types can be checked
using gnutls_url_is_supported()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
int gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_get_pk_algorithm (gnutls_privkey_t key, unsigned int * bits)
gnutls_privkey_type_t gnutls_privkey_get_type (gnutls_privkey_t key)
int gnutls_privkey_status (gnutls_privkey_t key)
In order to support cryptographic operations using an external API, the following function is provided. This allows for a simple extensibility API without resorting to PKCS #11.
pkey: The private key
userdata: private data to be provided to the callbacks
sign_data_fn: callback for signature operations (may be NULL
)
sign_hash_fn: callback for signature operations (may be NULL
)
decrypt_fn: callback for decryption operations (may be NULL
)
deinit_fn: a deinitialization function
info_fn: returns info about the public key algorithm (should not be NULL
)
flags: Flags for the import
This function will associate the given callbacks with the
gnutls_privkey_t
type. At least one of the callbacks
must be non-null. If a deinitialization function is provided
then flags is assumed to contain GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_IMPORT_AUTO_RELEASE
.
Note that in contrast with the signing function of
gnutls_privkey_import_ext3()
, the signing functions provided to this
function take explicitly the signature algorithm as parameter and
different functions are provided to sign the data and hashes.
The sign_hash_fn
is to be called to sign pre-hashed data. The input
to the callback is the output of the hash (such as SHA256) corresponding
to the signature algorithm. For RSA PKCS1
signatures, the signature
algorithm can be set to GNUTLS_SIGN_RSA_RAW
, and in that case the data
should be handled as if they were an RSA PKCS1
DigestInfo structure.
The sign_data_fn
is to be called to sign data. The input data will be
he data to be signed (and hashed), with the provided signature
algorithm. This function is to be used for signature algorithms like
Ed25519 which cannot take pre-hashed data as input.
When both sign_data_fn
and sign_hash_fn
functions are provided they
must be able to operate on all the supported signature algorithms,
unless prohibited by the type of the algorithm (e.g., as with Ed25519).
The info_fn
must provide information on the signature algorithms supported by
this private key, and should support the flags GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_INFO_PK_ALGO
,
GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_INFO_HAVE_SIGN_ALGO
and GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_INFO_PK_ALGO_BITS
.
It must return -1 on unknown flags.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.6.0
On the private keys where exporting of parameters is possible (i.e., software keys), the following functions are also available.
int gnutls_privkey_export_rsa_raw2 (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * m, gnutls_datum_t * e, gnutls_datum_t * d, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * u, gnutls_datum_t * e1, gnutls_datum_t * e2, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_export_dsa_raw2 (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_datum_t * p, gnutls_datum_t * q, gnutls_datum_t * g, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * x, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_export_ecc_raw2 (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_ecc_curve_t * curve, gnutls_datum_t * x, gnutls_datum_t * y, gnutls_datum_t * k, unsigned int flags)
Previous: Abstract private keys, Up: Abstract key types [Contents][Index]
The abstract key types can be used to access signing and signature verification operations with the underlying keys.
pubkey: Holds the public key
algo: The signature algorithm used
flags: Zero or an OR list of gnutls_certificate_verify_flags
data: holds the signed data
signature: contains the signature
This function will verify the given signed data, using the parameters from the certificate.
Returns: In case of a verification failure GNUTLS_E_PK_SIG_VERIFY_FAILED
is returned, and zero or positive code on success. For known to be insecure
signatures this function will return GNUTLS_E_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY
unless
the flag GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKEN
is specified.
Since: 3.0
key: Holds the public key
algo: The signature algorithm used
flags: Zero or an OR list of gnutls_certificate_verify_flags
hash: holds the hash digest to be verified
signature: contains the signature
This function will verify the given signed digest, using the
parameters from the public key. Note that unlike gnutls_privkey_sign_hash()
,
this function accepts a signature algorithm instead of a digest algorithm.
You can use gnutls_pk_to_sign()
to get the appropriate value.
Returns: In case of a verification failure GNUTLS_E_PK_SIG_VERIFY_FAILED
is returned, and zero or positive code on success. For known to be insecure
signatures this function will return GNUTLS_E_INSUFFICIENT_SECURITY
unless
the flag GNUTLS_VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKEN
is specified.
Since: 3.0
key: Holds the public key
flags: should be 0 for now
plaintext: The data to be encrypted
ciphertext: contains the encrypted data
This function will encrypt the given data, using the public
key. On success the ciphertext
will be allocated using gnutls_malloc()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.0
signer: Holds the key
hash: should be a digest algorithm
flags: Zero or one of gnutls_privkey_flags_t
data: holds the data to be signed
signature: will contain the signature allocated with gnutls_malloc()
This function will sign the given data using a signature algorithm supported by the private key. Signature algorithms are always used together with a hash functions. Different hash functions may be used for the RSA algorithm, but only the SHA family for the DSA keys.
You may use gnutls_pubkey_get_preferred_hash_algorithm()
to determine
the hash algorithm.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
signer: Holds the signer’s key
hash_algo: The hash algorithm used
flags: Zero or one of gnutls_privkey_flags_t
hash_data: holds the data to be signed
signature: will contain newly allocated signature
This function will sign the given hashed data using a signature algorithm supported by the private key. Signature algorithms are always used together with a hash functions. Different hash functions may be used for the RSA algorithm, but only SHA-XXX for the DSA keys.
You may use gnutls_pubkey_get_preferred_hash_algorithm()
to determine
the hash algorithm.
The flags may be GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_SIGN_FLAG_TLS1_RSA
or GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_SIGN_FLAG_RSA_PSS
.
In the former case this function will ignore hash_algo
and perform a raw PKCS1 signature,
and in the latter an RSA-PSS signature will be generated.
Note that, not all algorithm support signing already hashed data. When
signing with Ed25519, gnutls_privkey_sign_data()
should be used.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
key: Holds the key
flags: zero for now
ciphertext: holds the data to be decrypted
plaintext: will contain the decrypted data, allocated with gnutls_malloc()
This function will decrypt the given data using the algorithm supported by the private key.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
Signing existing structures, such as certificates, CRLs, or certificate requests, as well as associating public keys with structures is also possible using the key abstractions.
crq: should contain a gnutls_x509_crq_t
type
key: holds a public key
This function will set the public parameters from the given public
key to the request. The key
can be deallocated after that.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
crt: should contain a gnutls_x509_crt_t
type
key: holds a public key
This function will set the public parameters from the given public
key to the certificate. The key
can be deallocated after that.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
int gnutls_x509_crt_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_privkey_t issuer_key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crl_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_privkey_t issuer_key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crq_privkey_sign (gnutls_x509_crq_t crq, gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int flags)
Next: Smart cards and HSMs, Previous: Abstract key types, Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types [Contents][Index]
In several systems there are keystores which allow to read, store and use certificates
and private keys. For these systems GnuTLS provides the system-key API in gnutls/system-keys.h
.
That API provides the ability to iterate through all stored keys, add and delete keys as well
as use these keys using a URL which starts with "system:". The format of the URLs is system-specific.
The systemkey
tool is also provided to assist in listing keys and debugging.
The systems supported via this API are the following.
iter: an iterator of the system keys (must be set to NULL
initially)
cert_type: A value of gnutls_certificate_type_t which indicates the type of certificate to look for
cert_url: The certificate URL of the pair (may be NULL
)
key_url: The key URL of the pair (may be NULL
)
label: The friendly name (if any) of the pair (may be NULL
)
der: if non-NULL the DER data of the certificate
flags: should be zero
This function will return on each call a certificate
and key pair URLs, as well as a label associated with them,
and the DER-encoded certificate. When the iteration is complete it will
return GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE
.
Typically cert_type
should be GNUTLS_CRT_X509
.
All values set are allocated and must be cleared using gnutls_free()
,
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.4.0
void gnutls_system_key_iter_deinit (gnutls_system_key_iter_t iter)
int gnutls_system_key_add_x509 (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_x509_privkey_t privkey, const char * label, char ** cert_url, char ** key_url)
int gnutls_system_key_delete (const char * cert_url, const char * key_url)
For systems where GnuTLS doesn’t provide a system specific store,
it may often be desirable to define a custom class of keys
that are identified via URLs and available to GnuTLS calls such as gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2.
Such keys can be registered using the API in gnutls/urls.h
. The function
which registers such keys is gnutls_register_custom_url.
st: A gnutls_custom_url_st
structure
Register a custom URL. This will affect the following functions:
gnutls_url_is_supported()
, gnutls_privkey_import_url()
,
gnutls_pubkey_import_url, gnutls_x509_crt_import_url()
and all functions that depend on
them, e.g., gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2()
.
The provided structure and callback functions must be valid throughout
the lifetime of the process. The registration of an existing URL type
will fail with GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST
. Since GnuTLS 3.5.0 this function
can be used to override the builtin URLs.
This function is not thread safe.
Returns: returns zero if the given structure was imported or a negative value otherwise.
Since: 3.4.0
The input to this function are three callback functions as well as
the prefix of the URL, (e.g., "mypkcs11:") and the length of the prefix.
The types of the callbacks are shown below, and are expected to
use the exported gnutls functions to import the keys and certificates.
E.g., a typical import_key
callback should use gnutls_privkey_import_ext4.
typedef int (*gnutls_privkey_import_url_func)(gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const char *url, unsigned flags); typedef int (*gnutls_x509_crt_import_url_func)(gnutls_x509_crt_t pkey, const char *url, unsigned flags); /* The following callbacks are optional */ /* This is to enable gnutls_pubkey_import_url() */ typedef int (*gnutls_pubkey_import_url_func)(gnutls_pubkey_t pkey, const char *url, unsigned flags); /* This is to allow constructing a certificate chain. It will be provided * the initial certificate URL and the certificate to find its issuer, and must * return zero and the DER encoding of the issuer's certificate. If not available, * it should return GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE. */ typedef int (*gnutls_get_raw_issuer_func)(const char *url, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_datum_t *issuer_der, unsigned flags); typedef struct custom_url_st { const char *name; unsigned name_size; gnutls_privkey_import_url_func import_key; gnutls_x509_crt_import_url_func import_crt; gnutls_pubkey_import_url_func import_pubkey; gnutls_get_raw_issuer_func get_issuer; } gnutls_custom_url_st;
Next: Trusted Platform Module, Previous: Application-specific keys, Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types [Contents][Index]
In this section we present the smart-card and hardware security module (HSM) support in GnuTLS using PKCS #11 [PKCS11]. Hardware security modules and smart cards provide a way to store private keys and perform operations on them without exposing them. This decouples cryptographic keys from the applications that use them and provide an additional security layer against cryptographic key extraction. Since this can also be achieved in software components such as in Gnome keyring, we will use the term security module to describe any cryptographic key separation subsystem.
PKCS #11 is plugin API allowing applications to access cryptographic
operations on a security module, as well as to objects residing on it. PKCS
#11 modules exist for hardware tokens such as smart cards9,
cryptographic tokens, as well as for software modules like Gnome Keyring.
The objects residing on a security module may be certificates, public keys,
private keys or secret keys. Of those certificates and public/private key
pairs can be used with GnuTLS. PKCS #11’s main advantage is that
it allows operations on private key objects such as decryption
and signing without exposing the key. In GnuTLS the PKCS #11 functionality is
available in gnutls/pkcs11.h
.
Next: PKCS11 Manual Initialization, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
To allow all GnuTLS applications to transparently access smart cards
and tokens, PKCS #11 is automatically initialized during the first
call of a PKCS #11 related function, in a thread safe way.
The default initialization process, utilizes p11-kit configuration, and loads any
appropriate PKCS #11 modules. The p11-kit configuration
files10 are typically stored in /etc/pkcs11/modules/
.
For example a file that will instruct GnuTLS to load the OpenSC module,
could be named /etc/pkcs11/modules/opensc.module
and contain the following:
module: /usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so
If you use these configuration files, then there is no need for other initialization in GnuTLS, except for the PIN and token callbacks (see next section). In several cases, however, it is desirable to limit badly behaving modules (e.g., modules that add an unacceptable delay on initialization) to single applications. That can be done using the “enable-in:” option followed by the base name of applications that this module should be used.
It is also possible to manually initialize or even disable the PKCS #11 subsystem if the default settings are not desirable or not available (see PKCS11 Manual Initialization for more information).
Note that, PKCS #11 modules behave in a peculiar way after a fork; they require a reinitialization of all the used PKCS #11 resources. While GnuTLS automates that process, there are corner cases where it is not possible to handle it correctly in an automated way11. For that, it is recommended not to mix fork() and PKCS #11 module usage. It is recommended to initialize and use any PKCS #11 resources in a single process.
Older versions of GnuTLS required to call gnutls_pkcs11_reinit after a fork() call; since 3.3.0 this is no longer required.
Next: Accessing objects that require a PIN, Previous: PKCS11 Initialization, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
In systems where one cannot rely on a globally available p11-kit configuration
to be available, it is still possible to utilize PKCS #11 objects. That
can be done by loading directly the PKCS #11 shared module in the
application using gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider, after having
called gnutls_pkcs11_init specifying the GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_MANUAL
flag.
name: The filename of the module
params: should be NULL or a known string (see description)
This function will load and add a PKCS 11 module to the module list used in gnutls. After this function is called the module will be used for PKCS 11 operations.
When loading a module to be used for certificate verification,
use the string ’trusted’ as params
.
Note that this function is not thread safe.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
In that case, the application will only have access to the modules explicitly
loaded. If the GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_MANUAL
flag is specified and no calls
to gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider are made, then the PKCS #11 functionality
is effectively disabled.
flags: An ORed sequence of GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_
*
deprecated_config_file: either NULL or the location of a deprecated configuration file
This function will initialize the PKCS 11 subsystem in gnutls. It will
read configuration files if GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_AUTO
is used or allow
you to independently load PKCS 11 modules using gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider()
if GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_MANUAL
is specified.
You don’t need to call this function since GnuTLS 3.3.0 because it is being called
during the first request PKCS 11 operation. That call will assume the GNUTLS_PKCS11_FLAG_AUTO
flag. If another flags are required then it must be called independently
prior to any PKCS 11 operation.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
Next: Reading objects, Previous: PKCS11 Manual Initialization, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
Objects stored in token such as a private keys are typically protected from access by a PIN or password. This PIN may be required to either read the object (if allowed) or to perform operations with it. To allow obtaining the PIN when accessing a protected object, as well as probe the user to insert the token the following functions allow to set a callback.
void gnutls_pkcs11_set_token_function (gnutls_pkcs11_token_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_pkcs11_set_pin_function (gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
int gnutls_pkcs11_add_provider (const char * name, const char * params)
gnutls_pin_callback_t gnutls_pkcs11_get_pin_function (void ** userdata)
The callback is of type gnutls_pin_callback_t
and will have as
input the provided userdata, the PIN attempt number, a URL describing the
token, a label describing the object and flags. The PIN must be at most
of pin_max
size and must be copied to pin variable. The function must
return 0 on success or a negative error code otherwise.
typedef int (*gnutls_pin_callback_t) (void *userdata, int attempt, const char *token_url, const char *token_label, unsigned int flags, char *pin, size_t pin_max);
The flags are of gnutls_pin_flag_t
type and are explained below.
GNUTLS_PIN_USER
The PIN for the user.
GNUTLS_PIN_SO
The PIN for the security officer (admin).
GNUTLS_PIN_FINAL_TRY
This is the final try before blocking.
GNUTLS_PIN_COUNT_LOW
Few tries remain before token blocks.
GNUTLS_PIN_CONTEXT_SPECIFIC
The PIN is for a specific action and key like signing.
GNUTLS_PIN_WRONG
Last given PIN was not correct.
Note that due to limitations of PKCS #11 there are issues when multiple libraries are sharing a module. To avoid this problem GnuTLS uses p11-kit that provides a middleware to control access to resources over the multiple users.
To avoid conflicts with multiple registered callbacks for PIN functions, gnutls_pkcs11_get_pin_function may be used to check for any previously set functions. In addition context specific PIN functions are allowed, e.g., by using functions below.
void gnutls_certificate_set_pin_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_pubkey_set_pin_function (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_privkey_set_pin_function (gnutls_privkey_t key, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_pkcs11_obj_set_pin_function (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
void gnutls_x509_crt_set_pin_function (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_pin_callback_t fn, void * userdata)
Next: Writing objects, Previous: Accessing objects that require a PIN, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
All PKCS #11 objects are referenced by GnuTLS functions by URLs as described in [PKCS11URI]. This allows for a consistent naming of objects across systems and applications in the same system. For example a public key on a smart card may be referenced as:
pkcs11:token=Nikos;serial=307521161601031;model=PKCS%2315; \ manufacturer=EnterSafe;object=test1;type=public;\ id=32f153f3e37990b08624141077ca5dec2d15faed
while the smart card itself can be referenced as:
pkcs11:token=Nikos;serial=307521161601031;model=PKCS%2315;manufacturer=EnterSafe
Objects stored in a PKCS #11 token can typically be extracted if they are not marked as sensitive. Usually only private keys are marked as sensitive and cannot be extracted, while certificates and other data can be retrieved. The functions that can be used to enumerate and access objects are shown below.
int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_list_import_url4 (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t ** p_list, unsigned int * n_list, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_import_url (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pkcs11_obj_export_url (gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t obj, gnutls_pkcs11_url_type_t detailed, char ** url)
obj: should contain a gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t
type
itype: Denotes the type of information requested
output: where output will be stored
output_size: contains the maximum size of the output buffer and will be overwritten with the actual size.
This function will return information about the PKCS11 certificate such as the label, id as well as token information where the key is stored.
When output is text, a null terminated string is written to output
and its
string length is written to output_size
(without null terminator). If the
buffer is too small, output_size
will contain the expected buffer size
(with null terminator for text) and return GNUTLS_E_SHORT_MEMORY_BUFFER
.
In versions previously to 3.6.0 this function included the null terminator
to output_size
. After 3.6.0 the output size doesn’t include the terminator character.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) on success or a negative error code on error.
Since: 2.12.0
int gnutls_x509_crt_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t pkcs11_crt)
int gnutls_x509_crt_import_url (gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_x509_crt_list_import_pkcs11 (gnutls_x509_crt_t * certs, unsigned int cert_max, gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t *const objs, unsigned int flags)
Properties of the physical token can also be accessed and altered with GnuTLS. For example data in a token can be erased (initialized), PIN can be altered, etc.
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_init (const char * token_url, const char * so_pin, const char * label)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_url (unsigned int seq, gnutls_pkcs11_url_type_t detailed, char ** url)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_info (const char * url, gnutls_pkcs11_token_info_t ttype, void * output, size_t * output_size)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_flags (const char * url, unsigned int * flags)
int gnutls_pkcs11_token_set_pin (const char * token_url, const char * oldpin, const char * newpin, unsigned int flags)
The following examples demonstrate the usage of the API. The first example will list all available PKCS #11 tokens in a system and the latter will list all certificates in a token that have a corresponding private key.
int i; char* url; gnutls_global_init(); for (i=0;;i++) { ret = gnutls_pkcs11_token_get_url(i, &url); if (ret == GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE) break; if (ret < 0) exit(1); fprintf(stdout, "Token[%d]: URL: %s\n", i, url); gnutls_free(url); } gnutls_global_deinit();
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #include <config.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/pkcs11.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #define URL "pkcs11:URL" int main(int argc, char **argv) { gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t *obj_list; gnutls_x509_crt_t xcrt; unsigned int obj_list_size = 0; gnutls_datum_t cinfo; int ret; unsigned int i; ret = gnutls_pkcs11_obj_list_import_url4( &obj_list, &obj_list_size, URL, GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_CRT | GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_WITH_PRIVKEY); if (ret < 0) return -1; /* now all certificates are in obj_list */ for (i = 0; i < obj_list_size; i++) { gnutls_x509_crt_init(&xcrt); gnutls_x509_crt_import_pkcs11(xcrt, obj_list[i]); gnutls_x509_crt_print(xcrt, GNUTLS_CRT_PRINT_FULL, &cinfo); fprintf(stdout, "cert[%d]:\n %s\n\n", i, cinfo.data); gnutls_free(cinfo.data); gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(xcrt); } for (i = 0; i < obj_list_size; i++) gnutls_pkcs11_obj_deinit(obj_list[i]); gnutls_free(obj_list); return 0; }
Next: PKCS11 Low Level Access, Previous: Reading objects, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
With GnuTLS you can copy existing private keys and certificates
to a token. Note that when copying private keys it is recommended to mark
them as sensitive using the GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_SENSITIVE
to prevent its extraction. An object can be marked as private using the flag
GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_PRIVATE
, to require PIN to be
entered before accessing the object (for operations or otherwise).
token_url: A PKCS 11
URL specifying a token
key: A private key
label: A name to be used for the stored data
cid: The CKA_ID to set for the object -if NULL, the ID will be derived from the public key
key_usage: One of GNUTLS_KEY_*
flags: One of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_* flags
This function will copy a private key into a PKCS 11
token specified by
a URL.
Since 3.6.3 the objects are marked as sensitive by default unless
GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_NOT_SENSITIVE
is specified.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.4.0
token_url: A PKCS 11
URL specifying a token
crt: The certificate to copy
label: The name to be used for the stored data
cid: The CKA_ID to set for the object -if NULL, the ID will be derived from the public key
flags: One of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_*
This function will copy a certificate into a PKCS 11
token specified by
a URL. Valid flags to mark the certificate: GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_TRUSTED
,
GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_PRIVATE
, GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_CA
,
GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_FLAG_MARK_ALWAYS_AUTH
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.4.0
object_url: The URL of the object to delete.
flags: One of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_* flags
This function will delete objects matching the given URL. Note that not all tokens support the delete operation.
Returns: On success, the number of objects deleted is returned, otherwise a negative error value.
Since: 2.12.0
Next: Using a PKCS11 token with TLS, Previous: Writing objects, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
When it is needed to use PKCS#11 functionality which is not wrapped by GnuTLS, it is possible to extract the PKCS#11 session, object or token pointers. That allows an application to still access the low-level functionality, while at the same time take advantage of the URI addressing scheme supported by GnuTLS.
url: should contain a PKCS11
URL identifying a token
ptr: will contain the CK_FUNCTION_LIST_PTR pointer
slot_id: will contain the slot_id (may be NULL
)
flags: should be zero
This function will return the function pointer of the specified
token by the URL. The returned pointers are valid until
gnutls is deinitialized, c.f. _global_deinit()
.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) on success or a negative error code
on error.
Since: 3.6.3
obj: should contain a gnutls_pkcs11_obj_t
type
ptr: will contain the CK_FUNCTION_LIST_PTR pointer (may be NULL
)
session: will contain the CK_SESSION_HANDLE of the object
ohandle: will contain the CK_OBJECT_HANDLE of the object
slot_id: the identifier of the slot (may be NULL
)
flags: Or sequence of GNUTLS_PKCS11_OBJ_* flags
Obtains the PKCS11
session handles of an object. session
and ohandle
must be deinitialized by the caller. The returned pointers are
independent of the obj
lifetime.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) on success or a negative error code
on error.
Since: 3.6.3
Next: Verifying certificates over PKCS11, Previous: PKCS11 Low Level Access, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
It is possible to use a PKCS #11 token to a TLS session, as shown in ex-pkcs11-client. In addition the following functions can be used to load PKCS #11 key and certificates by specifying a PKCS #11 URL instead of a filename.
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * cafile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * certfile, const char * keyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
Next: p11tool Invocation, Previous: Using a PKCS11 token with TLS, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
The PKCS #11 API can be used to allow all applications in the same operating system to access shared cryptographic keys and certificates in a uniform way, as in Figure 5.1. That way applications could load their trusted certificate list, as well as user certificates from a common PKCS #11 module. Such a provider is the p11-kit trust storage module12 and it provides access to the trusted Root CA certificates in a system. That provides a more dynamic list of Root CA certificates, as opposed to a static list in a file or directory.
That store, allows for distrusting of CAs or certificates, as well as categorization of the Root CAs (Web verification, Code signing, etc.), in addition to restricting their purpose via stapled extensions13. GnuTLS will utilize the p11-kit trust module as the default trust store if configured to; i.e., if ’–with-default-trust-store-pkcs11=pkcs11:’ is given to the configure script.
Previous: Verifying certificates over PKCS11, Up: Smart cards and HSMs [Contents][Index]
Program that allows operations on PKCS #11 smart cards and security modules.
To use PKCS #11 tokens with GnuTLS the p11-kit configuration files need to be setup. That is create a .module file in /etc/pkcs11/modules with the contents ’module: /path/to/pkcs11.so’. Alternatively the configuration file /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf has to exist and contain a number of lines of the form ’load=/usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so’.
You can provide the PIN to be used for the PKCS #11 operations with the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
p11tool - GnuTLS PKCS #11 tool Usage: p11tool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [url] None: Tokens: --list-tokens List all available tokens --list-token-urls List the URLs available tokens --list-mechanisms List all available mechanisms in a token --initialize Initializes a PKCS #11 token --initialize-pin Initializes/Resets a PKCS #11 token user PIN --initialize-so-pin Initializes/Resets a PKCS #11 token security officer PIN --set-pin=str Specify the PIN to use on token operations --set-so-pin=str Specify the Security Officer's PIN to use on token initialization Object listing: --list-all List all available objects in a token --list-all-certs List all available certificates in a token --list-certs List all certificates that have an associated private key --list-all-privkeys List all available private keys in a token --list-privkeys an alias for the 'list-all-privkeys' option --list-keys an alias for the 'list-all-privkeys' option --list-all-trusted List all available certificates marked as trusted --export Export the object specified by the URL - prohibits these options: export-stapled export-chain export-pubkey --export-stapled Export the certificate object specified by the URL - prohibits these options: export export-chain export-pubkey --export-chain Export the certificate specified by the URL and its chain of trust - prohibits these options: export-stapled export export-pubkey --export-pubkey Export the public key for a private key - prohibits these options: export-stapled export export-chain --info List information on an available object in a token --trusted an alias for the 'mark-trusted' option --distrusted an alias for the 'mark-distrusted' option Key generation: --generate-privkey=str Generate private-public key pair of given type --bits=num Specify the number of bits for the key generate --curve=str Specify the curve used for EC key generation --sec-param=str Specify the security level Writing objects: --set-id=str Set the CKA_ID (in hex) for the specified by the URL object - prohibits the option 'write' --set-label=str Set the CKA_LABEL for the specified by the URL object - prohibits these options: write set-id --write Writes the loaded objects to a PKCS #11 token --delete Deletes the objects matching the given PKCS #11 URL --label=str Sets a label for the write operation --id=str Sets an ID for the write operation --mark-wrap Marks the generated key to be a wrapping key --mark-trusted Marks the object to be written as trusted - prohibits the option 'mark-distrusted' --mark-distrusted When retrieving objects, it requires the objects to be distrusted - prohibits the option 'mark-trusted' --mark-decrypt Marks the object to be written for decryption --mark-sign Marks the object to be written for signature generation --mark-ca Marks the object to be written as a CA --mark-private Marks the object to be written as private --ca an alias for the 'mark-ca' option --private an alias for the 'mark-private' option --mark-always-authenticate Marks the object to be written as always authenticate --secret-key=str Provide a hex encoded secret key --load-privkey=file Private key file to use - file must pre-exist --load-pubkey=file Public key file to use - file must pre-exist --load-certificate=file Certificate file to use - file must pre-exist Other options: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 --outfile=str Output file --login Force (user) login to token --so-login Force security officer login to token --admin-login an alias for the 'so-login' option --test-sign Tests the signature operation of the provided object --sign-params=str Sign with a specific signature algorithm --hash=str Hash algorithm to use for signing --generate-random=num Generate random data -8, --pkcs8 Use PKCS #8 format for private keys --inder Use DER/RAW format for input --inraw an alias for the 'inder' option --outder Use DER format for output certificates, private keys, and DH parameters --outraw an alias for the 'outder' option --provider=file Specify the PKCS #11 provider library --detailed-url Print detailed URLs --only-urls Print a compact listing using only the URLs --batch Disable all interaction with the tool Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Operands and options may be intermixed. They will be reordered. Program that allows operations on PKCS #11 smart cards and security modules. To use PKCS #11 tokens with GnuTLS the p11-kit configuration files need to be setup. That is create a .module file in /etc/pkcs11/modules with the contents 'module: /path/to/pkcs11.so'. Alternatively the configuration file /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf has to exist and contain a number of lines of the form 'load=/usr/lib/opensc-pkcs11.so'. You can provide the PIN to be used for the PKCS #11 operations with the environment variables GNUTLS_PIN and GNUTLS_SO_PIN. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
Tokens.
This is the “list the urls available tokens” option. This is a more compact version of –list-tokens.
This is the “initializes/resets a pkcs #11 token security officer pin” option. This initializes the security officer’s PIN. When used non-interactively use the GNUTLS_NEW_SO_PIN environment variables to initialize SO’s PIN.
This is the “specify the pin to use on token operations” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Alternatively the GNUTLS_PIN environment variable may be used.
This is the “specify the security officer’s pin to use on token initialization” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Alternatively the GNUTLS_SO_PIN environment variable may be used.
Object listing.
This is the “list all available objects in a token” option. All objects available in the token will be listed. That includes objects which are potentially unaccessible using this tool.
This is the “list all available certificates in a token” option. That option will also provide more information on the certificates, for example, expand the attached extensions in a trust token (like p11-kit-trust).
This is the “list all certificates that have an associated private key” option. That option will only display certificates which have a private key associated with them (share the same ID).
This is the “list all available private keys in a token” option. Lists all the private keys in a token that match the specified URL.
This is an alias for the list-all-privkeys
option,
see the list-all-privkeys option documentation.
This is an alias for the list-all-privkeys
option,
see the list-all-privkeys option documentation.
This is the “export the certificate object specified by the url” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Exports the certificate specified by the URL while including any attached extensions to it. Since attached extensions are a p11-kit extension, this option is only available on p11-kit registered trust modules.
This is the “export the certificate specified by the url and its chain of trust” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Exports the certificate specified by the URL and generates its chain of trust based on the stored certificates in the module.
This is the “export the public key for a private key” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Exports the public key for the specified private key
This is an alias for the mark-trusted
option,
see the mark-trusted option documentation.
This is an alias for the mark-distrusted
option,
see the mark-distrusted option documentation.
Key generation.
This is the “generate private-public key pair of given type” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Generates a private-public key pair in the specified token. Acceptable types are RSA, ECDSA, Ed25519, and DSA. Should be combined with –sec-param or –bits.
This is the “generate an rsa private-public key pair” option. Generates an RSA private-public key pair on the specified token. Should be combined with –sec-param or –bits.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “generate a dsa private-public key pair” option. Generates a DSA private-public key pair on the specified token. Should be combined with –sec-param or –bits.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “generate an ecdsa private-public key pair” option. Generates an ECDSA private-public key pair on the specified token. Should be combined with –curve, –sec-param or –bits.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “specify the number of bits for the key generate” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. For applications which have no key-size restrictions the –sec-param option is recommended, as the sec-param levels will adapt to the acceptable security levels with the new versions of gnutls.
This is the “specify the curve used for ec key generation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Supported values are secp192r1, secp224r1, secp256r1, secp384r1 and secp521r1.
This is the “specify the security level” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Security parameter. This is alternative to the bits option. Available options are [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra].
Writing objects.
This is the “set the cka_id (in hex) for the specified by the url object” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Modifies or sets the CKA_ID in the specified by the URL object. The ID should be specified in hexadecimal format without a ’0x’ prefix.
This is the “set the cka_label for the specified by the url object” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Modifies or sets the CKA_LABEL in the specified by the URL object
This is the “writes the loaded objects to a pkcs #11 token” option. It can be used to write private, public keys, certificates or secret keys to a token. Must be combined with one of –load-privkey, –load-pubkey, –load-certificate option.
When writing a certificate object, its CKA_ID is set to the same CKA_ID of the corresponding public key, if it exists on the token; otherwise it will be derived from the X.509 Subject Key Identifier of the certificate. If this behavior is undesired, write the public key to the token beforehand.
This is the “sets an id for the write operation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Sets the CKA_ID to be set by the write operation. The ID should be specified in hexadecimal format without a ’0x’ prefix.
This is the “marks the generated key to be a wrapping key” option. Marks the generated key with the CKA_WRAP flag.
This is the “marks the object to be written as trusted” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_TRUST flag.
This is the “when retrieving objects, it requires the objects to be distrusted” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Ensures that the objects retrieved have the CKA_X_TRUST flag. This is p11-kit trust module extension, thus this flag is only valid with p11-kit registered trust modules.
This is the “marks the object to be written for decryption” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_DECRYPT flag set to true.
This is the “marks the object to be written for signature generation” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_SIGN flag set to true.
This is the “marks the object to be written as a ca” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_CERTIFICATE_CATEGORY as CA.
This is the “marks the object to be written as private” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_PRIVATE flag. The written object will require a PIN to be used.
This is an alias for the mark-ca
option,
see the mark-ca option documentation.
This is an alias for the mark-private
option,
see the mark-private option documentation.
This is the “marks the object to be written as always authenticate” option. Marks the object to be generated/written with the CKA_ALWAYS_AUTHENTICATE flag. The written object will Mark the object as requiring authentication (pin entry) before every operation.
This is the “provide a hex encoded secret key” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This secret key will be written to the module if –write is specified.
Other options.
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “force security officer login to token” option. Forces login to the token as security officer (admin).
This is an alias for the so-login
option,
see the so-login option documentation.
This is the “tests the signature operation of the provided object” option. It can be used to test the correct operation of the signature operation. If both a private and a public key are available this operation will sign and verify the signed data.
This is the “sign with a specific signature algorithm” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with –test-sign, to sign with a specific signature algorithm variant. The only option supported is ’RSA-PSS’, and should be specified in order to use RSA-PSS signature on RSA keys.
This is the “hash algorithm to use for signing” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option can be combined with test-sign. Available hash functions are SHA1, RMD160, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512, SHA3-224, SHA3-256, SHA3-384, SHA3-512.
This is the “generate random data” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Asks the token to generate a number of bytes of random bytes.
This is the “use der/raw format for input” option. Use DER/RAW format for input certificates and private keys.
This is an alias for the inder
option,
see the inder option documentation.
This is the “use der format for output certificates, private keys, and dh parameters” option. The output will be in DER or RAW format.
This is an alias for the outder
option,
see the outder option documentation.
This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf
This is the “specify parameters for the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This is a PKCS#11 internal option used by few modules. Mainly for testing PKCS#11 modules.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “disable all interaction with the tool” option. In batch mode there will be no prompts, all parameters need to be specified on command line.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
certtool (1)
To view all tokens in your system use:
$ p11tool --list-tokens
To view all objects in a token use:
$ p11tool --login --list-all "pkcs11:TOKEN-URL"
To store a private key and a certificate in a token run:
$ p11tool --login --write "pkcs11:URL" --load-privkey key.pem \ --label "Mykey" $ p11tool --login --write "pkcs11:URL" --load-certificate cert.pem \ --label "Mykey"
Note that some tokens require the same label to be used for the certificate and its corresponding private key.
To generate an RSA private key inside the token use:
$ p11tool --login --generate-privkey rsa --bits 1024 --label "MyNewKey" \ --outfile MyNewKey.pub "pkcs11:TOKEN-URL"
The bits parameter in the above example is explicitly set because some tokens only support limited choices in the bit length. The output file is the corresponding public key. This key can be used to general a certificate request with certtool.
certtool --generate-request --load-privkey "pkcs11:KEY-URL" \ --load-pubkey MyNewKey.pub --outfile request.pem
Previous: Smart cards and HSMs, Up: Hardware security modules and abstract key types [Contents][Index]
In this section we present the Trusted Platform Module (TPM) support in GnuTLS. Note that we recommend against using TPM with this API because it is restricted to TPM 1.2. We recommend instead to use PKCS#11 wrappers for TPM such as CHAPS14 or opencryptoki15. These will allow using the standard smart card and HSM functionality (see Smart cards and HSMs) for TPM keys.
There was a big hype when the TPM chip was introduced into computers. Briefly it is a co-processor in your PC that allows it to perform calculations independently of the main processor. This has good and bad side-effects. In this section we focus on the good ones; these are the fact that you can use the TPM chip to perform cryptographic operations on keys stored in it, without accessing them. That is very similar to the operation of a PKCS #11 smart card. The chip allows for storage and usage of RSA keys, but has quite some operational differences from PKCS #11 module, and thus require different handling. The basic TPM operations supported and used by GnuTLS, are key generation and signing. That support is currently limited to TPM 1.2.
The next sections assume that the TPM chip in the system is already initialized and
in a operational state. If not, ensure that the TPM chip is enabled by your BIOS,
that the tcsd
daemon is running, and that TPM ownership is set
(by running tpm_takeownership
).
In GnuTLS the TPM functionality is available in gnutls/tpm.h
.
• Keys in TPM | ||
• Key generation | ||
• Using keys | ||
• tpmtool Invocation |
Next: Key generation, Up: Trusted Platform Module [Contents][Index]
The RSA keys in the TPM module may either be stored in a flash memory within TPM or stored in a file in disk. In the former case the key can provide operations as with PKCS #11 and is identified by a URL. The URL is described in [TPMURI] and is of the following form.
tpmkey:uuid=42309df8-d101-11e1-a89a-97bb33c23ad1;storage=user
It consists from a unique identifier of the key as well as the part of the flash memory the key is stored at. The two options for the storage field are ‘user’ and ‘system’. The user keys are typically only available to the generating user and the system keys to all users. The stored in TPM keys are called registered keys.
The keys that are stored in the disk are exported from the TPM but in an encrypted form. To access them two passwords are required. The first is the TPM Storage Root Key (SRK), and the other is a key-specific password. Also those keys are identified by a URL of the form:
tpmkey:file=/path/to/file
When objects require a PIN to be accessed the same callbacks as with PKCS #11 objects are expected (see Accessing objects that require a PIN). Note that the PIN function may be called multiple times to unlock the SRK and the specific key in use. The label in the key function will then be set to ‘SRK’ when unlocking the SRK key, or to ‘TPM’ when unlocking any other key.
Next: Using keys, Previous: Keys in TPM, Up: Trusted Platform Module [Contents][Index]
All keys used by the TPM must be generated by the TPM. This can be done using gnutls_tpm_privkey_generate.
pk: the public key algorithm
bits: the security bits
srk_password: a password to protect the exported key (optional)
key_password: the password for the TPM (optional)
format: the format of the private key
pub_format: the format of the public key
privkey: the generated key
pubkey: the corresponding public key (may be null)
flags: should be a list of GNUTLS_TPM_* flags
This function will generate a private key in the TPM
chip. The private key will be generated within the chip
and will be exported in a wrapped with TPM’s master key
form. Furthermore the wrapped key can be protected with
the provided password
.
Note that bits in TPM is quantized value. If the input value is not one of the allowed values, then it will be quantized to one of 512, 1024, 2048, 4096, 8192 and 16384.
Allowed flags are:
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
int gnutls_tpm_get_registered (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t * list)
void gnutls_tpm_key_list_deinit (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list)
int gnutls_tpm_key_list_get_url (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list, unsigned int idx, char ** url, unsigned int flags)
url: the URL describing the key
srk_password: a password for the SRK key
This function will unregister the private key from the TPM chip.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
Next: tpmtool Invocation, Previous: Key generation, Up: Trusted Platform Module [Contents][Index]
The TPM keys can be used directly by the abstract key types and do not require any special structures. Moreover functions like gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 can access TPM URLs.
int gnutls_privkey_import_tpm_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * fdata, gnutls_tpmkey_fmt_t format, const char * srk_password, const char * key_password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_tpm_raw (gnutls_pubkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * fdata, gnutls_tpmkey_fmt_t format, const char * srk_password, unsigned int flags)
pkey: The private key
url: The URL of the TPM key to be imported
srk_password: The password for the SRK key (optional)
key_password: A password for the key (optional)
flags: One of the GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_* flags
This function will import the given private key to the abstract
gnutls_privkey_t
type.
Note that unless GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_DISABLE_CALLBACKS
is specified, if incorrect (or NULL) passwords are given
the PKCS11 callback functions will be used to obtain the
correct passwords. Otherwise if the SRK password is wrong
GNUTLS_E_TPM_SRK_PASSWORD_ERROR
is returned and if the key password
is wrong or not provided then GNUTLS_E_TPM_KEY_PASSWORD_ERROR
is returned.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
pkey: The public key
url: The URL of the TPM key to be imported
srk_password: The password for the SRK key (optional)
flags: should be zero
This function will import the given private key to the abstract
gnutls_privkey_t
type.
Note that unless GNUTLS_PUBKEY_DISABLE_CALLBACKS
is specified, if incorrect (or NULL) passwords are given
the PKCS11 callback functions will be used to obtain the
correct passwords. Otherwise if the SRK password is wrong
GNUTLS_E_TPM_SRK_PASSWORD_ERROR
is returned.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
The registered keys (that are stored in the TPM) can be listed using one of the following functions. Those keys are unfortunately only identified by their UUID and have no label or other human friendly identifier. Keys can be deleted from permanent storage using gnutls_tpm_privkey_delete.
int gnutls_tpm_get_registered (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t * list)
void gnutls_tpm_key_list_deinit (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list)
int gnutls_tpm_key_list_get_url (gnutls_tpm_key_list_t list, unsigned int idx, char ** url, unsigned int flags)
url: the URL describing the key
srk_password: a password for the SRK key
This function will unregister the private key from the TPM chip.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.1.0
Previous: Using keys, Up: Trusted Platform Module [Contents][Index]
Program that allows handling cryptographic data from the TPM chip.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
tpmtool - GnuTLS TPM tool Usage: tpmtool [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 --infile=file Input file - file must pre-exist --outfile=str Output file --generate-rsa Generate an RSA private-public key pair --register Any generated key will be registered in the TPM - requires the option 'generate-rsa' --signing Any generated key will be a signing key - prohibits the option 'legacy' - requires the option 'generate-rsa' --legacy Any generated key will be a legacy key - prohibits the option 'signing' - requires the option 'generate-rsa' --user Any registered key will be a user key - prohibits the option 'system' - requires the option 'register' --system Any registered key will be a system key - prohibits the option 'user' - requires the option 'register' --pubkey=str Prints the public key of the provided key --list Lists all stored keys in the TPM --delete=str Delete the key identified by the given URL (UUID) --test-sign=str Tests the signature operation of the provided object --sec-param=str Specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra] --bits=num Specify the number of bits for key generate --inder Use the DER format for keys --outder Use DER format for output keys --srk-well-known SRK has well known password (20 bytes of zeros) Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Program that allows handling cryptographic data from the TPM chip. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “generate an rsa private-public key pair” option. Generates an RSA private-public key pair in the TPM chip. The key may be stored in file system and protected by a PIN, or stored (registered) in the TPM chip flash.
This is the “any registered key will be a user key” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
The generated key will be stored in a user specific persistent storage.
This is the “any registered key will be a system key” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
The generated key will be stored in system persistent storage.
This is the “tests the signature operation of the provided object” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument url. It can be used to test the correct operation of the signature operation. This operation will sign and verify the signed data.
This is the “specify the security level [low, legacy, medium, high, ultra]” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument Security parameter. This is alternative to the bits option. Note however that the values allowed by the TPM chip are quantized and given values may be rounded up.
This is the “use the der format for keys” option. The input files will be assumed to be in the portable DER format of TPM. The default format is a custom format used by various TPM tools
This is the “use der format for output keys” option. The output will be in the TPM portable DER format.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
p11tool (1), certtool (1)
To generate a key that is to be stored in file system use:
$ tpmtool --generate-rsa --bits 2048 --outfile tpmkey.pem
To generate a key that is to be stored in TPM’s flash use:
$ tpmtool --generate-rsa --bits 2048 --register --user
To get the public key of a TPM key use:
$ tpmtool --pubkey tpmkey:uuid=58ad734b-bde6-45c7-89d8-756a55ad1891;storage=user \ --outfile pubkey.pem
or if the key is stored in the file system:
$ tpmtool --pubkey tpmkey:file=tmpkey.pem --outfile pubkey.pem
To list all keys stored in TPM use:
$ tpmtool --list
Next: GnuTLS application examples, Previous: Hardware security modules and abstract key types, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Next: Preparation, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
This chapter tries to explain the basic functionality of the current GnuTLS library. Note that there may be additional functionality not discussed here but included in the library. Checking the header files in /usr/include/gnutls/ and the manpages is recommended.
• General idea | ||
• Error handling | ||
• Common types | ||
• Debugging and auditing | ||
• Thread safety | ||
• Running in a sandbox | ||
• Sessions and fork | ||
• Callback functions |
Next: Error handling, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
A brief description of how GnuTLS sessions operate is shown at Figure 6.1. This section will become more clear when it is completely read. As shown in the figure, there is a read-only global state that is initialized once by the global initialization function. This global structure, among others, contains the memory allocation functions used, structures needed for the ASN.1 parser and depending on the system’s CPU, pointers to hardware accelerated encryption functions. This structure is never modified by any GnuTLS function, except for the deinitialization function which frees all allocated memory and must be called after the program has permanently finished using GnuTLS.
The credentials structures are used by the authentication methods, such as certificate authentication. They store certificates, privates keys, and other information that is needed to prove the identity to the peer, and/or verify the identity of the peer. The information stored in the credentials structures is initialized once and then can be shared by many TLS sessions.
A GnuTLS session contains all the required state and information to handle one secure connection. The session communicates with the peers using the provided functions of the transport layer. Every session has a unique session ID shared with the peer.
Since TLS sessions can be resumed, servers need a database back-end to hold the session’s parameters. Every GnuTLS session after a successful handshake calls the appropriate back-end function (see resume) to store the newly negotiated session. The session database is examined by the server just after having received the client hello16, and if the session ID sent by the client, matches a stored session, the stored session will be retrieved, and the new session will be a resumed one, and will share the same session ID with the previous one.
Next: Common types, Previous: General idea, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
There two types of GnuTLS functions. The first type returns a boolean value, true (non-zero) or false (zero) value; these functions are defined to return an unsigned integer type. The other type returns a signed integer type with zero (or a positive number) indicating success and a negative value indicating failure. For the latter type it is recommended to check for errors as following.
ret = gnutls_function(); if (ret < 0) { return -1; }
The above example checks for a failure condition rather than for explicit success (e.g., equality to zero). That has the advantage that future extensions of the API can be extended to provide additional information via positive returned values (see for example gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file).
In GnuTLS, many objects are represented as opaque types that
are initialized by passing an address to storage of that type to a
pointer parameter of a function name gnutls_obj_init
, and
which have a counterpart function gnutls_obj_deinit
. It
is safe, but not mandatory, to pre-initialize the opaque storage to
contain all zeroes (such as by using calloc()
or
memset()
). If the initializer succeeds, the storage must be
passed to the counterpart deinitializer when the object is no longer
in use to avoid memory leaks. As of version 3.8.0, if the initializer
function fails, it is safe, but not mandatory, to call the counterpart
deinitializer, regardless of whether the storage was pre-initialized.
However, this was not guaranteed in earlier versions; for maximum
portability to older library versions, callers should either
pre-initialize the storage to zero before initialization or refrain
from calling the deinitializer if the initializer fails.
For certain operations such as TLS handshake and TLS packet receive
there is the notion of fatal and non-fatal error codes.
Fatal errors terminate the TLS session immediately and further sends
and receives will be disallowed. Such an example is
GNUTLS_E_DECRYPTION_FAILED
. Non-fatal errors may warn about
something, i.e., a warning alert was received, or indicate the some
action has to be taken. This is the case with the error code
GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
returned by gnutls_record_recv.
This error code indicates that the server requests a re-handshake. The
client may ignore this request, or may reply with an alert. You can
test if an error code is a fatal one by using the
gnutls_error_is_fatal.
All errors can be converted to a descriptive string using gnutls_strerror.
If any non fatal errors, that require an action, are to be returned by
a function, these error codes will be documented in the function’s
reference. For example the error codes GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED
and GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED
that may returned when receiving data, should be handled by notifying the
user of the alert (as explained in Handling alerts).
See Error codes, for a description of the available error codes.
Next: Debugging and auditing, Previous: Error handling, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
All strings that are to provided as input to GnuTLS functions should be in UTF-8 unless otherwise specified. Output strings are also in UTF-8 format unless otherwise specified. When functions take as input passwords, they will normalize them using [RFC7613] rules (since GnuTLS 3.5.7).
When data of a fixed size are provided to GnuTLS functions then
the helper structure gnutls_datum_t
is often used. Its definition is
shown below.
typedef struct { unsigned char *data; unsigned int size; } gnutls_datum_t;
In functions where this structure is a returned type, if the function succeeds,
it is expected from the caller to use gnutls_free()
to deinitialize the
data element after use, unless otherwise specified. If the function fails, the
contents of the gnutls_datum_t
should be considered undefined and must
not be deinitialized.
Other functions that require data for scattered read use a structure similar
to struct iovec
typically used by readv
. It is shown
below.
typedef struct { void *iov_base; /* Starting address */ size_t iov_len; /* Number of bytes to transfer */ } giovec_t;
Next: Thread safety, Previous: Common types, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
In many cases things may not go as expected and further information, to assist debugging, from GnuTLS is desired. Those are the cases where the gnutls_global_set_log_level and gnutls_global_set_log_function are to be used. Those will print verbose information on the GnuTLS functions internal flow.
void gnutls_global_set_log_level (int level)
void gnutls_global_set_log_function (gnutls_log_func log_func)
Alternatively the environment variable GNUTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL
can be
set to a logging level and GnuTLS will output debugging output to standard
error. Other available environment variables are shown in Table 6.1.
Variable | Purpose |
---|---|
GNUTLS_DEBUG_LEVEL | When set to a numeric value, it sets the default debugging level for GnuTLS applications. |
SSLKEYLOGFILE | When set to a filename, GnuTLS will append to it the session keys in the NSS Key Log format. That format can be read by wireshark and will allow decryption of the session for debugging. |
GNUTLS_CPUID_OVERRIDE | That environment variable can be used to
explicitly enable/disable the use of certain CPU capabilities. Note that CPU
detection cannot be overridden, i.e., VIA options cannot be enabled on an Intel
CPU. The currently available options are:
|
GNUTLS_FORCE_FIPS_MODE | In setups where GnuTLS is compiled with support for FIPS140-2 (see FIPS140-2 mode) if set to one it will force the FIPS mode enablement. |
When debugging is not required, important issues, such as detected attacks on the protocol still need to be logged. This is provided by the logging function set by gnutls_global_set_audit_log_function. The provided function will receive an message and the corresponding TLS session. The session information might be used to derive IP addresses or other information about the peer involved.
log_func: it is the audit log function
This is the function to set the audit logging function. This
is a function to report important issues, such as possible
attacks in the protocol. This is different from gnutls_global_set_log_function()
because it will report also session-specific events. The session
parameter will be null if there is no corresponding TLS session.
gnutls_audit_log_func
is of the form,
void (*gnutls_audit_log_func)( gnutls_session_t, const char*);
Since: 3.0
Next: Running in a sandbox, Previous: Debugging and auditing, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
The GnuTLS library is thread safe by design, meaning that objects of the library such as TLS sessions, can be safely divided across threads as long as a single thread accesses a single object. This is sufficient to support a server which handles several sessions per thread. Read-only access to objects, for example the credentials holding structures, is also thread-safe.
A gnutls_session_t
object could also be shared by two threads, one sending,
the other receiving. However, care must be taken on the following use cases:
GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH
cannot be used safely in this mode of operation.
GNUTLS_SHUT_WR
and the receiving thread waiting for a return value of zero (or timeout on
certain servers which do not respond).
For several aspects of the library (e.g., the random generator, PKCS#11 operations), the library may utilize mutex locks (e.g., pthreads on GNU/Linux and CriticalSection on Windows) which are transparently setup on library initialization. Prior to version 3.3.0 these were setup by explicitly calling gnutls_global_init.17
Note that, on Glibc systems, unless the application is explicitly linked with the libpthread library, no mutex locks are used and setup by GnuTLS. It will use the Glibc mutex stubs.
Next: Sessions and fork, Previous: Thread safety, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
Given that TLS protocol handling as well as X.509 certificate parsing are complicated processes involving several thousands lines of code, it is often desirable (and recommended) to run the TLS session handling in a sandbox like seccomp. That has to be allowed by the overall software design, but if available, it adds an additional layer of protection by preventing parsing errors from becoming vessels for further security issues such as code execution.
GnuTLS requires the following system calls to be available for its proper operation.
As well as any calls needed for memory allocation to work. Note however, that GnuTLS depends on libc for the system calls, and there is no guarantee that libc will call the expected system call. For that it is recommended to test your program in all the targeted platforms when filters like seccomp are in place.
An example with a seccomp filter from GnuTLS’ test suite is at: https://gitlab.com/gnutls/gnutls/blob/master/tests/seccomp.c.
Next: Callback functions, Previous: Running in a sandbox, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
A gnutls_session_t
object can be shared by two processes after a fork,
one sending, the other receiving. In that case rehandshakes,
cannot and must not be performed. As with threads, the termination of a session should be
handled by the sender process using gnutls_bye with GNUTLS_SHUT_WR
and the receiving process waiting for a return value of zero.
Previous: Sessions and fork, Up: Introduction to the library [Contents][Index]
There are several cases where GnuTLS may need out of band input from your program. This is now implemented using some callback functions, which your program is expected to register.
An example of this type of functions are the push and pull callbacks which are used to specify the functions that will retrieve and send data to the transport layer.
void gnutls_transport_set_push_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_push_func push_func)
void gnutls_transport_set_pull_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_pull_func pull_func)
Other callback functions may require more complicated input and data
to be allocated. Such an example is
gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_function.
All callbacks should allocate and free memory using
gnutls_malloc
and gnutls_free
.
Next: Session initialization, Previous: Introduction to the library, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
To use GnuTLS, you have to perform some changes to your sources and your build system. The necessary changes are explained in the following subsections.
• Headers | ||
• Initialization | ||
• Version check | ||
• Building the source |
Next: Initialization, Up: Preparation [Contents][Index]
All the data types and functions of the GnuTLS library are defined in the header file gnutls/gnutls.h. This must be included in all programs that make use of the GnuTLS library.
Next: Version check, Previous: Headers, Up: Preparation [Contents][Index]
The GnuTLS library is initialized on load; prior to 3.3.0 was initialized by calling gnutls_global_init18. gnutls_global_init in versions after 3.3.0 is thread-safe (see Thread safety).
The initialization typically enables CPU-specific acceleration, performs any required precalculations needed, opens any required system devices (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux) and initializes subsystems that could be used later.
The resources allocated by the initialization process will be released on library deinitialization.
Note that on certain systems file descriptors may be kept open by GnuTLS (e.g. /dev/urandom) on library load. Applications closing all unknown file descriptors must immediately call gnutls_global_init, after that, to ensure they don’t disrupt GnuTLS’ operation.
Next: Building the source, Previous: Initialization, Up: Preparation [Contents][Index]
It is often desirable to check that the version of ‘gnutls’ used is indeed one which fits all requirements. Even with binary compatibility new features may have been introduced but due to problem with the dynamic linker an old version is actually used. So you may want to check that the version is okay right after program start-up. See the function gnutls_check_version.
On the other hand, it is often desirable to support more than one
versions of the library. In that case you could utilize compile-time
feature checks using the GNUTLS_VERSION_NUMBER
macro.
For example, to conditionally add code for GnuTLS 3.2.1 or later, you may use:
#if GNUTLS_VERSION_NUMBER >= 0x030201 ... #endif
Previous: Version check, Up: Preparation [Contents][Index]
If you want to compile a source file including the gnutls/gnutls.h header file, you must make sure that the compiler can find it in the directory hierarchy. This is accomplished by adding the path to the directory in which the header file is located to the compilers include file search path (via the -I option).
However, the path to the include file is determined at the time the
source is configured. To solve this problem, the library uses the
external package pkg-config
that knows the path to the
include file and other configuration options. The options that need
to be added to the compiler invocation at compile time are output by
the --cflags option to pkg-config gnutls
. The
following example shows how it can be used at the command line:
gcc -c foo.c `pkg-config gnutls --cflags`
Adding the output of ‘pkg-config gnutls --cflags’ to the compilers command line will ensure that the compiler can find the gnutls/gnutls.h header file.
A similar problem occurs when linking the program with the library.
Again, the compiler has to find the library files. For this to work,
the path to the library files has to be added to the library search
path (via the -L option). For this, the option
--libs to pkg-config gnutls
can be used. For
convenience, this option also outputs all other options that are
required to link the program with the library (for instance, the
‘-ltasn1’ option). The example shows how to link foo.o
with the library to a program foo
.
gcc -o foo foo.o `pkg-config gnutls --libs`
Of course you can also combine both examples to a single command by
specifying both options to pkg-config
:
gcc -o foo foo.c `pkg-config gnutls --cflags --libs`
When a program uses the GNU autoconf system, then the following line or similar can be used to detect the presence of GnuTLS.
PKG_CHECK_MODULES([LIBGNUTLS], [gnutls >= 3.3.0]) AC_SUBST([LIBGNUTLS_CFLAGS]) AC_SUBST([LIBGNUTLS_LIBS])
Next: Associating the credentials, Previous: Preparation, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
In the previous sections we have discussed the global initialization required for GnuTLS as well as the initialization required for each authentication method’s credentials (see Authentication). In this section we elaborate on the TLS or DTLS session initiation. Each session is initialized using gnutls_init which among others is used to specify the type of the connection (server or client), and the underlying protocol type, i.e., datagram (UDP) or reliable (TCP).
session: is a pointer to a gnutls_session_t
type.
flags: indicate if this session is to be used for server or client.
This function initializes the provided session. Every session must
be initialized before use, and after successful initialization and
use must be deinitialized by calling gnutls_deinit()
.
flags
can be any combination of flags from gnutls_init_flags_t
.
Note that since version 3.1.2 this function enables some common
TLS extensions such as session tickets and OCSP certificate status
request in client side by default. To prevent that use the GNUTLS_NO_DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS
flag.
Note that it is never mandatory to use gnutls_deinit()
after this
function fails. Since gnutls 3.8.0, it is safe to unconditionally
use gnutls_deinit()
even after failure regardless of whether the
memory was initialized prior to gnutls_init()
; however, clients
wanting to be portable to older versions of the library should
either skip deinitialization on failure, or pre-initialize the
memory passed in to gnutls_init()
to all zeroes via memset()
or
similar.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, or an error code.
GNUTLS_SERVER
Connection end is a server.
GNUTLS_CLIENT
Connection end is a client.
GNUTLS_DATAGRAM
Connection is datagram oriented (DTLS). Since 3.0.0.
GNUTLS_NONBLOCK
Connection should not block. Since 3.0.0.
GNUTLS_NO_DEFAULT_EXTENSIONS
Do not enable any TLS extensions by default such as session tickets and OCSP certificate status request (since 3.1.2). As TLS 1.2 and later require extensions this option is considered obsolete and should not be used.
GNUTLS_NO_REPLAY_PROTECTION
Disable any replay protection in DTLS. This must only be used if replay protection is achieved using other means. Since 3.2.2.
GNUTLS_NO_SIGNAL
In systems where SIGPIPE is delivered on send, it will be disabled. That flag has effect in systems which support the MSG_NOSIGNAL sockets flag (since 3.4.2).
GNUTLS_ALLOW_ID_CHANGE
Allow the peer to replace its certificate, or change its ID during a rehandshake. This change is often used in attacks and thus prohibited by default. Since 3.5.0.
GNUTLS_ENABLE_FALSE_START
Enable the TLS false start on client side if the negotiated ciphersuites allow it. This will enable sending data prior to the handshake being complete, and may introduce a risk of crypto failure when combined with certain key exchanged; for that GnuTLS may not enable that option in ciphersuites that are known to be not safe for false start. Since 3.5.0.
GNUTLS_FORCE_CLIENT_CERT
When in client side and only a single cert is specified, send that certificate irrespective of the issuers expected by the server. Since 3.5.0.
GNUTLS_NO_TICKETS
Flag to indicate that the session should not use resumption with session tickets.
GNUTLS_KEY_SHARE_TOP
Generate key share for the first group which is enabled. For example x25519. This option is the most performant for client (less CPU spent generating keys), but if the server doesn’t support the advertised option it may result to more roundtrips needed to discover the server’s choice.
GNUTLS_KEY_SHARE_TOP2
Generate key shares for the top-2 different groups which are enabled. For example (ECDH + x25519). This is the default.
GNUTLS_KEY_SHARE_TOP3
Generate key shares for the top-3 different groups which are enabled.
That is, as each group is associated with a key type (EC, finite field, x25519), generate
three keys using GNUTLS_PK_DH
, GNUTLS_PK_EC
, GNUTLS_PK_ECDH_X25519
if all of them are enabled.
GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH
Enable post handshake authentication for server and client. When set and
a server requests authentication after handshake GNUTLS_E_REAUTH_REQUEST
will be returned
by gnutls_record_recv()
. A client should then call gnutls_reauth()
to re-authenticate.
GNUTLS_NO_AUTO_REKEY
Disable auto-rekeying under TLS1.3. If this option is not specified gnutls will force a rekey after 2^24 records have been sent.
GNUTLS_SAFE_PADDING_CHECK
Flag to indicate that the TLS 1.3 padding check will be done in a safe way which doesn’t leak the pad size based on GnuTLS processing time. This is of use to applications which hide the length of transferred data via the TLS1.3 padding mechanism and are already taking steps to hide the data processing time. This comes at a performance penalty.
GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_START
Under TLS1.3 allow the server to return earlier than the full handshake finish; similarly to false start the handshake will be completed once data are received by the client, while the server is able to transmit sooner. This is not enabled by default as it could break certain existing server assumptions and use-cases. Since 3.6.4.
GNUTLS_ENABLE_RAWPK
Allows raw public-keys to be negotiated during the handshake. Since 3.6.6.
GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH
Enable transparent re-authentication in client side when the server
requests to. That is, reauthentication is handled within gnutls_record_recv()
, and
the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
or GNUTLS_E_REAUTH_REQUEST
are not returned. This must be
enabled with GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH
for TLS1.3. Enabling this flag requires to restore
interrupted calls to gnutls_record_recv()
based on the output of gnutls_record_get_direction()
,
since gnutls_record_recv()
could be interrupted when sending when this flag is enabled.
Note this flag may not be used if you are using the same session for sending and receiving
in different threads.
GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_DATA
Under TLS1.3 allow the server to receive early data sent as part of the initial ClientHello (0-RTT). This can also be used to explicitly indicate that the client will send early data. This is not enabled by default as early data has weaker security properties than other data. Since 3.6.5.
GNUTLS_NO_AUTO_SEND_TICKET
Under TLS1.3 disable auto-sending of session tickets during the handshake.
GNUTLS_NO_END_OF_EARLY_DATA
Under TLS1.3 suppress sending EndOfEarlyData message. Since 3.7.2.
GNUTLS_NO_TICKETS_TLS12
Flag to indicate that the session should not use resumption with session tickets. This flag only has effect if TLS 1.2 is used.
GNUTLS_NO_STATUS_REQUEST
Prevents client from including the "status_request" TLS extension in the client hello, thus disabling the receival of certificate status information. Since 3.8.0.
After the session initialization details on the allowed ciphersuites and protocol versions should be set using the priority functions such as gnutls_priority_set and gnutls_priority_set_direct. We elaborate on them in Priority Strings. The credentials used for the key exchange method, such as certificates or usernames and passwords should also be associated with the session current session using gnutls_credentials_set.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
type: is the type of the credentials
cred: the credentials to set
Sets the needed credentials for the specified type. E.g. username,
password - or public and private keys etc. The cred
parameter is
a structure that depends on the specified type and on the current
session (client or server).
In order to minimize memory usage, and share credentials between
several threads gnutls keeps a pointer to cred, and not the whole
cred structure. Thus you will have to keep the structure allocated
until you call gnutls_deinit()
.
For GNUTLS_CRD_ANON
, cred
should be
gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t
in case of a client. In case of
a server it should be gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t
.
For GNUTLS_CRD_SRP
, cred
should be gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t
in case of a client, and gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t
, in case
of a server.
For GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE
, cred
should be
gnutls_certificate_credentials_t
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned,
otherwise a negative error code is returned.
Next: Setting up the transport layer, Previous: Session initialization, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
• Certificate credentials | ||
• Raw public-key credentials | ||
• SRP credentials | ||
• PSK credentials | ||
• Anonymous credentials |
Each authentication method is associated with a key exchange method, and a credentials type. The contents of the credentials is method-dependent, e.g. certificates for certificate authentication and should be initialized and associated with a session (see gnutls_credentials_set). A mapping of the key exchange methods with the credential types is shown in Table 6.2.
Authentication method | Key exchange | Client credentials | Server credentials |
---|---|---|---|
Certificate and Raw public-key | KX_RSA ,
KX_DHE_RSA ,
KX_DHE_DSS ,
KX_ECDHE_RSA ,
KX_ECDHE_ECDSA | CRD_CERTIFICATE | CRD_CERTIFICATE |
Password and certificate | KX_SRP_RSA , KX_SRP_DSS | CRD_SRP | CRD_CERTIFICATE , CRD_SRP |
Password | KX_SRP | CRD_SRP | CRD_SRP |
Anonymous | KX_ANON_DH ,
KX_ANON_ECDH | CRD_ANON | CRD_ANON |
Pre-shared key | KX_PSK ,
KX_DHE_PSK , KX_ECDHE_PSK | CRD_PSK | CRD_PSK |
Next: Raw public-key credentials, Up: Associating the credentials [Contents][Index]
When using certificates the server is required to have at least one certificate and private key pair. Clients may not hold such a pair, but a server could require it. In this section we discuss general issues applying to both client and server certificates. The next section will elaborate on issues arising from client authentication only.
In order to use certificate credentials one must first initialize a credentials
structure of type gnutls_certificate_credentials_t
. After use this structure must
be freed. This can be done with the following functions.
int gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t * res)
void gnutls_certificate_free_credentials (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t sc)
After the credentials structures are initialized, the certificate and key pair must be loaded. This occurs before any TLS session is initialized, and the same structures are reused for multiple sessions. Depending on the certificate type different loading functions are available, as shown below. For X.509 certificates, the functions will accept and use a certificate chain that leads to a trusted authority. The certificate chain must be ordered in such way that every certificate certifies the one before it. The trusted authority’s certificate need not to be included since the peer should possess it already.
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * certfile, const char * keyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_mem2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const gnutls_datum_t * cert, const gnutls_datum_t * key, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * pass, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, gnutls_x509_crt_t * cert_list, int cert_list_size, gnutls_x509_privkey_t key)
It is recommended to use the higher level functions such as gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file2 which accept not only file names but URLs that specify objects stored in token, or system certificates and keys (see Application-specific keys). For these cases, another important function is gnutls_certificate_set_pin_function, that allows setting a callback function to retrieve a PIN if the input keys are protected by PIN.
cred: is a gnutls_certificate_credentials_t
type.
fn: A PIN callback
userdata: Data to be passed in the callback
This function will set a callback function to be used when required to access a protected object. This function overrides any other global PIN functions.
Note that this function must be called right after initialization to have effect.
Since: 3.1.0
If the imported keys and certificates need to be accessed before any TLS session is established, it is convenient to use gnutls_certificate_set_key in combination with gnutls_pcert_import_x509_raw and gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw.
res: is a gnutls_certificate_credentials_t
type.
names: is an array of DNS names belonging to the public-key (NULL if none)
names_size: holds the size of the names list
pcert_list: contains a certificate list (chain) or raw public-key
pcert_list_size: holds the size of the certificate list
key: is a gnutls_privkey_t
key corresponding to the first public-key in pcert_list
This function sets a public/private key pair in the
gnutls_certificate_credentials_t type. The given public key may be encapsulated
in a certificate or can be given as a raw key. This function may be
called more than once, in case multiple key pairs exist for
the server. For clients that want to send more than their own end-
entity certificate (e.g., also an intermediate CA cert), the full
certificate chain must be provided in pcert_list
.
Note that the key
will become part of the credentials structure and must
not be deallocated. It will be automatically deallocated when the res
structure
is deinitialized.
If this function fails, the res
structure is at an undefined state and it must
not be reused to load other keys or certificates.
Note that, this function by default returns zero on success and a negative value on error.
Since 3.5.6, when the flag GNUTLS_CERTIFICATE_API_V2
is set using gnutls_certificate_set_flags()
it returns an index (greater or equal to zero). That index can be used for other functions to refer to the added key-pair.
Since GnuTLS 3.6.6 this function also handles raw public keys.
Returns: On success this functions returns zero, and otherwise a negative value on error (see above for modifying that behavior).
Since: 3.0
If multiple certificates are used with the functions above each client’s request will be served with the certificate that matches the requested name (see Server name indication).
As an alternative to loading from files or buffers, a callback may be used for the server or the client to specify the certificate and the key at the handshake time. In that case a certificate should be selected according the peer’s signature algorithm preferences. To get those preferences use gnutls_sign_algorithm_get_requested. Both functions are shown below.
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function * func)
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function2 * func)
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function3 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function3 * func)
int gnutls_sign_algorithm_get_requested (gnutls_session_t session, size_t indx, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t * algo)
The functions above do not handle the requested server name automatically.
A server would need to check the name requested by the client
using gnutls_server_name_get, and serve the appropriate
certificate. Note that some of these functions require the gnutls_pcert_st
structure to be
filled in. Helper functions to fill in the structure are listed below.
typedef struct gnutls_pcert_st { gnutls_pubkey_t pubkey; gnutls_datum_t cert; gnutls_certificate_type_t type; } gnutls_pcert_st;
int gnutls_pcert_import_x509 (gnutls_pcert_st * pcert, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pcert_import_x509_raw (gnutls_pcert_st * pcert, const gnutls_datum_t * cert, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, unsigned int flags)
void gnutls_pcert_deinit (gnutls_pcert_st * pcert)
In a handshake, the negotiated cipher suite depends on the
certificate’s parameters, so some key exchange methods might not be
available with all certificates. GnuTLS will disable
ciphersuites that are not compatible with the key, or the enabled
authentication methods. For example keys marked as sign-only, will
not be able to access the plain RSA ciphersuites, that require
decryption. It is not recommended to use RSA keys for both
signing and encryption. If possible use a different key for the
DHE-RSA
which uses signing and RSA
that requires decryption.
All the key exchange methods shown in Table 4.1 are
available in certificate authentication.
If a certificate is to be requested from the client during the handshake, the server will send a certificate request message. This behavior is controlled by gnutls_certificate_server_set_request. The request contains a list of the by the server accepted certificate signers. This list is constructed using the trusted certificate authorities of the server. In cases where the server supports a large number of certificate authorities it makes sense not to advertise all of the names to save bandwidth. That can be controlled using the function gnutls_certificate_send_x509_rdn_sequence. This however will have the side-effect of not restricting the client to certificates signed by server’s acceptable signers.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
req: is one of GNUTLS_CERT_REQUEST, GNUTLS_CERT_REQUIRE, GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE
This function specifies if we (in case of a server) are going to
send a certificate request message to the client. If req
is
GNUTLS_CERT_REQUIRE then the server will return the GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND
error if the peer does not provide a certificate. If you do not call this
function then the client will not be asked to send a certificate. Invoking
the function with req
GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE has the same effect.
session: a gnutls_session_t
type.
status: is 0 or 1
If status is non zero, this function will order gnutls not to send the rdnSequence in the certificate request message. That is the server will not advertise its trusted CAs to the peer. If status is zero then the default behaviour will take effect, which is to advertise the server’s trusted CAs.
This function has no effect in clients, and in authentication methods other than certificate with X.509 certificates.
On the client side, it needs to set its certificates on the credentials structure, similarly to server side from a file, or via a callback. Once the certificates are available in the credentials structure, the client will send them if during the handshake the server requests a certificate signed by the issuer of its CA.
In the case a single certificate is available and the server does not
specify a signer’s list, then that certificate is always sent. It is,
however possible, to send a certificate even when the advertised CA
list by the server contains CAs other than its signer. That can be achieved
using the GNUTLS_FORCE_CLIENT_CERT
flag in gnutls_init.
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * certfile, const char * keyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_simple_pkcs12_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char * pkcs12file, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type, const char * password)
void gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function2 (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_retrieve_function2 * func)
Certificate verification is possible by loading the trusted authorities into the credentials structure by using the following functions, applicable to X.509 certificates. In modern systems it is recommended to utilize gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust which will load the trusted authorities from the system store.
cred: is a gnutls_certificate_credentials_t
type.
This function adds the system’s default trusted CAs in order to verify client or server certificates.
In the case the system is currently unsupported GNUTLS_E_UNIMPLEMENTED_FEATURE
is returned.
Returns: the number of certificates processed or a negative error code on error.
Since: 3.0.20
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * cafile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
int gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_dir (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * ca_dir, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t type)
The peer’s certificate will be automatically verified if gnutls_session_set_verify_cert is called prior to handshake.
Alternatively, one must set a callback function during the handshake using gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function, which will verify the peer’s certificate once received. The verification should happen using gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 within the callback. It will verify the certificate’s signature and the owner of the certificate. That will provide a brief verification output. If a detailed output is required one should call gnutls_certificate_get_peers to obtain the raw certificate of the peer and verify it using the functions discussed in X.509 certificates.
In both the automatic and the manual cases, the verification status returned can be printed using gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print.
session: is a gnutls session
hostname: is the expected name of the peer; may be NULL
flags: flags for certificate verification – gnutls_certificate_verify_flags
This function instructs GnuTLS to verify the peer’s certificate
using the provided hostname. If the verification fails the handshake
will also fail with GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_ERROR
. In that
case the verification result can be obtained using gnutls_session_get_verify_cert_status()
.
The hostname
pointer provided must remain valid for the lifetime
of the session. More precisely it should be available during any subsequent
handshakes. If no hostname is provided, no hostname verification
will be performed. For a more advanced verification function check
gnutls_session_set_verify_cert2()
.
If flags
is provided which contain a profile, this function should be
called after any session priority setting functions.
The gnutls_session_set_verify_cert()
function is intended to be used by TLS
clients to verify the server’s certificate.
Since: 3.4.6
int gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned int * status)
void gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, gnutls_certificate_verify_function * func)
Note that when using raw public-keys verification will not work because there is no corresponding certificate body belonging to the raw key that can be verified. In that case the gnutls_certificate_verify_peers family of functions will return a GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST error code. For authenticating raw public-keys one must use an out-of-band mechanism, e.g. by comparing hashes or using trust on first use (see Verifying a certificate using trust on first use authentication).
Next: SRP credentials, Previous: Certificate credentials, Up: Associating the credentials [Contents][Index]
As of version 3.6.6 GnuTLS supports Raw public-keys. With raw public-keys only the public-key part (that is normally embedded in a certificate) is transmitted to the peer. In order to load a raw public-key and its corresponding private key in a credentials structure one can use the following functions.
int gnutls_certificate_set_key (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, const char ** names, int names_size, gnutls_pcert_st * pcert_list, int pcert_list_size, gnutls_privkey_t key)
int gnutls_certificate_set_rawpk_key_mem (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const gnutls_datum_t * spki, const gnutls_datum_t * pkey, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * pass, unsigned int key_usage, const char ** names, unsigned int names_length, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_certificate_set_rawpk_key_file (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cred, const char * rawpkfile, const char * privkeyfile, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * pass, unsigned int key_usage, const char ** names, unsigned int names_length, unsigned int privkey_flags, unsigned int pkcs11_flags)
Next: PSK credentials, Previous: Raw public-key credentials, Up: Associating the credentials [Contents][Index]
The initialization functions in SRP credentials differ between client and server. Clients supporting SRP should set the username and password prior to connection, to the credentials structure. Alternatively gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials_function may be used instead, to specify a callback function that should return the SRP username and password. The callback is called once during the TLS handshake.
int gnutls_srp_allocate_server_credentials (gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t * sc)
int gnutls_srp_allocate_client_credentials (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t * sc)
void gnutls_srp_free_server_credentials (gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t sc)
void gnutls_srp_free_client_credentials (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t sc)
int gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials (gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t res, const char * username, const char * password)
cred: is a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t
type.
func: is the callback function
This function can be used to set a callback to retrieve the username and password for client SRP authentication. The callback’s function form is:
int (*callback)(gnutls_session_t, char** username, char**password);
The username
and password
must be allocated using
gnutls_malloc()
.
The username
should be an ASCII string or UTF-8
string. In case of a UTF-8 string it is recommended to be following
the PRECIS framework for usernames (rfc8265). The password can
be in ASCII format, or normalized using gnutls_utf8_password_normalize()
.
The callback function will be called once per handshake before the initial hello message is sent.
The callback should not return a negative error code the second time called, since the handshake procedure will be aborted.
The callback function should return 0 on success. -1 indicates an error.
In server side the default behavior of GnuTLS is to read the usernames and SRP verifiers from password files. These password file format is compatible the with the Stanford srp libraries format. If a different password file format is to be used, then gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_function should be called, to set an appropriate callback.
res: is a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t
type.
password_file: is the SRP password file (tpasswd)
password_conf_file: is the SRP password conf file (tpasswd.conf)
This function sets the password files, in a
gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t
type. Those password files
hold usernames and verifiers and will be used for SRP
authentication.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, or an
error code.
cred: is a gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t
type.
func: is the callback function
This function can be used to set a callback to retrieve the user’s SRP credentials. The callback’s function form is:
int (*callback)(gnutls_session_t, const char* username, gnutls_datum_t *salt, gnutls_datum_t *verifier, gnutls_datum_t *generator, gnutls_datum_t *prime);
username
contains the actual username.
The salt
, verifier
, generator
and prime
must be filled
in using the gnutls_malloc()
. For convenience prime
and generator
may also be one of the static parameters defined in gnutls.h.
Initially, the data field is NULL in every gnutls_datum_t
structure that the callback has to fill in. When the
callback is done GnuTLS deallocates all of those buffers
which are non-NULL, regardless of the return value.
In order to prevent attackers from guessing valid usernames,
if a user does not exist, g and n values should be filled in
using a random user’s parameters. In that case the callback must
return the special value (1).
See gnutls_srp_set_server_fake_salt_seed
too.
If this is not required for your application, return a negative
number from the callback to abort the handshake.
The callback function will only be called once per handshake. The callback function should return 0 on success, while -1 indicates an error.
Next: Anonymous credentials, Previous: SRP credentials, Up: Associating the credentials [Contents][Index]
The initialization functions in PSK credentials differ between client and server.
int gnutls_psk_allocate_server_credentials (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t * sc)
int gnutls_psk_allocate_client_credentials (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t * sc)
void gnutls_psk_free_server_credentials (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t sc)
void gnutls_psk_free_client_credentials (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t sc)
Clients supporting PSK should supply the username and key before a TLS session is established. Alternatively gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials_function can be used to specify a callback function. This has the advantage that the callback will be called only if PSK has been negotiated.
int gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials (gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t res, const char * username, const gnutls_datum_t * key, gnutls_psk_key_flags flags)
cred: is a gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t
type.
func: is the callback function
This function can be used to set a callback to retrieve the username and password for client PSK authentication. The callback’s function form is: int (*callback)(gnutls_session_t, char** username, gnutls_datum_t* key);
The username
and key
->data must be allocated using gnutls_malloc()
.
The username
should be an ASCII string or UTF-8
string. In case of a UTF-8 string it is recommended to be following
the PRECIS framework for usernames (rfc8265).
The callback function will be called once per handshake.
The callback function should return 0 on success. -1 indicates an error.
In server side the default behavior of GnuTLS is to read the usernames and PSK keys from a password file. The password file should contain usernames and keys in hexadecimal format. The name of the password file can be stored to the credentials structure by calling gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_file. If a different password file format is to be used, then a callback should be set instead by gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_function.
The server can help the client chose a suitable username and password, by sending a hint. Note that there is no common profile for the PSK hint and applications are discouraged to use it. A server, may specify the hint by calling gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_hint. The client can retrieve the hint, for example in the callback function, using gnutls_psk_client_get_hint.
res: is a gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t
type.
password_file: is the PSK password file (passwd.psk)
This function sets the password file, in a
gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t
type. This password file
holds usernames and keys and will be used for PSK authentication.
Each entry in the file consists of a username, followed by a colon (’:’) and a hex-encoded key. If the username contains a colon or any other special character, it can be hex-encoded preceded by a ’#’.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise
an error code is returned.
void gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_function (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t cred, gnutls_psk_server_credentials_function * func)
int gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_hint (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t res, const char * hint)
const char * gnutls_psk_client_get_hint (gnutls_session_t session)
Previous: PSK credentials, Up: Associating the credentials [Contents][Index]
The key exchange methods for anonymous authentication since GnuTLS 3.6.0 will utilize the RFC7919 parameters, unless explicit parameters have been provided and associated with an anonymous credentials structure. Check Parameter generation for more information. The initialization functions for the credentials are shown below.
int gnutls_anon_allocate_server_credentials (gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t * sc)
int gnutls_anon_allocate_client_credentials (gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t * sc)
void gnutls_anon_free_server_credentials (gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t sc)
void gnutls_anon_free_client_credentials (gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t sc)
Next: TLS handshake, Previous: Associating the credentials, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
The next step is to setup the underlying transport layer details. The Berkeley sockets are implicitly used by GnuTLS, thus a call to gnutls_transport_set_int would be sufficient to specify the socket descriptor.
void gnutls_transport_set_int (gnutls_session_t session, int fd)
void gnutls_transport_set_int2 (gnutls_session_t session, int recv_fd, int send_fd)
If however another transport layer than TCP is selected, then a pointer should be used instead to express the parameter to be passed to custom functions. In that case the following functions should be used instead.
void gnutls_transport_set_ptr (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr)
void gnutls_transport_set_ptr2 (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_transport_ptr_t recv_ptr, gnutls_transport_ptr_t send_ptr)
Moreover all of the following push and pull callbacks should be set.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
push_func: a callback function similar to write()
This is the function where you set a push function for gnutls to use in order to send data. If you are going to use berkeley style sockets, you do not need to use this function since the default send(2) will probably be ok. Otherwise you should specify this function for gnutls to be able to send data. The callback should return a positive number indicating the bytes sent, and -1 on error.
push_func
is of the form,
ssize_t (*gnutls_push_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, const void*, size_t);
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
vec_func: a callback function similar to writev()
Using this function you can override the default writev(2)
function for gnutls to send data. Setting this callback
instead of gnutls_transport_set_push_function()
is recommended
since it introduces less overhead in the TLS handshake process.
vec_func
is of the form,
ssize_t (*gnutls_vec_push_func) (gnutls_transport_ptr_t, const giovec_t * iov, int iovcnt);
Since: 2.12.0
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
pull_func: a callback function similar to read()
This is the function where you set a function for gnutls to receive data. Normally, if you use berkeley style sockets, do not need to use this function since the default recv(2) will probably be ok. The callback should return 0 on connection termination, a positive number indicating the number of bytes received, and -1 on error.
gnutls_pull_func
is of the form,
ssize_t (*gnutls_pull_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, void*, size_t);
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
func: a callback function
This is the function where you set a function for gnutls to know
whether data are ready to be received. It should wait for data a
given time frame in milliseconds. The callback should return 0 on
timeout, a positive number if data can be received, and -1 on error.
You’ll need to override this function if select()
is not suitable
for the provided transport calls.
As with select()
, if the timeout value is zero the callback should return
zero if no data are immediately available. The special value
GNUTLS_INDEFINITE_TIMEOUT
indicates that the callback should wait indefinitely
for data.
gnutls_pull_timeout_func
is of the form,
int (*gnutls_pull_timeout_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, unsigned int ms);
This callback is necessary when gnutls_handshake_set_timeout()
or
gnutls_record_set_timeout()
are set, under TLS1.3 and for enforcing the DTLS
mode timeouts when in blocking mode.
For compatibility with future GnuTLS versions this callback must be set when
a custom pull function is registered. The callback will not be used when the
session is in TLS mode with non-blocking sockets. That is, when GNUTLS_NONBLOCK
is specified for a TLS session in gnutls_init()
.
The helper function gnutls_system_recv_timeout()
is provided to
simplify writing callbacks.
Since: 3.0
The functions above accept a callback function which
should return the number of bytes written, or -1 on
error and should set errno
appropriately.
In some environments, setting errno
is unreliable. For example
Windows have several errno variables in different CRTs, or in other
systems it may be a non thread-local variable. If this is a concern to
you, call gnutls_transport_set_errno with the intended errno
value instead of setting errno
directly.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
err: error value to store in session-specific errno variable.
Store err
in the session-specific errno variable. Useful values
for err
are EINTR, EAGAIN and EMSGSIZE, other values are treated will be
treated as real errors in the push/pull function.
This function is useful in replacement push and pull functions set by
gnutls_transport_set_push_function()
and
gnutls_transport_set_pull_function()
under Windows, where the
replacements may not have access to the same errno
variable that is used by GnuTLS (e.g., the application is linked to
msvcr71.dll and gnutls is linked to msvcrt.dll).
This function is unreliable if you are using the same
session
in different threads for sending and receiving.
GnuTLS currently only interprets the EINTR, EAGAIN and EMSGSIZE errno values and returns the corresponding GnuTLS error codes:
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET
The EINTR and EAGAIN values are returned by interrupted system calls, or when non blocking IO is used. All GnuTLS functions can be resumed (called again), if any of the above error codes is returned. The EMSGSIZE value is returned when attempting to send a large datagram.
In the case of DTLS it is also desirable to override the generic
transport functions with functions that emulate the operation
of recvfrom
and sendto
. In addition
DTLS requires timers during the receive of a handshake
message, set using the gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function
function. To check the retransmission timers the function
gnutls_dtls_get_timeout is provided, which returns the time
remaining until the next retransmission, or better the time until
gnutls_handshake should be called again.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
func: a callback function
This is the function where you set a function for gnutls to know
whether data are ready to be received. It should wait for data a
given time frame in milliseconds. The callback should return 0 on
timeout, a positive number if data can be received, and -1 on error.
You’ll need to override this function if select()
is not suitable
for the provided transport calls.
As with select()
, if the timeout value is zero the callback should return
zero if no data are immediately available. The special value
GNUTLS_INDEFINITE_TIMEOUT
indicates that the callback should wait indefinitely
for data.
gnutls_pull_timeout_func
is of the form,
int (*gnutls_pull_timeout_func)(gnutls_transport_ptr_t, unsigned int ms);
This callback is necessary when gnutls_handshake_set_timeout()
or
gnutls_record_set_timeout()
are set, under TLS1.3 and for enforcing the DTLS
mode timeouts when in blocking mode.
For compatibility with future GnuTLS versions this callback must be set when
a custom pull function is registered. The callback will not be used when the
session is in TLS mode with non-blocking sockets. That is, when GNUTLS_NONBLOCK
is specified for a TLS session in gnutls_init()
.
The helper function gnutls_system_recv_timeout()
is provided to
simplify writing callbacks.
Since: 3.0
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function will return the milliseconds remaining
for a retransmission of the previously sent handshake
message. This function is useful when DTLS is used in
non-blocking mode, to estimate when to call gnutls_handshake()
if no packets have been received.
Returns: the remaining time in milliseconds.
Since: 3.0
• Asynchronous operation | ||
• Reducing round-trips | ||
• Zero-roundtrip mode | ||
• Anti-replay protection | ||
• DTLS sessions | ||
• DTLS and SCTP |
Next: Reducing round-trips, Up: Setting up the transport layer [Contents][Index]
GnuTLS can be used with asynchronous socket or event-driven programming.
The approach is similar to using Berkeley sockets under such an environment.
The blocking, due to network interaction, calls such as
gnutls_handshake, gnutls_record_recv,
can be set to non-blocking by setting the underlying sockets to non-blocking.
If other push and pull functions are setup, then they should behave the same
way as recv
and send
when used in a non-blocking
way, i.e., return -1 and set errno to EAGAIN
. Since, during a TLS protocol session
GnuTLS does not block except for network interaction, the non blocking
EAGAIN
errno will be propagated and GnuTLS functions
will return the GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
error code. Such calls can be resumed the
same way as a system call would.
The only exception is gnutls_record_send,
which if interrupted subsequent calls need not to include the data to be
sent (can be called with NULL argument).
When using the poll
or select
system calls though, one should remember
that they only apply to the kernel sockets API. To check for any
available buffered data in a GnuTLS session,
utilize gnutls_record_check_pending,
either before the poll
system call, or after a call to
gnutls_record_recv. Data queued by gnutls_record_send
(when interrupted) can be discarded using gnutls_record_discard_queued.
An example of GnuTLS’ usage with asynchronous operation can be found
in doc/examples/tlsproxy
.
The following paragraphs describe the detailed requirements for non-blocking operation when using the TLS or DTLS protocols.
There are no special requirements for the TLS protocol operation in non-blocking mode if a non-blocking socket is used.
It is recommended, however, for future compatibility, when in non-blocking mode, to
call the gnutls_init function with the
GNUTLS_NONBLOCK
flag set (see Session initialization).
When in non-blocking mode the function, the gnutls_init function
must be called with the GNUTLS_NONBLOCK
flag set (see Session initialization).
In contrast with the TLS protocol, the pull timeout function is required, but will only be called with a timeout of zero. In that case it should indicate whether there are data to be received or not. When not using the default pull function, then gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function should be called.
Although in the TLS protocol implementation each call to receive or send function implies to restoring the same function that was interrupted, in the DTLS protocol this requirement isn’t true. There are cases where a retransmission is required, which are indicated by a received message and thus gnutls_record_get_direction must be called to decide which direction to check prior to restoring a function call.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function is useful to determine whether a GnuTLS function was interrupted
while sending or receiving, so that select()
or poll()
may be called appropriately.
It provides information about the internals of the record
protocol and is only useful if a prior gnutls function call,
e.g. gnutls_handshake()
, was interrupted and returned
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
. After such an interrupt
applications may call select()
or poll()
before restoring the
interrupted GnuTLS function.
This function’s output is unreliable if you are using the same
session
in different threads for sending and receiving.
Returns: 0 if interrupted while trying to read data, or 1 while trying to write data.
When calling gnutls_handshake through a multi-plexer, to be able to handle properly the DTLS handshake retransmission timers, the function gnutls_dtls_get_timeout should be used to estimate when to call gnutls_handshake if no data have been received.
Next: Zero-roundtrip mode, Previous: Asynchronous operation, Up: Setting up the transport layer [Contents][Index]
The full TLS 1.2 handshake requires 2 round-trips to complete, and when combined with TCP’s SYN and SYN-ACK negotiation it extends to 3 full round-trips. While, TLS 1.3 reduces that to two round-trips when under TCP, it still adds considerable latency, making the protocol unsuitable for certain applications.
To optimize the handshake latency, in client side, it is possible to take
advantage of the TCP fast open [RFC7413] mechanism on operating
systems that support it. That can be done either by manually crafting the push and pull
callbacks, or by utilizing gnutls_transport_set_fastopen. In that
case the initial TCP handshake is eliminated, reducing the TLS 1.2 handshake round-trip
to 2, and the TLS 1.3 handshake to a single round-trip.
Note, that when this function is used, any connection failures will be reported during the
gnutls_handshake function call with error code GNUTLS_E_PUSH_ERROR
.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
fd: is the session’s socket descriptor
connect_addr: is the address we want to connect to
connect_addrlen: is the length of connect_addr
flags: must be zero
Enables TCP Fast Open (TFO) for the specified TLS client session.
That means that TCP connection establishment and the transmission
of the first TLS client hello packet are combined. The
peer’s address must be specified in connect_addr
and connect_addrlen
,
and the socket specified by fd
should not be connected.
TFO only works for TCP sockets of type AF_INET and AF_INET6.
If the OS doesn’t support TCP fast open this function will result
to gnutls using connect()
transparently during the first write.
Note: This function overrides all the transport callback functions.
If this is undesirable, TCP Fast Open must be implemented on the user
callback functions without calling this function. When using
this function, transport callbacks must not be set, and
gnutls_transport_set_ptr()
or gnutls_transport_set_int()
must not be called.
On GNU/Linux TFO has to be enabled at the system layer, that is in /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_fastopen, bit 0 has to be set.
This function has no effect on server sessions.
Since: 3.5.3
When restricted to TLS 1.2, and non-resumed sessions, it is possible to further reduce the round-trips to a single one by taking advantage of the False Start TLS extension. This can be enabled by setting the GNUTLS_ENABLE_FALSE_START flag on gnutls_init.
Under TLS 1.3, the server side can start transmitting before the handshake is complete (i.e., while the client Finished message is still in flight), when no client certificate authentication is requested. This, unlike false start, is part of protocol design with no known security implications. It can be enabled by setting the GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_START on gnutls_init, and the gnutls_handshake function will return early, allowing the server to send data earlier.
Next: Anti-replay protection, Previous: Reducing round-trips, Up: Setting up the transport layer [Contents][Index]
Under TLS 1.3, when the client has already connected to the server and is resuming a session, it can start transmitting application data during handshake. This is called zero round-trip time (0-RTT) mode, and the application data sent in this mode is called early data. The client can send early data with gnutls_record_send_early_data. The client should call this function before calling gnutls_handshake and after calling gnutls_session_set_data.
Note, however, that early data has weaker security properties than normal application data sent after handshake, such as lack of forward secrecy, no guarantees of non-replay between connections. Thus it is disabled on the server side by default. To enable it, the server needs to:
The server caches the received early data until it is read. To set the maximum amount of data to be stored in the cache, use gnutls_record_set_max_early_data_size. After receiving the EndOfEarlyData handshake message, the server can start retrieving the received data with gnutls_record_recv_early_data. You can call the function either after the handshake is complete, or through a handshake hook (gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function).
When sending early data, the client should respect the maximum amount of early data, which may have been previously advertised by the server. It can be checked using gnutls_record_get_max_early_data_size, right after calling gnutls_session_set_data.
After sending early data, to check whether the sent early data was accepted by the server, use gnutls_session_get_flags and compare the result with GNUTLS_SFLAGS_EARLY_DATA. Similarly, on the server side, the same function and flag can be used to check whether it has actually accepted early data.
Next: DTLS sessions, Previous: Zero-roundtrip mode, Up: Setting up the transport layer [Contents][Index]
When 0-RTT mode is used, the server must protect itself from replay attacks, where adversary client reuses duplicate session ticket to send early data, before the server authenticates the client.
GnuTLS provides a simple mechanism against replay attacks, following the method called ClientHello recording. When a session ticket is accepted, the server checks if the ClientHello message has been already seen. If there is a duplicate, the server rejects early data.
The problem of this approach is that the number of recorded messages grows indefinitely. To prevent that, the server can limit the recording to a certain time window, which can be configured with gnutls_anti_replay_set_window.
The anti-replay mechanism shall be globally initialized with gnutls_anti_replay_init, and then attached to a session using gnutls_anti_replay_enable. It can be deinitialized with gnutls_anti_replay_deinit.
The server must also set up a database back-end to store ClientHello messages. That can be achieved using gnutls_anti_replay_set_add_function and gnutls_anti_replay_set_ptr.
Note that, if the back-end stores arbitrary number of ClientHello, it needs to periodically clean up the stored entries based on the time window set with gnutls_anti_replay_set_window. The cleanup can be implemented by iterating through the database entries and calling gnutls_db_check_entry_expire_time. This is similar to session database cleanup used by TLS1.2 sessions.
The full set up of the server using early data would be like the following example:
#define MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE 16384 static int db_add_func(void *dbf, gnutls_datum_t key, gnutls_datum_t data) { /* Return GNUTLS_E_DB_ENTRY_EXISTS, if KEY is found in the database. * Otherwise, store it and return 0. */ } static int handshake_hook_func(gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int htype, unsigned when, unsigned int incoming, const gnutls_datum_t *msg) { int ret; char buf[MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE]; assert(htype == GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_END_OF_EARLY_DATA); assert(when == GNUTLS_HOOK_POST); if (gnutls_session_get_flags(session) & GNUTLS_SFLAGS_EARLY_DATA) { ret = gnutls_record_recv_early_data(session, buf, sizeof(buf)); assert(ret >= 0); } return ret; } int main(void) { ... /* Initialize anti-replay measure, which can be shared * among multiple sessions. */ gnutls_anti_replay_init(&anti_replay); /* Set the database back-end function for the anti-replay data. */ gnutls_anti_replay_set_add_function(anti_replay, db_add_func); gnutls_anti_replay_set_ptr(anti_replay, NULL); ... gnutls_init(&server, GNUTLS_SERVER | GNUTLS_ENABLE_EARLY_DATA); gnutls_record_set_max_early_data_size(server, MAX_EARLY_DATA_SIZE); ... /* Set the anti-replay measure to the session. */ gnutls_anti_replay_enable(server, anti_replay); ... /* Retrieve early data in a handshake hook; * you can also do that after handshake. */ gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function(server, GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_END_OF_EARLY_DATA, GNUTLS_HOOK_POST, handshake_hook_func); ... }
Next: DTLS and SCTP, Previous: Anti-replay protection, Up: Setting up the transport layer [Contents][Index]
Because datagram TLS can operate over connections where the client cannot be reliably verified, functionality in the form of cookies, is available to prevent denial of service attacks to servers. GnuTLS requires a server to generate a secret key that is used to sign a cookie19. That cookie is sent to the client using gnutls_dtls_cookie_send, and the client must reply using the correct cookie. The server side should verify the initial message sent by client using gnutls_dtls_cookie_verify. If successful the session should be initialized and associated with the cookie using gnutls_dtls_prestate_set, before proceeding to the handshake.
int gnutls_key_generate (gnutls_datum_t * key, unsigned int key_size)
int gnutls_dtls_cookie_send (gnutls_datum_t * key, void * client_data, size_t client_data_size, gnutls_dtls_prestate_st * prestate, gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr, gnutls_push_func push_func)
int gnutls_dtls_cookie_verify (gnutls_datum_t * key, void * client_data, size_t client_data_size, void * _msg, size_t msg_size, gnutls_dtls_prestate_st * prestate)
void gnutls_dtls_prestate_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_dtls_prestate_st * prestate)
Note that the above apply to server side only and they are not mandatory to be used. Not using them, however, allows denial of service attacks. The client side cookie handling is part of gnutls_handshake.
Datagrams are typically restricted by a maximum transfer unit (MTU). For that both client and server side should set the correct maximum transfer unit for the layer underneath GnuTLS. This will allow proper fragmentation of DTLS messages and prevent messages from being silently discarded by the transport layer. The “correct” maximum transfer unit can be obtained through a path MTU discovery mechanism [RFC4821].
void gnutls_dtls_set_mtu (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int mtu)
unsigned int gnutls_dtls_get_mtu (gnutls_session_t session)
unsigned int gnutls_dtls_get_data_mtu (gnutls_session_t session)
Previous: DTLS sessions, Up: Setting up the transport layer [Contents][Index]
Although DTLS can run under any reliable or unreliable layer, there are special requirements for SCTP according to [RFC6083]. We summarize the most important below, however for a full treatment we refer to [RFC6083].
GNUTLS_NO_REPLAY_PROTECTION
with gnutls_init.
Next: Data transfer and termination, Previous: Setting up the transport layer, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
Once a session has been initialized and a network connection has been set up, TLS and DTLS protocols perform a handshake. The handshake is the actual key exchange.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function performs the handshake of the TLS/SSL protocol, and initializes the TLS session parameters.
The non-fatal errors expected by this function are:
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
, GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
,
GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED
. When this function is called
for re-handshake under TLS 1.2 or earlier, the non-fatal error code
GNUTLS_E_GOT_APPLICATION_DATA
may also be returned.
The former two interrupt the handshake procedure due to the transport
layer being interrupted, and the latter because of a "warning" alert that
was sent by the peer (it is always a good idea to check any
received alerts). On these non-fatal errors call this function again,
until it returns 0; cf. gnutls_record_get_direction()
and
gnutls_error_is_fatal()
. In DTLS sessions the non-fatal error
GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET
is also possible, and indicates that
the MTU should be adjusted.
When this function is called by a server after a rehandshake request
under TLS 1.2 or earlier the GNUTLS_E_GOT_APPLICATION_DATA
error code indicates
that some data were pending prior to peer initiating the handshake.
Under TLS 1.3 this function when called after a successful handshake, is a no-op
and always succeeds in server side; in client side this function is
equivalent to gnutls_session_key_update()
with GNUTLS_KU_PEER
flag.
This function handles both full and abbreviated TLS handshakes (resumption).
For abbreviated handshakes, in client side, the gnutls_session_set_data()
should be called prior to this function to set parameters from a previous session.
In server side, resumption is handled by either setting a DB back-end, or setting
up keys for session tickets.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on a successful handshake, otherwise a negative error code.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
ms: is a timeout value in milliseconds
This function sets the timeout for the TLS handshake process
to the provided value. Use an ms
value of zero to disable
timeout, or GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT
for a reasonable
default value. For the DTLS protocol, the more detailed
gnutls_dtls_set_timeouts()
is provided.
This function requires to set a pull timeout callback. See
gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function()
.
Since: 3.1.0
In GnuTLS 3.5.0 and later it is recommended to use gnutls_session_set_verify_cert for the handshake process to ensure the verification of the peer’s identity. That will verify the peer’s certificate, against the trusted CA store while accounting for stapled OCSP responses during the handshake; any error will be returned as a handshake error.
In older GnuTLS versions it is required to verify the peer’s certificate during the handshake by setting a callback with gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function, and then using gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 from it. See Certificate authentication for more information.
void gnutls_session_set_verify_cert (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3 (gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, unsigned int * status)
Next: Buffered data transfer, Previous: TLS handshake, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
Once the handshake is complete and peer’s identity
has been verified data can be exchanged. The available
functions resemble the POSIX recv
and send
functions. It is suggested to use gnutls_error_is_fatal
to check whether the error codes returned by these functions are
fatal for the protocol or can be ignored.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
data: contains the data to send
data_size: is the length of the data
This function has the similar semantics with send()
. The only
difference is that it accepts a GnuTLS session, and uses different
error codes.
Note that if the send buffer is full, send()
will block this
function. See the send()
documentation for more information.
You can replace the default push function which is send()
, by using
gnutls_transport_set_push_function()
.
If the EINTR is returned by the internal push function
then GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
will be returned. If
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
is returned, you must
call this function again with the exact same parameters, or provide a
NULL
pointer for data
and 0 for data_size
, in order to write the
same data as before. If you wish to discard the previous data instead
of retrying, you must call gnutls_record_discard_queued()
before
calling this function with different parameters. Note that the latter
works only on special transports (e.g., UDP).
cf. gnutls_record_get_direction()
.
Note that in DTLS this function will return the GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET
error code if the send data exceed the data MTU value - as returned
by gnutls_dtls_get_data_mtu()
. The errno value EMSGSIZE
also maps to GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET
.
Note that since 3.2.13 this function can be called under cork in DTLS
mode, and will refuse to send data over the MTU size by returning
GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET
.
Returns: The number of bytes sent, or a negative error code. The
number of bytes sent might be less than data_size
. The maximum
number of bytes this function can send in a single call depends
on the negotiated maximum record size.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
data: the buffer that the data will be read into
data_size: the number of requested bytes
This function has the similar semantics with recv()
. The only
difference is that it accepts a GnuTLS session, and uses different
error codes.
In the special case that the peer requests a renegotiation, the
caller will receive an error code of GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
. In case
of a client, this message may be simply ignored, replied with an alert
GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION
, or replied with a new handshake,
depending on the client’s will. A server receiving this error code
can only initiate a new handshake or terminate the session.
If EINTR
is returned by the internal pull function (the default
is recv()
) then GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
will be returned. If
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
or GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
is returned, you must
call this function again to get the data. See also
gnutls_record_get_direction()
.
Returns: The number of bytes received and zero on EOF (for stream
connections). A negative error code is returned in case of an error.
The number of bytes received might be less than the requested data_size
.
error: is a GnuTLS error code, a negative error code
If a GnuTLS function returns a negative error code you may feed that value to this function to see if the error condition is fatal to a TLS session (i.e., must be terminated).
Note that you may also want to check the error code manually, since some non-fatal errors to the protocol (such as a warning alert or a rehandshake request) may be fatal for your program.
This function is only useful if you are dealing with errors from functions that relate to a TLS session (e.g., record layer or handshake layer handling functions).
Returns: Non-zero value on fatal errors or zero on non-fatal.
Although, in the TLS protocol the receive function can be called at any time, when DTLS is used the GnuTLS receive functions must be called once a message is available for reading, even if no data are expected. This is because in DTLS various (internal) actions may be required due to retransmission timers. Moreover, an extended receive function is shown below, which allows the extraction of the message’s sequence number. Due to the unreliable nature of the protocol, this field allows distinguishing out-of-order messages.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
data: the buffer that the data will be read into
data_size: the number of requested bytes
seq: is the packet’s 64-bit sequence number. Should have space for 8 bytes.
This function is the same as gnutls_record_recv()
, except that
it returns in addition to data, the sequence number of the data.
This is useful in DTLS where record packets might be received
out-of-order. The returned 8-byte sequence number is an
integer in big-endian format and should be
treated as a unique message identification.
Returns: The number of bytes received and zero on EOF. A negative
error code is returned in case of an error. The number of bytes
received might be less than data_size
.
Since: 3.0
The gnutls_record_check_pending helper function is available to
allow checking whether data are available to be read in a GnuTLS session
buffers. Note that this function complements but does not replace poll
,
i.e., gnutls_record_check_pending reports no data to be read, poll
should be called to check for data in the network buffers.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function checks if there are unread data
in the gnutls buffers. If the return value is
non-zero the next call to gnutls_record_recv()
is guaranteed not to block.
Returns: Returns the size of the data or zero.
int gnutls_record_get_direction (gnutls_session_t session)
Once a TLS or DTLS session is no longer needed, it is recommended to use gnutls_bye to terminate the session. That way the peer is notified securely about the intention of termination, which allows distinguishing it from a malicious connection termination. A session can be deinitialized with the gnutls_deinit function.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
how: is an integer
Terminates the current TLS/SSL connection. The connection should
have been initiated using gnutls_handshake()
. how
should be one
of GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR
, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR
.
In case of GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR
the TLS session gets
terminated and further receives and sends will be disallowed. If
the return value is zero you may continue using the underlying
transport layer. GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR
sends an alert containing a close
request and waits for the peer to reply with the same message.
In case of GNUTLS_SHUT_WR
the TLS session gets terminated
and further sends will be disallowed. In order to reuse the
connection you should wait for an EOF from the peer.
GNUTLS_SHUT_WR
sends an alert containing a close request.
Note that not all implementations will properly terminate a TLS connection. Some of them, usually for performance reasons, will terminate only the underlying transport layer, and thus not distinguishing between a malicious party prematurely terminating the connection and normal termination.
This function may also return GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
or
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
; cf. gnutls_record_get_direction()
.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, or an error code, see
function documentation for entire semantics.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function clears all buffers associated with the session
.
This function will also remove session data from the session
database if the session was terminated abnormally.
Next: Handling alerts, Previous: Data transfer and termination, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
Although gnutls_record_send is sufficient to transmit data to the peer, when many small chunks of data are to be transmitted it is inefficient and wastes bandwidth due to the TLS record overhead. In that case it is preferable to combine the small chunks before transmission. The following functions provide that functionality.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
If called, gnutls_record_send()
will no longer send any records.
Any sent records will be cached until gnutls_record_uncork()
is called.
This function is safe to use with DTLS after GnuTLS 3.3.0.
Since: 3.1.9
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
flags: Could be zero or GNUTLS_RECORD_WAIT
This resets the effect of gnutls_record_cork()
, and flushes any pending
data. If the GNUTLS_RECORD_WAIT
flag is specified then this
function will block until the data is sent or a fatal error
occurs (i.e., the function will retry on GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
and
GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
).
If the flag GNUTLS_RECORD_WAIT
is not specified and the function
is interrupted then the GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
or GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
errors will be returned. To obtain the data left in the corked
buffer use gnutls_record_check_corked()
.
Returns: On success the number of transmitted data is returned, or otherwise a negative error code.
Since: 3.1.9
Next: Priority Strings, Previous: Buffered data transfer, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
During a TLS connection alert messages may be exchanged by the
two peers. Those messages may be fatal, meaning the connection
must be terminated afterwards, or warning when something needs
to be reported to the peer, but without interrupting the session.
The error codes GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED
or GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED
signal those alerts
when received, and may be returned by all GnuTLS functions that receive
data from the peer, being gnutls_handshake and gnutls_record_recv.
If those error codes are received the alert and its level should be logged or reported to the peer using the functions below.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function will return the last alert number received. This
function should be called when GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED
or
GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED
errors are returned by a gnutls
function. The peer may send alerts if he encounters an error.
If no alert has been received the returned value is undefined.
Returns: the last alert received, a
gnutls_alert_description_t
value.
alert: is an alert number.
This function will return a string that describes the given alert
number, or NULL
. See gnutls_alert_get()
.
Returns: string corresponding to gnutls_alert_description_t
value.
The peer may also be warned or notified of a fatal issue by using one of the functions below. All the available alerts are listed in The Alert Protocol.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
level: is the level of the alert
desc: is the alert description
This function will send an alert to the peer in order to inform him of something important (eg. his Certificate could not be verified). If the alert level is Fatal then the peer is expected to close the connection, otherwise he may ignore the alert and continue.
The error code of the underlying record send function will be
returned, so you may also receive GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
or
GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
as well.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise
an error code is returned.
err: is a negative integer
level: the alert level will be stored there
Get an alert depending on the error code returned by a gnutls
function. All alerts sent by this function should be considered
fatal. The only exception is when err
is GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
,
where a warning alert should be sent to the peer indicating that no
renegotiation will be performed.
If there is no mapping to a valid alert the alert to indicate
internal error (GNUTLS_A_INTERNAL_ERROR
) is returned.
Returns: the alert code to use for a particular error code.
Next: Selecting cryptographic key sizes, Previous: Handling alerts, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
The GnuTLS priority strings specify the TLS session’s handshake algorithms and options in a compact, easy-to-use format. These strings are intended as a user-specified override of the library defaults.
That is, we recommend applications using the default settings (c.f. gnutls_set_default_priority or gnutls_set_default_priority_append), and provide the user with access to priority strings for overriding the default behavior, on configuration files, or other UI. Following such a principle, makes the GnuTLS library as the default settings provider. That is necessary and a good practice, because TLS protocol hardening and phasing out of legacy algorithms, is easier to coordinate when happens in a single library.
int gnutls_set_default_priority (gnutls_session_t session)
int gnutls_set_default_priority_append (gnutls_session_t session, const char * add_prio, const char ** err_pos, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_priority_set_direct (gnutls_session_t session, const char * priorities, const char ** err_pos)
The priority string translation to the internal GnuTLS form requires processing and the generated internal form also occupies some memory. For that, it is recommended to do that processing once in server side, and share the generated data across sessions. The following functions allow the generation of a "priority cache" and the sharing of it across sessions.
int gnutls_priority_init2 (gnutls_priority_t * priority_cache, const char * priorities, const char ** err_pos, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_priority_init (gnutls_priority_t * priority_cache, const char * priorities, const char ** err_pos)
int gnutls_priority_set (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_priority_t priority)
void gnutls_priority_deinit (gnutls_priority_t priority_cache)
A priority string string may contain a single initial keyword such as in Table 6.3 and may be followed by additional algorithm or special keywords. Note that their description is intentionally avoiding specific algorithm details, as the priority strings are not constant between gnutls versions (they are periodically updated to account for cryptographic advances while providing compatibility with old clients and servers).
Keyword | Description |
---|---|
@KEYWORD | Means that a compile-time specified system configuration file (see System-wide configuration of the library)
will be used to expand the provided keyword. That is used to impose system-specific policies.
It may be followed by additional options that will be appended to the
system string (e.g., "@SYSTEM:+SRP"). The system file should have the
format ’KEYWORD=VALUE’, e.g., ’SYSTEM=NORMAL:+ARCFOUR-128’.
Since version 3.5.1 it is allowed to specify fallback keywords such as @KEYWORD1,@KEYWORD2, and the first valid keyword will be used. |
PERFORMANCE | All the known to be secure ciphersuites are enabled, limited to 128 bit ciphers and sorted by terms of speed performance. The message authenticity security level is of 64 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits). |
NORMAL | Means all the known to be secure ciphersuites. The ciphers are sorted by security
margin, although the 256-bit ciphers are included as a fallback only.
The message authenticity security level is of 64 bits or more,
and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits).
This priority string implicitly enables ECDHE and DHE. The ECDHE ciphersuites are placed first in the priority order, but due to compatibility issues with the DHE ciphersuites they are placed last in the priority order, after the plain RSA ciphersuites. |
LEGACY | This sets the NORMAL settings that were used for GnuTLS 3.2.x or earlier. There is no verification profile set, and the allowed DH primes are considered weak today (but are often used by misconfigured servers). |
PFS | Means all the known to be secure ciphersuites that support perfect forward secrecy (ECDHE and DHE). The ciphers are sorted by security margin, although the 256-bit ciphers are included as a fallback only. The message authenticity security level is of 80 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits). This option is available since 3.2.4 or later. |
SECURE128 | Means all known to be secure ciphersuites that offer a security level 128-bit or more. The message authenticity security level is of 80 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_LOW (80-bits). |
SECURE192 | Means all the known to be secure ciphersuites that offer a security level 192-bit or more. The message authenticity security level is of 128 bits or more, and the certificate verification profile is set to GNUTLS_PROFILE_HIGH (128-bits). |
SECURE256 | Currently alias for SECURE192. This option, will enable ciphers which use a 256-bit key but, due to limitations of the TLS protocol, the overall security level will be 192-bits (the security level depends on more factors than cipher key size). |
SUITEB128 | Means all the NSA Suite B cryptography (RFC5430) ciphersuites with an 128 bit security level, as well as the enabling of the corresponding verification profile. |
SUITEB192 | Means all the NSA Suite B cryptography (RFC5430) ciphersuites with an 192 bit security level, as well as the enabling of the corresponding verification profile. |
NONE | Means nothing is enabled. This disables even protocol versions. It should be followed by the algorithms to be enabled. Note that using this option to build a priority string gives detailed control into the resulting settings, however with new revisions of the TLS protocol new priority items are routinely added, and such strings are not forward compatible with new protocols. As such, we advice against using that option for applications targeting multiple versions of the GnuTLS library, and recommend using the defaults (see above) or adjusting the defaults via gnutls_set_default_priority_append. |
Unless the initial keyword is "NONE" the defaults (in preference order) are for TLS protocols TLS 1.2, TLS1.1, TLS1.0; for certificate types X.509. In key exchange algorithms when in NORMAL or SECURE levels the perfect forward secrecy algorithms take precedence of the other protocols. In all cases all the supported key exchange algorithms are enabled.
Note that the SECURE levels distinguish between overall security level and message authenticity security level. That is because the message authenticity security level requires the adversary to break the algorithms at real-time during the protocol run, whilst the overall security level refers to off-line adversaries (e.g. adversaries breaking the ciphertext years after it was captured).
The NONE keyword, if used, must followed by keywords specifying the algorithms and protocols to be enabled. The other initial keywords do not require, but may be followed by such keywords. All level keywords can be combined, and for example a level of "SECURE256:+SECURE128" is allowed.
The order with which every algorithm or protocol
is specified is significant. Algorithms specified before others
will take precedence. The supported in the GnuTLS version corresponding
to this document algorithms and protocols are shown in Table 6.4;
to list the supported algorithms in your currently using version use
gnutls-cli -l
.
To avoid collisions in order to specify a protocol version with "VERS-", signature algorithms with "SIGN-" and certificate types with "CTYPE-". All other algorithms don’t need a prefix. Each specified keyword (except for special keywords) can be prefixed with any of the following characters.
appended with an algorithm will remove this algorithm.
appended with an algorithm will add this algorithm.
Type | Keywords |
---|---|
Ciphers | Examples are AES-128-GCM, AES-256-GCM, AES-256-CBC, GOST28147-TC26Z-CNT; see also Table 3.1 for more options. Catch all name is CIPHER-ALL which will add all the algorithms from NORMAL priority. The shortcut for secure GOST algorithms is CIPHER-GOST-ALL. |
Key exchange | RSA, RSA-PSK, RSA-EXPORT, DHE-RSA, DHE-DSS, SRP, SRP-RSA, SRP-DSS, PSK, DHE-PSK, ECDHE-PSK, ECDHE-RSA, ECDHE-ECDSA, VKO-GOST-12, ANON-ECDH, ANON-DH. Catch all name is KX-ALL which will add all the algorithms from NORMAL priority. Under TLS1.3, the DHE-PSK and ECDHE-PSK strings are equivalent and instruct for a Diffie-Hellman key exchange using the enabled groups. The shortcut for secure GOST algorithms is KX-GOST-ALL. |
MAC | MD5, SHA1, SHA256, SHA384, GOST28147-TC26Z-IMIT, AEAD (used with GCM ciphers only). All algorithms from NORMAL priority can be accessed with MAC-ALL. The shortcut for secure GOST algorithms is MAC-GOST-ALL. |
Compression algorithms | COMP-NULL, COMP-DEFLATE. Catch all is COMP-ALL. |
TLS versions | VERS-TLS1.0, VERS-TLS1.1, VERS-TLS1.2, VERS-TLS1.3, VERS-DTLS0.9, VERS-DTLS1.0, VERS-DTLS1.2. Catch all are VERS-ALL, and will enable all protocols from NORMAL priority. To distinguish between TLS and DTLS versions you can use VERS-TLS-ALL and VERS-DTLS-ALL. |
Signature algorithms | SIGN-RSA-SHA1, SIGN-RSA-SHA224, SIGN-RSA-SHA256, SIGN-RSA-SHA384, SIGN-RSA-SHA512, SIGN-DSA-SHA1, SIGN-DSA-SHA224, SIGN-DSA-SHA256, SIGN-RSA-MD5, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA1, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA224, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA256, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA384, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA512, SIGN-EdDSA-Ed25519, SIGN-EdDSA-Ed448, SIGN-RSA-PSS-SHA256, SIGN-RSA-PSS-SHA384, SIGN-RSA-PSS-SHA512, SIGN-GOSTR341001, SIGN-GOSTR341012-256, SIGN-GOSTR341012-512. Catch all which enables all algorithms from NORMAL priority is SIGN-ALL. Shortcut which enables secure GOST algorithms is SIGN-GOST-ALL. This option is only considered for TLS 1.2 and later. |
Groups | GROUP-SECP192R1, GROUP-SECP224R1, GROUP-SECP256R1, GROUP-SECP384R1, GROUP-SECP521R1, GROUP-X25519, GROUP-X448, GROUP-GC256B, GROUP-GC512A, GROUP-FFDHE2048, GROUP-FFDHE3072, GROUP-FFDHE4096, GROUP-FFDHE6144, and GROUP-FFDHE8192. Groups include both elliptic curve groups, e.g., SECP256R1, as well as finite field groups such as FFDHE2048. Catch all which enables all groups from NORMAL priority is GROUP-ALL. The helper keywords GROUP-DH-ALL, GROUP-GOST-ALL and GROUP-EC-ALL are also available, restricting the groups to finite fields (DH), GOST curves and generic elliptic curves. |
Elliptic curves (legacy) | CURVE-SECP192R1, CURVE-SECP224R1, CURVE-SECP256R1, CURVE-SECP384R1, CURVE-SECP521R1, CURVE-X25519, and CURVE-X448. Catch all which enables all curves from NORMAL priority is CURVE-ALL. Note that the CURVE keyword is kept for backwards compatibility only, for new applications see the GROUP keyword above. |
Certificate types | Certificate types can be given in a symmetric fashion (i.e. the same for
both client and server) or, as of GnuTLS 3.6.4, in an asymmetric fashion
(i.e. different for the client than for the server). Alternative certificate
types must be explicitly enabled via flags in gnutls_init.
The currently supported types are CTYPE-X509, CTYPE-RAWPK which apply both to client and server; catch all is CTYPE-ALL. The types CTYPE-CLI-X509, CTYPE-SRV-X509, CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK, CTYPE-SRV-RAWPK can be used to specialize on client or server; catch all is CTYPE-CLI-ALL and CTYPE-SRV-ALL. The type ’X509’ is aliased to ’X.509’ for legacy reasons. |
Generic | The keyword GOST is a shortcut for secure GOST algorithms (MACs, ciphers, KXes, groups and signatures). For example the following string will enable all TLS 1.2 GOST ciphersuites: ’NONE:+VERS-TLS1.2:+GOST’. |
Note that the finite field groups (indicated by the FFDHE prefix) and DHE key exchange methods are generally slower20 than their elliptic curves counterpart (ECDHE).
The available special keywords are shown in Table 6.5 and Table 6.6.
Keyword | Description |
---|---|
%COMPAT | will enable compatibility mode. It might mean that violations of the protocols are allowed as long as maximum compatibility with problematic clients and servers is achieved. More specifically this string will tolerate packets over the maximum allowed TLS record, and add a padding to TLS Client Hello packet to prevent it being in the 256-512 range which is known to be causing issues with a commonly used firewall (see the %DUMBFW option). |
%DUMBFW | will add a private extension with bogus data that make the client hello exceed 512 bytes. This avoids a black hole behavior in some firewalls. This is the [RFC7685] client hello padding extension, also enabled with %COMPAT. |
%NO_EXTENSIONS | will prevent the sending of any TLS extensions in client side. Note that TLS 1.2 requires extensions to be used, as well as safe renegotiation thus this option must be used with care. When this option is set no versions later than TLS1.2 can be negotiated. |
%NO_SHUFFLE_EXTENSIONS | will prevent randomizing the order of ClientHello extensions. By default, those extensions are randomized to make fingerprinting harder. |
%NO_STATUS_REQUEST | will prevent sending of the TLS status_request extension in client side. |
%NO_TICKETS | will prevent the advertizing of the TLS session ticket extension. |
%NO_TICKETS_TLS12 | will prevent the advertizing of the TLS session ticket extension in TLS 1.2. This is implied by the PFS keyword. |
%NO_SESSION_HASH | will prevent the advertizing the TLS extended master secret (session hash) extension. |
%FORCE_SESSION_HASH | negotiate the TLS extended master secret (session hash) extension. Specifying both %NO_SESSION_HASH and %FORCE_SESSION_HASH is not supported, and the behavior is undefined. |
%SERVER_PRECEDENCE | The ciphersuite will be selected according to server priorities and not the client’s. |
%SSL3_RECORD_VERSION | will use SSL3.0 record version in client hello. By default GnuTLS will set the minimum supported version as the client hello record version (do not confuse that version with the proposed handshake version at the client hello). |
%LATEST_RECORD_VERSION | will use the latest TLS version record version in client hello. |
Keyword | Description |
---|---|
%STATELESS_COMPRESSION | ignored; no longer used. |
%DISABLE_WILDCARDS | will disable matching wildcards when comparing hostnames in certificates. |
%NO_ETM | will disable the encrypt-then-mac TLS extension (RFC7366). This is implied by the %COMPAT keyword. |
%FORCE_ETM | negotiate CBC ciphersuites only when both sides of the connection support encrypt-then-mac TLS extension (RFC7366). |
%DISABLE_SAFE_RENEGOTIATION | will completely disable safe renegotiation. Do not use unless you know what you are doing. |
%UNSAFE_RENEGOTIATION | will allow handshakes and re-handshakes without the safe renegotiation extension. Note that for clients this mode is insecure (you may be under attack), and for servers it will allow insecure clients to connect (which could be fooled by an attacker). Do not use unless you know what you are doing and want maximum compatibility. |
%PARTIAL_RENEGOTIATION | will allow initial handshakes to proceed, but not re-handshakes. This leaves the client vulnerable to attack, and servers will be compatible with non-upgraded clients for initial handshakes. This is currently the default for clients and servers, for compatibility reasons. |
%SAFE_RENEGOTIATION | will enforce safe renegotiation. Clients and servers will refuse to talk to an insecure peer. Currently this causes interoperability problems, but is required for full protection. |
%FALLBACK_SCSV | will enable the use of the fallback signaling cipher suite value in the client hello. Note that this should be set only by applications that try to reconnect with a downgraded protocol version. See RFC7507 for details. |
%DISABLE_TLS13_COMPAT_MODE | will disable TLS 1.3 middlebox compatibility mode (RFC8446, Appendix D.4) for non-compliant middleboxes. |
%VERIFY_ALLOW_BROKEN | will allow signatures with known to be broken algorithms (such as MD5 or SHA1) in certificate chains. |
%VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_RSA_MD5 | will allow RSA-MD5 signatures in certificate chains. |
%VERIFY_ALLOW_SIGN_WITH_SHA1 | will allow signatures with SHA1 hash algorithm in certificate chains. |
%VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS | will disable CRL or OCSP checks in the verification of the certificate chain. |
%VERIFY_ALLOW_X509_V1_CA_CRT | will allow V1 CAs in chains. |
%PROFILE_(LOW|LEGACY|MEDIUM|HIGH|ULTRA|FUTURE) | require a certificate verification profile the corresponds to the specified security level, see Table 6.7 for the mappings to values. |
%PROFILE_(SUITEB128|SUITEB192) | require a certificate verification profile the corresponds to SUITEB. Note that an initial keyword that enables SUITEB automatically sets the profile. |
Finally the ciphersuites enabled by any priority string can be
listed using the gnutls-cli
application (see gnutls-cli Invocation),
or by using the priority functions as in Listing the ciphersuites in a priority string.
Example priority strings are:
The system imposed security level: "SYSTEM" The default priority without the HMAC-MD5: "NORMAL:-MD5" Specifying RSA with AES-128-CBC: "NONE:+VERS-TLS-ALL:+MAC-ALL:+RSA:+AES-128-CBC:+SIGN-ALL:+COMP-NULL" Specifying the defaults plus ARCFOUR-128: "NORMAL:+ARCFOUR-128" Enabling the 128-bit secure ciphers, while disabling TLS 1.0: "SECURE128:-VERS-TLS1.0" Enabling the 128-bit and 192-bit secure ciphers, while disabling all TLS versions except TLS 1.2: "SECURE128:+SECURE192:-VERS-ALL:+VERS-TLS1.2"
Next: Advanced topics, Previous: Priority Strings, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
Because many algorithms are involved in TLS, it is not easy to set a consistent security level. For this reason in Table 6.7 we present some correspondence between key sizes of symmetric algorithms and public key algorithms based on [ECRYPT]. Those can be used to generate certificates with appropriate key sizes as well as select parameters for Diffie-Hellman and SRP authentication.
Security bits | RSA, DH and SRP parameter size | ECC key size | Security parameter (profile) | Description |
---|---|---|---|---|
<64 | <768 | <128 | INSECURE | Considered to be insecure |
64 | 768 | 128 | VERY WEAK | Short term protection against individuals |
72 | 1008 | 160 | WEAK | Short term protection against small organizations |
80 | 1024 | 160 | LOW | Very short term protection against agencies (corresponds to ENISA legacy level) |
96 | 1776 | 192 | LEGACY | Legacy standard level |
112 | 2048 | 224 | MEDIUM | Medium-term protection |
128 | 3072 | 256 | HIGH | Long term protection (corresponds to ENISA future level) |
192 | 8192 | 384 | ULTRA | Even longer term protection |
256 | 15424 | 512 | FUTURE | Foreseeable future |
The first column provides a security parameter in a number of bits. This
gives an indication of the number of combinations to be tried by an adversary
to brute force a key. For example to test all possible keys in a 112 bit security parameter
2^{112} combinations have to be tried. For today’s technology this is infeasible.
The next two columns correlate the security
parameter with actual bit sizes of parameters for DH, RSA, SRP and ECC algorithms.
A mapping to gnutls_sec_param_t
value is given for each security parameter, on
the next column, and finally a brief description of the level.
Note, however, that the values suggested here are nothing more than an educated guess that is valid today. There are no guarantees that an algorithm will remain unbreakable or that these values will remain constant in time. There could be scientific breakthroughs that cannot be predicted or total failure of the current public key systems by quantum computers. On the other hand though the cryptosystems used in TLS are selected in a conservative way and such catastrophic breakthroughs or failures are believed to be unlikely. The NIST publication SP 800-57 [NISTSP80057] contains a similar table.
When using GnuTLS and a decision on bit sizes for a public key algorithm is required, use of the following functions is recommended:
algo: is a public key algorithm
param: is a security parameter
When generating private and public key pairs a difficult question is which size of "bits" the modulus will be in RSA and the group size in DSA. The easy answer is 1024, which is also wrong. This function will convert a human understandable security parameter to an appropriate size for the specific algorithm.
Returns: The number of bits, or (0).
Since: 2.12.0
algo: is a public key algorithm
bits: is the number of bits
This is the inverse of gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits()
. Given an algorithm
and the number of bits, it will return the security parameter. This is
a rough indication.
Returns: The security parameter.
Since: 2.12.0
Those functions will convert a human understandable security parameter
of gnutls_sec_param_t
type, to a number of bits suitable for a public
key algorithm.
const char * gnutls_sec_param_get_name (gnutls_sec_param_t param)
The following functions will set the minimum acceptable group size for Diffie-Hellman and SRP authentication.
void gnutls_dh_set_prime_bits (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int bits)
void gnutls_srp_set_prime_bits (gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int bits)
Previous: Selecting cryptographic key sizes, Up: How to use GnuTLS in applications [Contents][Index]
Next: Session resumption, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
Often when operating with virtual hosts, one may not want to associate a particular certificate set to the credentials function early, before the virtual host is known. That can be achieved by calling gnutls_credentials_set within a handshake pre-hook for client hello. That message contains the peer’s intended hostname, and if read, and the appropriate credentials are set, gnutls will be able to continue in the handshake process. A brief usage example is shown below.
static int ext_hook_func(void *ctx, unsigned tls_id, const unsigned char *data, unsigned size) { if (tls_id == 0) { /* server name */ /* figure the advertised name - the following hack * relies on the fact that this extension only supports * DNS names, and due to a protocol bug cannot be extended * to support anything else. */ if (name < 5) return 0; name = data+5; name_size = size-5; } return 0; } static int handshake_hook_func(gnutls_session_t session, unsigned int htype, unsigned when, unsigned int incoming, const gnutls_datum_t *msg) { int ret; assert(htype == GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_CLIENT_HELLO); assert(when == GNUTLS_HOOK_PRE); ret = gnutls_ext_raw_parse(NULL, ext_hook_func, msg, GNUTLS_EXT_RAW_FLAG_TLS_CLIENT_HELLO); assert(ret >= 0); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, cred); return ret; } int main(void) { ... gnutls_handshake_set_hook_function(server, GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_CLIENT_HELLO, GNUTLS_HOOK_PRE, handshake_hook_func); ... }
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type
htype: the gnutls_handshake_description_t
of the message to hook at
when: GNUTLS_HOOK_
* depending on when the hook function should be called
func: is the function to be called
This function will set a callback to be called after or before the specified
handshake message has been received or generated. This is a
generalization of gnutls_handshake_set_post_client_hello_function()
.
To call the hook function prior to the message being generated or processed
use GNUTLS_HOOK_PRE
as when
parameter, GNUTLS_HOOK_POST
to call
after, and GNUTLS_HOOK_BOTH
for both cases.
This callback must return 0 on success or a gnutls error code to terminate the handshake.
To hook at all handshake messages use an htype
of GNUTLS_HANDSHAKE_ANY
.
Warning: You should not use this function to terminate the handshake based on client input unless you know what you are doing. Before the handshake is finished there is no way to know if there is a man-in-the-middle attack being performed.
Next: Certificate verification, Previous: Virtual hosts and credentials, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
To reduce time and network traffic spent in a handshake the client can request session resumption from a server that previously shared a session with the client.
Under TLS 1.2, in order to support resumption a server can either store the session security parameters in a local database or use session tickets (see Session tickets) to delegate storage to the client.
Under TLS 1.3, session resumption is only available through session tickets, and multiple tickets could be sent from server to client. That provides the following advantages:
The client has to retrieve and store the session parameters. Before establishing a new session to the same server the parameters must be re-associated with the GnuTLS session using gnutls_session_set_data.
int gnutls_session_get_data2 (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t * data)
int gnutls_session_set_data (gnutls_session_t session, const void * session_data, size_t session_data_size)
Keep in mind that sessions will be expired after some time, depending on the server, and a server may choose not to resume a session even when requested to. The expiration is to prevent temporal session keys from becoming long-term keys. Also note that as a client you must enable, using the priority functions, at least the algorithms used in the last session.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
Checks whether session is resumed or not. This is functional for both server and client side.
Returns: non zero if this session is resumed, or a zero if this is a new session.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
session_id: will point to the session ID.
Returns the TLS session identifier. The session ID is selected by the server, and in older versions of TLS was a unique identifier shared between client and server which was persistent across resumption. In the latest version of TLS (1.3) or TLS 1.2 with session tickets, the notion of session identifiers is undefined and cannot be relied for uniquely identifying sessions across client and server.
In client side this function returns the identifier returned by the server, and cannot be assumed to have any relation to session resumption. In server side this function is guaranteed to return a persistent identifier of the session since GnuTLS 3.6.4, which may not necessarily map into the TLS session ID value. Prior to that version the value could only be considered a persistent identifier, under TLS1.2 or earlier and when no session tickets were in use.
The session identifier value returned is always less than
GNUTLS_MAX_SESSION_ID_SIZE
and should be treated as constant.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise
an error code is returned.
Since: 3.1.4
A server enabling both session tickets and a storage for session data would use session tickets when clients support it and the storage otherwise.
A storing server needs to specify callback functions to store, retrieve and delete session data. These can be registered with the functions below. The stored sessions in the database can be checked using gnutls_db_check_entry for expiration.
void gnutls_db_set_retrieve_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_db_retr_func retr_func)
void gnutls_db_set_store_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_db_store_func store_func)
void gnutls_db_set_ptr (gnutls_session_t session, void * ptr)
void gnutls_db_set_remove_function (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_db_remove_func rem_func)
int gnutls_db_check_entry (gnutls_session_t session, gnutls_datum_t session_entry)
A server supporting session tickets must generate ticket encryption and authentication keys using gnutls_session_ticket_key_generate. Those keys should be associated with the GnuTLS session using gnutls_session_ticket_enable_server.
Those will be the initial keys, but GnuTLS will rotate them regularly. The key rotation interval can be changed with gnutls_db_set_cache_expiration and will be set to three times the ticket expiration time (ie. three times the value given in that function). Every such interval, new keys will be generated from those initial keys. This is a necessary mechanism to prevent the keys from becoming long-term keys and as such preserve forward-secrecy in the issued session tickets. If no explicit key rotation interval is provided, GnuTLS will rotate them every 18 hours by default.
The master key can be shared between processes or between systems. Processes which share the same master key will generate the same rotated subkeys, assuming they share the same time (irrespective of timezone differences).
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
key: key to encrypt session parameters.
Request that the server should attempt session resumption using
session tickets, i.e., by delegating storage to the client.
key
must be initialized using gnutls_session_ticket_key_generate()
.
To avoid leaking that key, use gnutls_memset()
prior to
releasing it.
The default ticket expiration time can be overridden using
gnutls_db_set_cache_expiration()
.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, or an
error code.
Since: 2.10.0
key: is a pointer to a gnutls_datum_t
which will contain a newly
created key.
Generate a random key to encrypt security parameters within SessionTicket.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, or an
error code.
Since: 2.10.0
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
Check whether the client has asked for session resumption. This function is valid only on server side.
Returns: non zero if session resumption was asked, or a zero if not.
The expiration time for session resumption, either in tickets or stored data is set using gnutls_db_set_cache_expiration. This function also controls the ticket key rotation period. Currently, the session key rotation interval is set to 3 times the expiration time set by this function.
Under TLS 1.3, the server sends by default 2 tickets, and can send additional session tickets at any time using gnutls_session_ticket_send.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
nr: the number of tickets to send
flags: must be zero
Sends a fresh session ticket to the peer. This is relevant only
in server side under TLS1.3. This function may also return GNUTLS_E_AGAIN
or GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED
and in that case it must be called again.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, or a negative error code.
Next: TLS 1.2 re-authentication, Previous: Session resumption, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
In this section the functionality for additional certificate verification methods is listed. These methods are intended to be used in addition to normal PKI verification, in order to reduce the risk of a compromised CA being undetected.
The GnuTLS library includes functionality to use an SSH-like trust on first use authentication. The available functions to store and verify public keys are listed below.
db_name: A file specifying the stored keys (use NULL for the default)
tdb: A storage structure or NULL to use the default
host: The peer’s name
service: non-NULL if this key is specific to a service (e.g. http)
cert_type: The type of the certificate
cert: The raw (der) data of the certificate
flags: should be 0.
This function will try to verify a raw public-key or a public-key provided via
a raw (DER-encoded) certificate using a list of stored public keys.
The service
field if non-NULL should be a port number.
The db_name
variable if non-null specifies a custom backend for
the retrieval of entries. If it is NULL then the
default file backend will be used. In POSIX-like systems the
file backend uses the $HOME/.gnutls/known_hosts file.
Note that if the custom storage backend is provided the
retrieval function should return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_KEY_MISMATCH
if the host/service pair is found but key doesn’t match,
GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND
if no such host/service with
the given key is found, and 0 if it was found. The storage
function should return 0 on success.
As of GnuTLS 3.6.6 this function also verifies raw public keys.
Returns: If no associated public key is found
then GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND
will be returned. If a key
is found but does not match GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_KEY_MISMATCH
is returned. On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned,
or a negative error value on other errors.
Since: 3.0.13
db_name: A file specifying the stored keys (use NULL for the default)
tdb: A storage structure or NULL to use the default
host: The peer’s name
service: non-NULL if this key is specific to a service (e.g. http)
cert_type: The type of the certificate
cert: The data of the certificate
expiration: The expiration time (use 0 to disable expiration)
flags: should be 0.
This function will store a raw public-key or a public-key provided via a raw (DER-encoded) certificate to the list of stored public keys. The key will be considered valid until the provided expiration time.
The tdb
variable if non-null specifies a custom backend for
the storage of entries. If it is NULL then the
default file backend will be used.
Unless an alternative tdb
is provided, the storage format is a textual format
consisting of a line for each host with fields separated by ’|’. The contents of
the fields are a format-identifier which is set to ’g0’, the hostname that the
rest of the data applies to, the numeric port or host name, the expiration
time in seconds since the epoch (0 for no expiration), and a base64
encoding of the raw (DER) public key information (SPKI) of the peer.
As of GnuTLS 3.6.6 this function also accepts raw public keys.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.0.13
In addition to the above the gnutls_store_commitment can be used to implement a key-pinning architecture as in [KEYPIN]. This provides a way for web server to commit on a public key that is not yet active.
db_name: A file specifying the stored keys (use NULL for the default)
tdb: A storage structure or NULL to use the default
host: The peer’s name
service: non-NULL if this key is specific to a service (e.g. http)
hash_algo: The hash algorithm type
hash: The raw hash
expiration: The expiration time (use 0 to disable expiration)
flags: should be 0 or GNUTLS_SCOMMIT_FLAG_ALLOW_BROKEN
.
This function will store the provided hash commitment to the list of stored public keys. The key with the given hash will be considered valid until the provided expiration time.
The tdb
variable if non-null specifies a custom backend for
the storage of entries. If it is NULL then the
default file backend will be used.
Note that this function is not thread safe with the default backend.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.0
The storage and verification functions may be used with the default text file based back-end, or another back-end may be specified. That should contain storage and retrieval functions and specified as below.
int gnutls_tdb_init (gnutls_tdb_t * tdb)
void gnutls_tdb_deinit (gnutls_tdb_t tdb)
void gnutls_tdb_set_verify_func (gnutls_tdb_t tdb, gnutls_tdb_verify_func verify)
void gnutls_tdb_set_store_func (gnutls_tdb_t tdb, gnutls_tdb_store_func store)
void gnutls_tdb_set_store_commitment_func (gnutls_tdb_t tdb, gnutls_tdb_store_commitment_func cstore)
Since the DANE library is not included in GnuTLS it requires programs to be linked against it. This can be achieved with the following commands.
gcc -o foo foo.c `pkg-config gnutls-dane --cflags --libs`
When a program uses the GNU autoconf system, then the following line or similar can be used to detect the presence of the library.
PKG_CHECK_MODULES([LIBDANE], [gnutls-dane >= 3.0.0]) AC_SUBST([LIBDANE_CFLAGS]) AC_SUBST([LIBDANE_LIBS])
The high level functionality provided by the DANE library is shown below.
s: A DANE state structure (may be NULL)
chain: A certificate chain
chain_size: The size of the chain
chain_type: The type of the certificate chain
hostname: The hostname associated with the chain
proto: The protocol of the service connecting (e.g. tcp)
port: The port of the service connecting (e.g. 443)
sflags: Flags for the initialization of s
(if NULL)
vflags: Verification flags; an OR’ed list of dane_verify_flags_t
.
verify: An OR’ed list of dane_verify_status_t
.
This function will verify the given certificate chain against the
CA constrains and/or the certificate available via DANE.
If no information via DANE can be obtained the flag DANE_VERIFY_NO_DANE_INFO
is set. If a DNSSEC signature is not available for the DANE
record then the verify flag DANE_VERIFY_NO_DNSSEC_DATA
is set.
Due to the many possible options of DANE, there is no single threat model countered. When notifying the user about DANE verification results it may be better to mention: DANE verification did not reject the certificate, rather than mentioning a successful DANE verification.
Note that this function is designed to be run in addition to
PKIX - certificate chain - verification. To be run independently
the DANE_VFLAG_ONLY_CHECK_EE_USAGE
flag should be specified;
then the function will check whether the key of the peer matches the
key advertised in the DANE entry.
Returns: a negative error code on error and DANE_E_SUCCESS
(0)
when the DANE entries were successfully parsed, irrespective of
whether they were verified (see verify
for that information). If
no usable entries were encountered DANE_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE
will be returned.
int dane_verify_session_crt (dane_state_t s, gnutls_session_t session, const char * hostname, const char * proto, unsigned int port, unsigned int sflags, unsigned int vflags, unsigned int * verify)
const char * dane_strerror (int error)
Note that the dane_state_t
structure that is accepted by both
verification functions is optional. It is required when many queries
are performed to optimize against multiple re-initializations of the
resolving back-end and loading of DNSSEC keys.
The following flags are returned by the verify functions to indicate the status of the verification.
DANE_VERIFY_CA_CONSTRAINTS_VIOLATED
The CA constraints were violated.
DANE_VERIFY_CERT_DIFFERS
The certificate obtained via DNS differs.
DANE_VERIFY_UNKNOWN_DANE_INFO
No known DANE data was found in the DNS record.
In order to generate a DANE TLSA entry to use in a DNS server you may use danetool (see danetool Invocation).
Next: TLS 1.3 re-authentication and re-key, Previous: Certificate verification, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
In TLS 1.2 or earlier there is no distinction between re-key, re-authentication, and re-negotiation.
All of these use cases are handled by the TLS’ rehandshake process. For that reason
in GnuTLS rehandshake is not transparent to the application, and the application
must explicitly take control of that process. In addition GnuTLS since version 3.5.0 will not
allow the peer to switch identities during a rehandshake.
The threat addressed by that behavior depends on the application protocol,
but primarily it protects applications from being misled
by a rehandshake which switches the peer’s identity. Applications can
disable this protection by using the GNUTLS_ALLOW_ID_CHANGE
flag in
gnutls_init.
The following paragraphs explain how to safely use the rehandshake process.
According to the TLS specification a client may initiate a rehandshake at any time. That can be achieved by calling gnutls_handshake and rely on its return value for the outcome of the handshake (the server may deny a rehandshake). If a server requests a re-handshake, then a call to gnutls_record_recv will return GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE in the client, instructing it to call gnutls_handshake. To deny a rehandshake request by the server it is recommended to send a warning alert of type GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION.
Due to limitations of early protocol versions, it is required to check whether safe renegotiation is in place, i.e., using gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status, which ensures that the server remains the same as the initial.
To make re-authentication transparent to the application when requested
by the server, use the GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH
flag on the
gnutls_init call. In that case the re-authentication will happen
in the call of gnutls_record_recv that received the
reauthentication request.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
Can be used to check whether safe renegotiation is being used in the current session.
Returns: 0 when safe renegotiation is not used and non (0) when safe renegotiation is used.
Since: 2.10.0
A server which wants to instruct the client to re-authenticate, should call gnutls_rehandshake and wait for the client to re-authenticate. It is recommended to only request re-handshake when safe renegotiation is enabled for that session (see gnutls_safe_renegotiation_status and the discussion in Safe renegotiation). A server could also encounter the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE error code while receiving data. That indicates a client-initiated re-handshake request. In that case the server could ignore that request, perform handshake (unsafe when done generally), or even drop the connection.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
This function can only be called in server side, and instructs a TLS 1.2 or earlier client to renegotiate parameters (perform a handshake), by sending a hello request message.
If this function succeeds, the calling application
should call gnutls_record_recv()
until GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
is returned to clear any pending data. If the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
error code is not seen, then the handshake request was
not followed by the peer (the TLS protocol does not require
the client to do, and such compliance should be handled
by the application protocol).
Once the GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
error code is seen, the
calling application should proceed to calling
gnutls_handshake()
to negotiate the new
parameters.
If the client does not wish to renegotiate parameters he
may reply with an alert message, and in that case the return code seen
by subsequent gnutls_record_recv()
will be
GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED
with the specific alert being
GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION
. A client may also choose to ignore
this request.
Under TLS 1.3 this function is equivalent to gnutls_session_key_update()
with the GNUTLS_KU_PEER
flag. In that case subsequent calls to
gnutls_record_recv()
will not return GNUTLS_E_REHANDSHAKE
, and
calls to gnutls_handshake()
in server side are a no-op.
This function always fails with GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST
when
called in client side.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, otherwise a negative error code.
Next: Parameter generation, Previous: TLS 1.2 re-authentication, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
The TLS 1.3 protocol distinguishes between re-key and re-authentication. The re-key process ensures that fresh keys are supplied to the already negotiated parameters, and on GnuTLS can be initiated using gnutls_session_key_update. The re-key process can be one-way (i.e., the calling party only changes its keys), or two-way where the peer is requested to change keys as well.
The re-authentication process, allows the connected client to switch
identity by presenting a new certificate. Unlike TLS 1.2, the server
is not allowed to change identities. That client re-authentication, or
post-handshake authentication can be initiated only by the server using
gnutls_reauth, and only if a client has advertised support for it.
Both server and client have to explicitly enable support for post handshake
authentication using the GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH
flag at gnutls_init.
A client receiving a re-authentication request will "see" the error code
GNUTLS_E_REAUTH_REQUEST
at gnutls_record_recv. At this
point, it should also call gnutls_reauth.
To make re-authentication transparent to the application when requested
by the server, use the GNUTLS_AUTO_REAUTH
and GNUTLS_POST_HANDSHAKE_AUTH
flags on the gnutls_init call. In that case the re-authentication will happen
in the call of gnutls_record_recv that received the
reauthentication request.
Next: Deriving keys for other applications/protocols, Previous: TLS 1.3 re-authentication and re-key, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
Prior to GnuTLS 3.6.0 for the ephemeral or anonymous Diffie-Hellman (DH) TLS ciphersuites the application was required to generate or provide DH parameters. That is no longer necessary as GnuTLS utilizes DH parameters and negotiation from [RFC7919].
Applications can tune the used parameters by explicitly specifying them in the priority string. In server side applications can set the minimum acceptable level of DH parameters by calling gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params, gnutls_anon_set_server_known_dh_params, or gnutls_psk_set_server_known_dh_params, depending on the type of the credentials, to set the lower acceptable parameter limits. Typical applications should rely on the default settings.
int gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, gnutls_sec_param_t sec_param)
int gnutls_anon_set_server_known_dh_params (gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t res, gnutls_sec_param_t sec_param)
int gnutls_psk_set_server_known_dh_params (gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t res, gnutls_sec_param_t sec_param)
Note that older than 3.5.6 versions of GnuTLS provided functions to generate or import arbitrary DH parameters from a file. This practice is still supported but discouraged in current versions. There is no known advantage from using random parameters, while there have been several occasions where applications were utilizing incorrect, weak or insecure parameters. This is the main reason GnuTLS includes the well-known parameters of [RFC7919] and recommends applications utilizing them.
In older applications which require to specify explicit DH parameters, we recommend
using certtool
(of GnuTLS 3.5.6 or later) with the --get-dh-params
option to obtain the FFDHE parameters discussed above. The output
parameters of the tool are in PKCS#3 format and can be imported by
most existing applications.
The following functions are still supported but considered obsolete.
int gnutls_dh_params_generate2 (gnutls_dh_params_t dparams, unsigned int bits)
int gnutls_dh_params_import_pkcs3 (gnutls_dh_params_t params, const gnutls_datum_t * pkcs3_params, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
void gnutls_certificate_set_dh_params (gnutls_certificate_credentials_t res, gnutls_dh_params_t dh_params)
Next: Channel Bindings, Previous: Parameter generation, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
In several cases, after a TLS connection is established, it is desirable to derive keys to be used in another application or protocol (e.g., in an other TLS session using pre-shared keys). The following describe GnuTLS’ implementation of RFC5705 to extract keys based on a session’s master secret.
The API to use is gnutls_prf_rfc5705. The
function needs to be provided with a label,
and additional context data to mix in the context
parameter.
session: is a gnutls_session_t
type.
label_size: length of the label
variable.
label: label used in PRF computation, typically a short string.
context_size: length of the extra
variable.
context: optional extra data to seed the PRF with.
outsize: size of pre-allocated output buffer to hold the output.
out: pre-allocated buffer to hold the generated data.
Exports keying material from TLS/DTLS session to an application, as specified in RFC5705.
In the TLS versions prior to 1.3, it applies the TLS Pseudo-Random-Function (PRF) on the master secret and the provided data, seeded with the client and server random fields.
In TLS 1.3, it applies HKDF on the exporter master secret derived from the master secret.
The label
variable usually contains a string denoting the purpose
for the generated data.
The context
variable can be used to add more data to the seed, after
the random variables. It can be used to make sure the
generated output is strongly connected to some additional data
(e.g., a string used in user authentication).
The output is placed in out
, which must be pre-allocated.
Note that, to provide the RFC5705 context, the context
variable
must be non-null.
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, or an error code.
Since: 3.4.4
For example, after establishing a TLS session using gnutls_handshake, you can obtain 32-bytes to be used as key, using this call:
#define MYLABEL "EXPORTER-My-protocol-name" #define MYCONTEXT "my-protocol's-1st-session" char out[32]; rc = gnutls_prf_rfc5705 (session, sizeof(MYLABEL)-1, MYLABEL, sizeof(MYCONTEXT)-1, MYCONTEXT, 32, out);
The output key depends on TLS’ master secret, and is the same on both client and server.
For legacy applications which need to use a more flexible API, there is
gnutls_prf, which in addition, allows to switch the mix of the
client and server random nonces, using the server_random_first
parameter.
For additional flexibility and low-level access to the TLS1.2 PRF,
there is a low-level TLS PRF interface called gnutls_prf_raw.
That however is not functional under newer protocol versions.
Next: Interoperability, Previous: Deriving keys for other applications/protocols, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
In user authentication protocols (e.g., EAP or SASL mechanisms) it is useful to have a unique string that identifies the secure channel that is used, to bind together the user authentication with the secure channel. This can protect against man-in-the-middle attacks in some situations. That unique string is called a “channel binding”. For background and discussion see [RFC5056].
In GnuTLS you can extract a channel binding using the gnutls_session_channel_binding function. Currently only the following types are supported:
GNUTLS_CB_TLS_UNIQUE
: corresponds to the tls-unique
channel binding for TLS defined in [RFC5929]
GNUTLS_CB_TLS_EXPORTER
: corresponds to the tls-exporter
channel binding for TLS defined in [RFC9266]
The following example describes how to print the channel binding data. Note that it must be run after a successful TLS handshake.
{ gnutls_datum_t cb; int rc; rc = gnutls_session_channel_binding (session, GNUTLS_CB_TLS_UNIQUE, &cb); if (rc) fprintf (stderr, "Channel binding error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror (rc)); else { size_t i; printf ("- Channel binding 'tls-unique': "); for (i = 0; i < cb.size; i++) printf ("%02x", cb.data[i]); printf ("\n"); } }
Next: Compatibility with the OpenSSL library, Previous: Channel Bindings, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
The TLS protocols support many ciphersuites, extensions and version numbers. As a result, few implementations are not able to properly interoperate once faced with extensions or version protocols they do not support and understand. The TLS protocol allows for a graceful downgrade to the commonly supported options, but practice shows it is not always implemented correctly.
Because there is no way to achieve maximum interoperability with broken peers without sacrificing security, GnuTLS ignores such peers by default. This might not be acceptable in cases where maximum compatibility is required. Thus we allow enabling compatibility with broken peers using priority strings (see Priority Strings). A conservative priority string that would disable certain TLS protocol options that are known to cause compatibility problems, is shown below.
NORMAL:%COMPAT
For very old broken peers that do not tolerate TLS version numbers over TLS 1.0 another priority string is:
NORMAL:-VERS-ALL:+VERS-TLS1.0:+VERS-SSL3.0:%COMPAT
This priority string will in addition to above, only enable SSL 3.0 and TLS 1.0 as protocols.
Previous: Interoperability, Up: Advanced topics [Contents][Index]
To ease GnuTLS’ integration with existing applications, a
compatibility layer with the OpenSSL library is included
in the gnutls-openssl
library. This compatibility layer is not
complete and it is not intended to completely re-implement the OpenSSL
API with GnuTLS. It only provides limited source-level
compatibility.
The prototypes for the compatibility functions are in the gnutls/openssl.h header file. The limitations imposed by the compatibility layer include:
Next: System-wide configuration of the library, Previous: How to use GnuTLS in applications, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
In this chapter several examples of real-world use cases are listed. The examples are simplified to promote readability and contain little or no error checking.
• Client examples | ||
• Server examples | ||
• More advanced client and servers | ||
• OCSP example | ||
• Miscellaneous examples |
Next: Server examples, Up: GnuTLS application examples [Contents][Index]
This section contains examples of TLS and SSL clients, using GnuTLS. Note that some of the examples require functions implemented by another example.
Next: Datagram TLS client example, Up: Client examples [Contents][Index]
Let’s assume now that we want to create a TCP client which communicates with servers that use X.509 certificate authentication. The following client is a very simple TLS client, which uses the high level verification functions for certificates, but does not support session resumption.
Note that this client utilizes functionality present in the latest GnuTLS version. For a reasonably portable version see Legacy client example with X.509 certificate support.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include "examples.h" /* A very basic TLS client, with X.509 authentication and server certificate * verification. Note that error recovery is minimal for simplicity. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \ assert(rval >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1], *desc; gnutls_datum_t out; int type; unsigned status; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred; if (gnutls_check_version("3.4.6") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.4.6 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); /* X509 stuff */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred)); /* sets the system trusted CAs for Internet PKI */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust(xcred)); /* If client holds a certificate it can be set using the following: * gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file (xcred, "cert.pem", "key.pem", GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); */ /* Initialize TLS session */ CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT)); CHECK(gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS, "www.example.com", strlen("www.example.com"))); /* It is recommended to use the default priorities */ CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session)); /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred)); gnutls_session_set_verify_cert(session, "www.example.com", 0); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { if (ret == GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_VERIFICATION_ERROR) { /* check certificate verification status */ type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session); status = gnutls_session_get_verify_cert_status(session); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print( status, type, &out, 0)); printf("cert verify output: %s\n", out.data); gnutls_free(out.data); } fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } else { desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } /* send data */ LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR)); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Client using a smart card with TLS, Previous: Client example with X.509 certificate support, Up: Client examples [Contents][Index]
This is a client that uses UDP to connect to a server. This is the DTLS equivalent to the TLS example with X.509 certificates.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <assert.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/dtls.h> /* A very basic Datagram TLS client, over UDP with X.509 authentication. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \ assert(rval >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" extern int udp_connect(void); extern void udp_close(int sd); extern int verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session); int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred; if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); /* X509 stuff */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred)); /* sets the system trusted CAs for Internet PKI */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust(xcred)); /* Initialize TLS session */ CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT | GNUTLS_DATAGRAM)); /* Use default priorities */ CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session)); /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred)); CHECK(gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS, "www.example.com", strlen("www.example.com"))); gnutls_session_set_verify_cert(session, "www.example.com", 0); /* connect to the peer */ sd = udp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); /* set the connection MTU */ gnutls_dtls_set_mtu(session, 1000); /* gnutls_dtls_set_timeouts(session, 1000, 60000); */ /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED || ret == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN); /* Note that DTLS may also receive GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET */ if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } /* It is suggested not to use GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR in DTLS * connections because the peer's closure message might * be lost */ CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR)); end: udp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Client with Resume capability example, Previous: Datagram TLS client example, Up: Client examples [Contents][Index]
This example will demonstrate how to load keys and certificates from a smart-card or any other PKCS #11 token, and use it in a TLS connection. The difference between this and the Client example with X.509 certificate support is that the client keys are provided as PKCS #11 URIs instead of files.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include <gnutls/pkcs11.h> #include <assert.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <fcntl.h> #include <getpass.h> /* for getpass() */ /* A TLS client that loads the certificate and key. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" #define MIN(x, y) (((x) < (y)) ? (x) : (y)) #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" /* The URLs of the objects can be obtained * using p11tool --list-all --login */ #define KEY_URL \ "pkcs11:manufacturer=SomeManufacturer;object=Private%20Key" \ ";objecttype=private;id=%db%5b%3e%b5%72%33" #define CERT_URL \ "pkcs11:manufacturer=SomeManufacturer;object=Certificate;" \ "objecttype=cert;id=db%5b%3e%b5%72%33" extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); static int pin_callback(void *user, int attempt, const char *token_url, const char *token_label, unsigned int flags, char *pin, size_t pin_max) { const char *password; int len; printf("PIN required for token '%s' with URL '%s'\n", token_label, token_url); if (flags & GNUTLS_PIN_FINAL_TRY) printf("*** This is the final try before locking!\n"); if (flags & GNUTLS_PIN_COUNT_LOW) printf("*** Only few tries left before locking!\n"); if (flags & GNUTLS_PIN_WRONG) printf("*** Wrong PIN\n"); password = getpass("Enter pin: "); /* FIXME: ensure that we are in UTF-8 locale */ if (password == NULL || password[0] == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "No password given\n"); exit(1); } len = MIN(pin_max - 1, strlen(password)); memcpy(pin, password, len); pin[len] = 0; return 0; } int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred; /* Allow connections to servers that have OpenPGP keys as well. */ if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); /* The PKCS11 private key operations may require PIN. * Register a callback. */ gnutls_pkcs11_set_pin_function(pin_callback, NULL); /* X509 stuff */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred)); /* sets the trusted cas file */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(xcred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM)); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(xcred, CERT_URL, KEY_URL, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER)); /* Note that there is no server certificate verification in this example */ /* Initialize TLS session */ CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT)); /* Use default priorities */ CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session)); /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred)); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ ret = gnutls_handshake(session); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } CHECK(gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR)); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Client example with SSH-style certificate verification, Previous: Client using a smart card with TLS, Up: Client examples [Contents][Index]
This is a modification of the simple client example. Here we demonstrate the use of session resumption. The client tries to connect once using TLS, close the connection and then try to establish a new connection using the previously negotiated data.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <string.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> extern void check_alert(gnutls_session_t session, int ret); extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); /* A very basic TLS client, with X.509 authentication and server certificate * verification as well as session resumption. * * Note that error recovery is minimal for simplicity. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \ assert(rval >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" int main(void) { int ret; int sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred; /* variables used in session resuming */ int t; gnutls_datum_t sdata; /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred)); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_system_trust(xcred)); for (t = 0; t < 2; t++) { /* connect 2 times to the server */ sd = tcp_connect(); CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT)); CHECK(gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS, "www.example.com", strlen("www.example.com"))); gnutls_session_set_verify_cert(session, "www.example.com", 0); CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session)); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred); if (t > 0) { /* if this is not the first time we connect */ CHECK(gnutls_session_set_data(session, sdata.data, sdata.size)); gnutls_free(sdata.data); } /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { printf("- Handshake was completed\n"); } if (t == 0) { /* the first time we connect */ /* get the session data */ CHECK(gnutls_session_get_data2(session, &sdata)); } else { /* the second time we connect */ /* check if we actually resumed the previous session */ if (gnutls_session_is_resumed(session) != 0) { printf("- Previous session was resumed\n"); } else { fprintf(stderr, "*** Previous session was NOT resumed\n"); } } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); } /* for() */ gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Previous: Client with Resume capability example, Up: Client examples [Contents][Index]
This is an alternative verification function that will use the X.509 certificate authorities for verification, but also assume an trust on first use (SSH-like) authentication system. That is the user is prompted on unknown public keys and known public keys are considered trusted.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include <assert.h> #include "examples.h" #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) /* This function will verify the peer's certificate, check * if the hostname matches. In addition it will perform an * SSH-style authentication, where ultimately trusted keys * are only the keys that have been seen before. */ int _ssh_verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session) { unsigned int status; const gnutls_datum_t *cert_list; unsigned int cert_list_size; int ret, type; gnutls_datum_t out; const char *hostname; /* read hostname */ hostname = gnutls_session_get_ptr(session); /* This verification function uses the trusted CAs in the credentials * structure. So you must have installed one or more CA certificates. */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3(session, hostname, &status)); type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print(status, type, &out, 0)); printf("%s", out.data); gnutls_free(out.data); if (status != 0) /* Certificate is not trusted */ return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR; /* Do SSH verification */ cert_list = gnutls_certificate_get_peers(session, &cert_list_size); if (cert_list == NULL) { printf("No certificate was found!\n"); return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR; } /* service may be obtained alternatively using getservbyport() */ ret = gnutls_verify_stored_pubkey(NULL, NULL, hostname, "https", type, &cert_list[0], 0); if (ret == GNUTLS_E_NO_CERTIFICATE_FOUND) { printf("Host %s is not known.", hostname); if (status == 0) printf("Its certificate is valid for %s.\n", hostname); /* the certificate must be printed and user must be asked on * whether it is trustworthy. --see gnutls_x509_crt_print() */ /* if not trusted */ return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR; } else if (ret == GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_KEY_MISMATCH) { printf("Warning: host %s is known but has another key associated.", hostname); printf("It might be that the server has multiple keys, or you are under attack\n"); if (status == 0) printf("Its certificate is valid for %s.\n", hostname); /* the certificate must be printed and user must be asked on * whether it is trustworthy. --see gnutls_x509_crt_print() */ /* if not trusted */ return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR; } else if (ret < 0) { printf("gnutls_verify_stored_pubkey: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); return ret; } /* user trusts the key -> store it */ if (ret != 0) { CHECK(gnutls_store_pubkey(NULL, NULL, hostname, "https", type, &cert_list[0], 0, 0)); } /* notify gnutls to continue handshake normally */ return 0; }
Next: More advanced client and servers, Previous: Client examples, Up: GnuTLS application examples [Contents][Index]
This section contains examples of TLS and SSL servers, using GnuTLS.
• Echo server with X.509 authentication | ||
• DTLS echo server with X.509 authentication |
This example is a very simple echo server which supports X.509 authentication.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <errno.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <string.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <assert.h> #define KEYFILE "key.pem" #define CERTFILE "cert.pem" #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" #define CRLFILE "crl.pem" #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED) /* The OCSP status file contains up to date information about revocation * of the server's certificate. That can be periodically be updated * using: * $ ocsptool --ask --load-cert your_cert.pem --load-issuer your_issuer.pem * --load-signer your_issuer.pem --outfile ocsp-status.der */ #define OCSP_STATUS_FILE "ocsp-status.der" /* This is a sample TLS 1.0 echo server, using X.509 authentication and * OCSP stapling support. */ #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */ int main(void) { int listen_sd; int sd, ret; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t x509_cred; gnutls_priority_t priority_cache; struct sockaddr_in sa_serv; struct sockaddr_in sa_cli; socklen_t client_len; char topbuf[512]; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; int optval = 1; /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&x509_cred)); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(x509_cred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM)); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file(x509_cred, CRLFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM)); /* The following code sets the certificate key pair as well as, * an OCSP response which corresponds to it. It is possible * to set multiple key-pairs and multiple OCSP status responses * (the latter since 3.5.6). See the manual pages of the individual * functions for more information. */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(x509_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM)); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_ocsp_status_request_file( x509_cred, OCSP_STATUS_FILE, 0)); CHECK(gnutls_priority_init(&priority_cache, NULL, NULL)); /* Instead of the default options as shown above one could specify * additional options such as server precedence in ciphersuite selection * as follows: * gnutls_priority_init2(&priority_cache, * "%SERVER_PRECEDENCE", * NULL, GNUTLS_PRIORITY_INIT_DEF_APPEND); */ #if GNUTLS_VERSION_NUMBER >= 0x030506 /* only available since GnuTLS 3.5.6, on previous versions see * gnutls_certificate_set_dh_params(). */ gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params(x509_cred, GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM); #endif /* Socket operations */ listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv)); sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET; sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY; sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */ setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval, sizeof(int)); bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv)); listen(listen_sd, 1024); printf("Server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT); client_len = sizeof(sa_cli); for (;;) { CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER)); CHECK(gnutls_priority_set(session, priority_cache)); CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, x509_cred)); /* We don't request any certificate from the client. * If we did we would need to verify it. One way of * doing that is shown in the "Verifying a certificate" * example. */ gnutls_certificate_server_set_request(session, GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len); printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n", inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf, sizeof(topbuf)), ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port)); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session)); if (ret < 0) { close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); continue; } printf("- Handshake was completed\n"); /* see the Getting peer's information example */ /* print_info(session); */ for (;;) { LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n"); break; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "\n*** Received corrupted " "data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n", ret); break; } else if (ret > 0) { /* echo data back to the client */ CHECK(gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret)); } } printf("\n"); /* do not wait for the peer to close the connection. */ LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR)); close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); } close(listen_sd); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(x509_cred); gnutls_priority_deinit(priority_cache); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Previous: Echo server with X.509 authentication, Up: Server examples [Contents][Index]
This example is a very simple echo server using Datagram TLS and X.509 authentication.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <errno.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <sys/select.h> #include <netdb.h> #include <string.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/dtls.h> #define KEYFILE "key.pem" #define CERTFILE "cert.pem" #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" #define CRLFILE "crl.pem" /* This is a sample DTLS echo server, using X.509 authentication. * Note that error checking is minimal to simplify the example. */ #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED) #define MAX_BUFFER 1024 #define PORT 5557 typedef struct { gnutls_session_t session; int fd; struct sockaddr *cli_addr; socklen_t cli_addr_size; } priv_data_st; static int pull_timeout_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr, unsigned int ms); static ssize_t push_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, const void *data, size_t size); static ssize_t pull_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, void *data, size_t size); static const char *human_addr(const struct sockaddr *sa, socklen_t salen, char *buf, size_t buflen); static int wait_for_connection(int fd); /* Use global credentials and parameters to simplify * the example. */ static gnutls_certificate_credentials_t x509_cred; static gnutls_priority_t priority_cache; int main(void) { int listen_sd; int sock, ret; struct sockaddr_in sa_serv; struct sockaddr_in cli_addr; socklen_t cli_addr_size; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUFFER]; priv_data_st priv; gnutls_datum_t cookie_key; gnutls_dtls_prestate_st prestate; int mtu = 1400; unsigned char sequence[8]; /* this must be called once in the program */ gnutls_global_init(); gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&x509_cred); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(x509_cred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file(x509_cred, CRLFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); ret = gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(x509_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); if (ret < 0) { printf("No certificate or key were found\n"); exit(1); } gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params(x509_cred, GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM); /* pre-3.6.3 equivalent: * gnutls_priority_init(&priority_cache, * "NORMAL:-VERS-TLS-ALL:+VERS-DTLS1.0:%SERVER_PRECEDENCE", * NULL); */ gnutls_priority_init2(&priority_cache, "%SERVER_PRECEDENCE", NULL, GNUTLS_PRIORITY_INIT_DEF_APPEND); gnutls_key_generate(&cookie_key, GNUTLS_COOKIE_KEY_SIZE); /* Socket operations */ listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv)); sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET; sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY; sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); { /* DTLS requires the IP don't fragment (DF) bit to be set */ #if defined(IP_DONTFRAG) int optval = 1; setsockopt(listen_sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_DONTFRAG, (const void *)&optval, sizeof(optval)); #elif defined(IP_MTU_DISCOVER) int optval = IP_PMTUDISC_DO; setsockopt(listen_sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_MTU_DISCOVER, (const void *)&optval, sizeof(optval)); #endif } bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv)); printf("UDP server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT); for (;;) { printf("Waiting for connection...\n"); sock = wait_for_connection(listen_sd); if (sock < 0) continue; cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr); ret = recvfrom(sock, buffer, sizeof(buffer), MSG_PEEK, (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, &cli_addr_size); if (ret > 0) { memset(&prestate, 0, sizeof(prestate)); ret = gnutls_dtls_cookie_verify(&cookie_key, &cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr), buffer, ret, &prestate); if (ret < 0) { /* cookie not valid */ priv_data_st s; memset(&s, 0, sizeof(s)); s.fd = sock; s.cli_addr = (void *)&cli_addr; s.cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr); printf("Sending hello verify request to %s\n", human_addr((struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr), buffer, sizeof(buffer))); gnutls_dtls_cookie_send( &cookie_key, &cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr), &prestate, (gnutls_transport_ptr_t)&s, push_func); /* discard peeked data */ recvfrom(sock, buffer, sizeof(buffer), 0, (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, &cli_addr_size); usleep(100); continue; } printf("Accepted connection from %s\n", human_addr((struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr), buffer, sizeof(buffer))); } else continue; gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER | GNUTLS_DATAGRAM); gnutls_priority_set(session, priority_cache); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, x509_cred); gnutls_dtls_prestate_set(session, &prestate); gnutls_dtls_set_mtu(session, mtu); priv.session = session; priv.fd = sock; priv.cli_addr = (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr; priv.cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr); gnutls_transport_set_ptr(session, &priv); gnutls_transport_set_push_function(session, push_func); gnutls_transport_set_pull_function(session, pull_func); gnutls_transport_set_pull_timeout_function(session, pull_timeout_func); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session)); /* Note that DTLS may also receive GNUTLS_E_LARGE_PACKET. * In that case the MTU should be adjusted. */ if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Error in handshake(): %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); gnutls_deinit(session); continue; } printf("- Handshake was completed\n"); for (;;) { LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv_seq(session, buffer, MAX_BUFFER, sequence)); if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); continue; } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Error in recv(): %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); break; } if (ret == 0) { printf("EOF\n\n"); break; } buffer[ret] = 0; printf("received[%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x%.2x]: %s\n", sequence[0], sequence[1], sequence[2], sequence[3], sequence[4], sequence[5], sequence[6], sequence[7], buffer); /* reply back */ LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret)); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Error in send(): %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); break; } } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR)); gnutls_deinit(session); } close(listen_sd); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(x509_cred); gnutls_priority_deinit(priority_cache); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; } static int wait_for_connection(int fd) { fd_set rd, wr; int n; FD_ZERO(&rd); FD_ZERO(&wr); FD_SET(fd, &rd); /* waiting part */ n = select(fd + 1, &rd, &wr, NULL, NULL); if (n == -1 && errno == EINTR) return -1; if (n < 0) { perror("select()"); exit(1); } return fd; } /* Wait for data to be received within a timeout period in milliseconds */ static int pull_timeout_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t ptr, unsigned int ms) { fd_set rfds; struct timeval tv; priv_data_st *priv = ptr; struct sockaddr_in cli_addr; socklen_t cli_addr_size; int ret; char c; FD_ZERO(&rfds); FD_SET(priv->fd, &rfds); tv.tv_sec = ms / 1000; tv.tv_usec = (ms % 1000) * 1000; ret = select(priv->fd + 1, &rfds, NULL, NULL, &tv); if (ret <= 0) return ret; /* only report ok if the next message is from the peer we expect * from */ cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr); ret = recvfrom(priv->fd, &c, 1, MSG_PEEK, (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, &cli_addr_size); if (ret > 0) { if (cli_addr_size == priv->cli_addr_size && memcmp(&cli_addr, priv->cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr)) == 0) return 1; } return 0; } static ssize_t push_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, const void *data, size_t size) { priv_data_st *priv = p; return sendto(priv->fd, data, size, 0, priv->cli_addr, priv->cli_addr_size); } static ssize_t pull_func(gnutls_transport_ptr_t p, void *data, size_t size) { priv_data_st *priv = p; struct sockaddr_in cli_addr; socklen_t cli_addr_size; char buffer[64]; int ret; cli_addr_size = sizeof(cli_addr); ret = recvfrom(priv->fd, data, size, 0, (struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, &cli_addr_size); if (ret == -1) return ret; if (cli_addr_size == priv->cli_addr_size && memcmp(&cli_addr, priv->cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr)) == 0) return ret; printf("Denied connection from %s\n", human_addr((struct sockaddr *)&cli_addr, sizeof(cli_addr), buffer, sizeof(buffer))); gnutls_transport_set_errno(priv->session, EAGAIN); return -1; } static const char *human_addr(const struct sockaddr *sa, socklen_t salen, char *buf, size_t buflen) { const char *save_buf = buf; size_t l; if (!buf || !buflen) return NULL; *buf = '\0'; switch (sa->sa_family) { #if HAVE_IPV6 case AF_INET6: snprintf(buf, buflen, "IPv6 "); break; #endif case AF_INET: snprintf(buf, buflen, "IPv4 "); break; } l = strlen(buf); buf += l; buflen -= l; if (getnameinfo(sa, salen, buf, buflen, NULL, 0, NI_NUMERICHOST) != 0) return NULL; l = strlen(buf); buf += l; buflen -= l; strncat(buf, " port ", buflen); l = strlen(buf); buf += l; buflen -= l; if (getnameinfo(sa, salen, NULL, 0, buf, buflen, NI_NUMERICSERV) != 0) return NULL; return save_buf; }
Next: OCSP example, Previous: Server examples, Up: GnuTLS application examples [Contents][Index]
This section has various, more advanced topics in client and servers.
Next: Using a callback to select the certificate to use, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
The simplest client using TLS is the one that doesn’t do any authentication. This means no external certificates or passwords are needed to set up the connection. As could be expected, the connection is vulnerable to man-in-the-middle (active or redirection) attacks. However, the data are integrity protected and encrypted from passive eavesdroppers.
Note that due to the vulnerable nature of this method very few public servers support it.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> /* A very basic TLS client, with anonymous authentication. */ #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \ assert(rval >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_anon_client_credentials_t anoncred; /* Need to enable anonymous KX specifically. */ gnutls_global_init(); gnutls_anon_allocate_client_credentials(&anoncred); /* Initialize TLS session */ gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT); /* Use default priorities */ gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "PERFORMANCE:+ANON-ECDH:+ANON-DH", NULL); /* put the anonymous credentials to the current session */ gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_ANON, anoncred); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR)); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_anon_free_client_credentials(anoncred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Obtaining session information, Previous: Client example with anonymous authentication, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
There are cases where a client holds several certificate and key pairs, and may not want to load all of them in the credentials structure. The following example demonstrates the use of the certificate selection callback.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include <gnutls/abstract.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/stat.h> #include <fcntl.h> /* A TLS client that loads the certificate and key. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" #define CERT_FILE "cert.pem" #define KEY_FILE "key.pem" #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); static int cert_callback(gnutls_session_t session, const gnutls_datum_t *req_ca_rdn, int nreqs, const gnutls_pk_algorithm_t *sign_algos, int sign_algos_length, gnutls_pcert_st **pcert, unsigned int *pcert_length, gnutls_privkey_t *pkey); gnutls_pcert_st pcrt; gnutls_privkey_t key; /* Load the certificate and the private key. */ static void load_keys(void) { gnutls_datum_t data; CHECK(gnutls_load_file(CERT_FILE, &data)); CHECK(gnutls_pcert_import_x509_raw(&pcrt, &data, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM, 0)); gnutls_free(data.data); CHECK(gnutls_load_file(KEY_FILE, &data)); CHECK(gnutls_privkey_init(&key)); CHECK(gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw(key, &data, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM, NULL, 0)); gnutls_free(data.data); } int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred; if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); load_keys(); /* X509 stuff */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred)); /* sets the trusted cas file */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(xcred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM)); gnutls_certificate_set_retrieve_function2(xcred, cert_callback); /* Initialize TLS session */ CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT)); /* Use default priorities */ CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session)); /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred)); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ ret = gnutls_handshake(session); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } CHECK(gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR)); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; } /* This callback should be associated with a session by calling * gnutls_certificate_client_set_retrieve_function( session, cert_callback), * before a handshake. */ static int cert_callback(gnutls_session_t session, const gnutls_datum_t *req_ca_rdn, int nreqs, const gnutls_pk_algorithm_t *sign_algos, int sign_algos_length, gnutls_pcert_st **pcert, unsigned int *pcert_length, gnutls_privkey_t *pkey) { char issuer_dn[256]; int i, ret; size_t len; gnutls_certificate_type_t type; /* Print the server's trusted CAs */ if (nreqs > 0) printf("- Server's trusted authorities:\n"); else printf("- Server did not send us any trusted authorities names.\n"); /* print the names (if any) */ for (i = 0; i < nreqs; i++) { len = sizeof(issuer_dn); ret = gnutls_x509_rdn_get(&req_ca_rdn[i], issuer_dn, &len); if (ret >= 0) { printf(" [%d]: ", i); printf("%s\n", issuer_dn); } } /* Select a certificate and return it. * The certificate must be of any of the "sign algorithms" * supported by the server. */ type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session); if (type == GNUTLS_CRT_X509) { *pcert_length = 1; *pcert = &pcrt; *pkey = key; } else { return -1; } return 0; }
Next: Advanced certificate verification example, Previous: Using a callback to select the certificate to use, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
Most of the times it is desirable to know the security properties of the current established session. This includes the underlying ciphers and the protocols involved. That is the purpose of the following function. Note that this function will print meaningful values only if called after a successful gnutls_handshake.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include "examples.h" /* This function will print some details of the * given session. */ int print_info(gnutls_session_t session) { gnutls_credentials_type_t cred; gnutls_kx_algorithm_t kx; int dhe, ecdh, group; char *desc; /* get a description of the session connection, protocol, * cipher/key exchange */ desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); if (desc != NULL) { printf("- Session: %s\n", desc); } dhe = ecdh = 0; kx = gnutls_kx_get(session); /* Check the authentication type used and switch * to the appropriate. */ cred = gnutls_auth_get_type(session); switch (cred) { #ifdef ENABLE_SRP case GNUTLS_CRD_SRP: printf("- SRP session with username %s\n", gnutls_srp_server_get_username(session)); break; #endif case GNUTLS_CRD_PSK: /* This returns NULL in server side. */ if (gnutls_psk_client_get_hint(session) != NULL) printf("- PSK authentication. PSK hint '%s'\n", gnutls_psk_client_get_hint(session)); /* This returns NULL in client side. */ if (gnutls_psk_server_get_username(session) != NULL) printf("- PSK authentication. Connected as '%s'\n", gnutls_psk_server_get_username(session)); if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_PSK) ecdh = 1; else if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_PSK) dhe = 1; break; case GNUTLS_CRD_ANON: /* anonymous authentication */ printf("- Anonymous authentication.\n"); if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ANON_ECDH) ecdh = 1; else if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ANON_DH) dhe = 1; break; case GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE: /* certificate authentication */ /* Check if we have been using ephemeral Diffie-Hellman. */ if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_RSA || kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_DSS) dhe = 1; else if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_RSA || kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_ECDSA) ecdh = 1; /* if the certificate list is available, then * print some information about it. */ print_x509_certificate_info(session); break; default: break; } /* switch */ /* read the negotiated group - if any */ group = gnutls_group_get(session); if (group != 0) { printf("- Negotiated group %s\n", gnutls_group_get_name(group)); } else { if (ecdh != 0) printf("- Ephemeral ECDH using curve %s\n", gnutls_ecc_curve_get_name( gnutls_ecc_curve_get(session))); else if (dhe != 0) printf("- Ephemeral DH using prime of %d bits\n", gnutls_dh_get_prime_bits(session)); } return 0; }
Next: Client example with PSK authentication, Previous: Obtaining session information, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
An example is listed below which uses the high level verification functions to verify a given certificate chain against a set of CAs and CRLs.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include "examples.h" #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) /* All the available CRLs */ gnutls_x509_crl_t *crl_list; int crl_list_size; /* All the available trusted CAs */ gnutls_x509_crt_t *ca_list; int ca_list_size; static int print_details_func(gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, unsigned int verification_output); /* This function will try to verify the peer's certificate chain, and * also check if the hostname matches. */ void verify_certificate_chain(const char *hostname, const gnutls_datum_t *cert_chain, int cert_chain_length) { int i; gnutls_x509_trust_list_t tlist; gnutls_x509_crt_t *cert; gnutls_datum_t txt; unsigned int output; /* Initialize the trusted certificate list. This should be done * once on initialization. gnutls_x509_crt_list_import2() and * gnutls_x509_crl_list_import2() can be used to load them. */ CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_init(&tlist, 0)); CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_cas(tlist, ca_list, ca_list_size, 0)); CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_add_crls(tlist, crl_list, crl_list_size, GNUTLS_TL_VERIFY_CRL, 0)); cert = gnutls_calloc(cert_chain_length, sizeof(*cert)); assert(cert != NULL); /* Import all the certificates in the chain to * native certificate format. */ for (i = 0; i < cert_chain_length; i++) { CHECK(gnutls_x509_crt_init(&cert[i])); CHECK(gnutls_x509_crt_import(cert[i], &cert_chain[i], GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER)); } CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_named_crt( tlist, cert[0], hostname, strlen(hostname), GNUTLS_VERIFY_DISABLE_CRL_CHECKS, &output, print_details_func)); /* if this certificate is not explicitly trusted verify against CAs */ if (output != 0) { CHECK(gnutls_x509_trust_list_verify_crt( tlist, cert, cert_chain_length, 0, &output, print_details_func)); } if (output & GNUTLS_CERT_INVALID) { fprintf(stderr, "Not trusted\n"); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print( output, GNUTLS_CRT_X509, &txt, 0)); fprintf(stderr, "Error: %s\n", txt.data); gnutls_free(txt.data); } else fprintf(stderr, "Trusted\n"); /* Check if the name in the first certificate matches our destination! */ if (!gnutls_x509_crt_check_hostname(cert[0], hostname)) { printf("The certificate's owner does not match hostname '%s'\n", hostname); } for (i = 0; i < cert_chain_length; i++) { gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(cert[i]); } gnutls_free(cert); gnutls_x509_trust_list_deinit(tlist, 1); return; } static int print_details_func(gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_x509_crl_t crl, unsigned int verification_output) { char name[512]; char issuer_name[512]; size_t name_size; size_t issuer_name_size; issuer_name_size = sizeof(issuer_name); gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn(cert, issuer_name, &issuer_name_size); name_size = sizeof(name); gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn(cert, name, &name_size); fprintf(stdout, "\tSubject: %s\n", name); fprintf(stdout, "\tIssuer: %s\n", issuer_name); if (issuer != NULL) { issuer_name_size = sizeof(issuer_name); gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn(issuer, issuer_name, &issuer_name_size); fprintf(stdout, "\tVerified against: %s\n", issuer_name); } if (crl != NULL) { issuer_name_size = sizeof(issuer_name); gnutls_x509_crl_get_issuer_dn(crl, issuer_name, &issuer_name_size); fprintf(stdout, "\tVerified against CRL of: %s\n", issuer_name); } fprintf(stdout, "\tVerification output: %x\n\n", verification_output); return 0; }
Next: Client example with SRP authentication, Previous: Advanced certificate verification example, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
The following client is a very simple PSK TLS client which connects to a server and authenticates using a username and a key.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> /* A very basic TLS client, with PSK authentication. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \ assert(rval >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; const char *err; gnutls_psk_client_credentials_t pskcred; const gnutls_datum_t key = { (void *)"DEADBEEF", 8 }; if (gnutls_check_version("3.6.3") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.6.3 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); CHECK(gnutls_psk_allocate_client_credentials(&pskcred)); CHECK(gnutls_psk_set_client_credentials(pskcred, "test", &key, GNUTLS_PSK_KEY_HEX)); /* Initialize TLS session */ CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT)); ret = gnutls_set_default_priority_append( session, "-KX-ALL:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK", &err, 0); /* Alternative for pre-3.6.3 versions: * gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK", &err) */ if (ret < 0) { if (ret == GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST) { fprintf(stderr, "Syntax error at: %s\n", err); } exit(1); } /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_PSK, pskcred)); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR)); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_psk_free_client_credentials(pskcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Legacy client example with X.509 certificate support, Previous: Client example with PSK authentication, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
The following client is a very simple SRP TLS client which connects to a server and authenticates using a username and a password. The server may authenticate itself using a certificate, and in that case it has to be verified.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> /* Those functions are defined in other examples. */ extern void check_alert(gnutls_session_t session, int ret); extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define USERNAME "user" #define PASSWORD "pass" #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" int main(void) { int ret; int sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_srp_client_credentials_t srp_cred; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cert_cred; if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ gnutls_global_init(); gnutls_srp_allocate_client_credentials(&srp_cred); gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&cert_cred); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(cert_cred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); gnutls_srp_set_client_credentials(srp_cred, USERNAME, PASSWORD); /* connects to server */ sd = tcp_connect(); /* Initialize TLS session */ gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT); /* Set the priorities. */ gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL:+SRP:+SRP-RSA:+SRP-DSS", NULL); /* put the SRP credentials to the current session */ gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_SRP, srp_cred); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, cert_cred); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG)); ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF); if (gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) != 0 || ret == 0) { if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n"); goto end; } else { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } } else check_alert(session, ret); if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_srp_free_client_credentials(srp_cred); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(cert_cred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Client example in C++, Previous: Client example with SRP authentication, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
For applications that need to maintain compatibility with the GnuTLS 3.1.x library, this client example is identical to Client example with X.509 certificate support but utilizes APIs that were available in GnuTLS 3.1.4.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <assert.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include "examples.h" /* A very basic TLS client, with X.509 authentication and server certificate * verification utilizing the GnuTLS 3.1.x API. * Note that error recovery is minimal for simplicity. */ #define CHECK(x) assert((x) >= 0) #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED); \ assert(rval >= 0) #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" extern int tcp_connect(void); extern void tcp_close(int sd); static int _verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session); int main(void) { int ret, sd, ii; gnutls_session_t session; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t xcred; if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } CHECK(gnutls_global_init()); /* X509 stuff */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&xcred)); /* sets the trusted cas file */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(xcred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM)); gnutls_certificate_set_verify_function(xcred, _verify_certificate_callback); /* If client holds a certificate it can be set using the following: * gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file (xcred, "cert.pem", "key.pem", GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); */ /* Initialize TLS session */ CHECK(gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_CLIENT)); gnutls_session_set_ptr(session, (void *)"www.example.com"); gnutls_server_name_set(session, GNUTLS_NAME_DNS, "www.example.com", strlen("www.example.com")); /* use default priorities */ CHECK(gnutls_set_default_priority(session)); #if 0 /* if more fine-graned control is required */ ret = gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL", &err); if (ret < 0) { if (ret == GNUTLS_E_INVALID_REQUEST) { fprintf(stderr, "Syntax error at: %s\n", err); } exit(1); } #endif /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ CHECK(gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, xcred)); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); gnutls_handshake_set_timeout(session, GNUTLS_DEFAULT_HANDSHAKE_TIMEOUT); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake failed\n"); gnutls_perror(ret); goto end; } else { char *desc; desc = gnutls_session_get_desc(session); printf("- Session info: %s\n", desc); gnutls_free(desc); } LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_send(session, MSG, strlen(MSG))); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("- Peer has closed the TLS connection\n"); goto end; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); goto end; } if (ret > 0) { printf("- Received %d bytes: ", ret); for (ii = 0; ii < ret; ii++) { fputc(buffer[ii], stdout); } fputs("\n", stdout); } CHECK(gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR)); end: tcp_close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(xcred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; } /* This function will verify the peer's certificate, and check * if the hostname matches, as well as the activation, expiration dates. */ static int _verify_certificate_callback(gnutls_session_t session) { unsigned int status; int type; const char *hostname; gnutls_datum_t out; /* read hostname */ hostname = gnutls_session_get_ptr(session); /* This verification function uses the trusted CAs in the credentials * structure. So you must have installed one or more CA certificates. */ CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verify_peers3(session, hostname, &status)); type = gnutls_certificate_type_get(session); CHECK(gnutls_certificate_verification_status_print(status, type, &out, 0)); printf("%s", out.data); gnutls_free(out.data); if (status != 0) /* Certificate is not trusted */ return GNUTLS_E_CERTIFICATE_ERROR; /* notify gnutls to continue handshake normally */ return 0; }
Next: Echo server with PSK authentication, Previous: Legacy client example with X.509 certificate support, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
The following client is a simple example of a client client utilizing the GnuTLS C++ API.
#include <config.h> #include <iostream> #include <stdexcept> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/gnutlsxx.h> #include <cstring> /* for strlen */ /* A very basic TLS client, with anonymous authentication. * written by Eduardo Villanueva Che. */ #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define SA struct sockaddr #define CAFILE "ca.pem" #define MSG "GET / HTTP/1.0\r\n\r\n" extern "C" { int tcp_connect(void); void tcp_close(int sd); } int main(void) { int sd = -1; gnutls_global_init(); try { /* Allow connections to servers that have OpenPGP keys as well. */ gnutls::client_session session; /* X509 stuff */ gnutls::certificate_credentials credentials; /* sets the trusted cas file */ credentials.set_x509_trust_file(CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); /* put the x509 credentials to the current session */ session.set_credentials(credentials); /* Use default priorities */ session.set_priority ("NORMAL", NULL); /* connect to the peer */ sd = tcp_connect(); session.set_transport_ptr((gnutls_transport_ptr_t) (ptrdiff_t)sd); /* Perform the TLS handshake */ int ret = session.handshake(); if (ret < 0) { throw std::runtime_error("Handshake failed"); } else { std::cout << "- Handshake was completed" << std::endl; } session.send(MSG, strlen(MSG)); char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; ret = session.recv(buffer, MAX_BUF); if (ret == 0) { throw std::runtime_error("Peer has closed the TLS connection"); } else if (ret < 0) { throw std::runtime_error(gnutls_strerror(ret)); } std::cout << "- Received " << ret << " bytes:" << std::endl; std::cout.write(buffer, ret); std::cout << std::endl; session.bye(GNUTLS_SHUT_RDWR); } catch (std::exception &ex) { std::cerr << "Exception caught: " << ex.what() << std::endl; } if (sd != -1) tcp_close(sd); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Echo server with SRP authentication, Previous: Client example in C++, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
This is a server which supports PSK authentication.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <errno.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <string.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #define KEYFILE "key.pem" #define CERTFILE "cert.pem" #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" #define CRLFILE "crl.pem" #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED) /* This is a sample TLS echo server, supporting X.509 and PSK authentication. */ #define SOCKET_ERR(err, s) \ if (err == -1) { \ perror(s); \ return (1); \ } #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */ static int pskfunc(gnutls_session_t session, const char *username, gnutls_datum_t *key) { printf("psk: username %s\n", username); key->data = gnutls_malloc(4); key->data[0] = 0xDE; key->data[1] = 0xAD; key->data[2] = 0xBE; key->data[3] = 0xEF; key->size = 4; return 0; } int main(void) { int err, listen_sd; int sd, ret; struct sockaddr_in sa_serv; struct sockaddr_in sa_cli; socklen_t client_len; char topbuf[512]; gnutls_session_t session; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t x509_cred; gnutls_psk_server_credentials_t psk_cred; gnutls_priority_t priority_cache; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; int optval = 1; int kx; if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ gnutls_global_init(); gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&x509_cred); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(x509_cred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_crl_file(x509_cred, CRLFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(x509_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); gnutls_psk_allocate_server_credentials(&psk_cred); gnutls_psk_set_server_credentials_function(psk_cred, pskfunc); /* pre-3.6.3 equivalent: * gnutls_priority_init(&priority_cache, * "NORMAL:+PSK:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK", * NULL); */ gnutls_priority_init2(&priority_cache, "+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK", NULL, GNUTLS_PRIORITY_INIT_DEF_APPEND); gnutls_certificate_set_known_dh_params(x509_cred, GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM); /* Socket operations */ listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); SOCKET_ERR(listen_sd, "socket"); memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv)); sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET; sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY; sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */ setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval, sizeof(int)); err = bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv)); SOCKET_ERR(err, "bind"); err = listen(listen_sd, 1024); SOCKET_ERR(err, "listen"); printf("Server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT); client_len = sizeof(sa_cli); for (;;) { gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER); gnutls_priority_set(session, priority_cache); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, x509_cred); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_PSK, psk_cred); /* request client certificate if any. */ gnutls_certificate_server_set_request(session, GNUTLS_CERT_REQUEST); sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len); printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n", inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf, sizeof(topbuf)), ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port)); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session)); if (ret < 0) { close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); continue; } printf("- Handshake was completed\n"); kx = gnutls_kx_get(session); if (kx == GNUTLS_KX_PSK || kx == GNUTLS_KX_DHE_PSK || kx == GNUTLS_KX_ECDHE_PSK) { printf("- User %s was connected\n", gnutls_psk_server_get_username(session)); } /* see the Getting peer's information example */ /* print_info(session); */ for (;;) { LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n"); break; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "\n*** Received corrupted " "data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n", ret); break; } else if (ret > 0) { /* echo data back to the client */ gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret); } } printf("\n"); /* do not wait for the peer to close the connection. */ LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR)); close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); } close(listen_sd); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(x509_cred); gnutls_psk_free_server_credentials(psk_cred); gnutls_priority_deinit(priority_cache); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Echo server with anonymous authentication, Previous: Echo server with PSK authentication, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
This is a server which supports SRP authentication. It is also possible to combine this functionality with a certificate server. Here it is separate for simplicity.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <errno.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <string.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #define SRP_PASSWD "tpasswd" #define SRP_PASSWD_CONF "tpasswd.conf" #define KEYFILE "key.pem" #define CERTFILE "cert.pem" #define CAFILE "/etc/ssl/certs/ca-certificates.crt" #define LOOP_CHECK(rval, cmd) \ do { \ rval = cmd; \ } while (rval == GNUTLS_E_AGAIN || rval == GNUTLS_E_INTERRUPTED) /* This is a sample TLS-SRP echo server. */ #define SOCKET_ERR(err, s) \ if (err == -1) { \ perror(s); \ return (1); \ } #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */ int main(void) { int err, listen_sd; int sd, ret; struct sockaddr_in sa_serv; struct sockaddr_in sa_cli; socklen_t client_len; char topbuf[512]; gnutls_session_t session; gnutls_srp_server_credentials_t srp_cred; gnutls_certificate_credentials_t cert_cred; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; int optval = 1; char name[256]; strcpy(name, "Echo Server"); if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ gnutls_global_init(); /* SRP_PASSWD a password file (created with the included srptool utility) */ gnutls_srp_allocate_server_credentials(&srp_cred); gnutls_srp_set_server_credentials_file(srp_cred, SRP_PASSWD, SRP_PASSWD_CONF); gnutls_certificate_allocate_credentials(&cert_cred); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_trust_file(cert_cred, CAFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); gnutls_certificate_set_x509_key_file(cert_cred, CERTFILE, KEYFILE, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); /* TCP socket operations */ listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); SOCKET_ERR(listen_sd, "socket"); memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv)); sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET; sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY; sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */ setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval, sizeof(int)); err = bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv)); SOCKET_ERR(err, "bind"); err = listen(listen_sd, 1024); SOCKET_ERR(err, "listen"); printf("%s ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", name, PORT); client_len = sizeof(sa_cli); for (;;) { gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER); gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL" ":-KX-ALL:+SRP:+SRP-DSS:+SRP-RSA", NULL); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_SRP, srp_cred); /* for the certificate authenticated ciphersuites. */ gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_CERTIFICATE, cert_cred); /* We don't request any certificate from the client. * If we did we would need to verify it. One way of * doing that is shown in the "Verifying a certificate" * example. */ gnutls_certificate_server_set_request(session, GNUTLS_CERT_IGNORE); sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len); printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n", inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf, sizeof(topbuf)), ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port)); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_handshake(session)); if (ret < 0) { close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); continue; } printf("- Handshake was completed\n"); printf("- User %s was connected\n", gnutls_srp_server_get_username(session)); /* print_info(session); */ for (;;) { LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF)); if (ret == 0) { printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n"); break; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "\n*** Received corrupted " "data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n", ret); break; } else if (ret > 0) { /* echo data back to the client */ gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret); } } printf("\n"); /* do not wait for the peer to close the connection. */ LOOP_CHECK(ret, gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR)); close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); } close(listen_sd); gnutls_srp_free_server_credentials(srp_cred); gnutls_certificate_free_credentials(cert_cred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Helper functions for TCP connections, Previous: Echo server with SRP authentication, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
This example server supports anonymous authentication, and could be used to serve the example client for anonymous authentication.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <errno.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <string.h> #include <unistd.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> /* This is a sample TLS 1.0 echo server, for anonymous authentication only. */ #define SOCKET_ERR(err, s) \ if (err == -1) { \ perror(s); \ return (1); \ } #define MAX_BUF 1024 #define PORT 5556 /* listen to 5556 port */ int main(void) { int err, listen_sd; int sd, ret; struct sockaddr_in sa_serv; struct sockaddr_in sa_cli; socklen_t client_len; char topbuf[512]; gnutls_session_t session; gnutls_anon_server_credentials_t anoncred; char buffer[MAX_BUF + 1]; int optval = 1; if (gnutls_check_version("3.1.4") == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "GnuTLS 3.1.4 or later is required for this example\n"); exit(1); } /* for backwards compatibility with gnutls < 3.3.0 */ gnutls_global_init(); gnutls_anon_allocate_server_credentials(&anoncred); gnutls_anon_set_server_known_dh_params(anoncred, GNUTLS_SEC_PARAM_MEDIUM); /* Socket operations */ listen_sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); SOCKET_ERR(listen_sd, "socket"); memset(&sa_serv, '\0', sizeof(sa_serv)); sa_serv.sin_family = AF_INET; sa_serv.sin_addr.s_addr = INADDR_ANY; sa_serv.sin_port = htons(PORT); /* Server Port number */ setsockopt(listen_sd, SOL_SOCKET, SO_REUSEADDR, (void *)&optval, sizeof(int)); err = bind(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_serv, sizeof(sa_serv)); SOCKET_ERR(err, "bind"); err = listen(listen_sd, 1024); SOCKET_ERR(err, "listen"); printf("Server ready. Listening to port '%d'.\n\n", PORT); client_len = sizeof(sa_cli); for (;;) { gnutls_init(&session, GNUTLS_SERVER); gnutls_priority_set_direct(session, "NORMAL:+ANON-ECDH:+ANON-DH", NULL); gnutls_credentials_set(session, GNUTLS_CRD_ANON, anoncred); sd = accept(listen_sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa_cli, &client_len); printf("- connection from %s, port %d\n", inet_ntop(AF_INET, &sa_cli.sin_addr, topbuf, sizeof(topbuf)), ntohs(sa_cli.sin_port)); gnutls_transport_set_int(session, sd); do { ret = gnutls_handshake(session); } while (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0); if (ret < 0) { close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); fprintf(stderr, "*** Handshake has failed (%s)\n\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); continue; } printf("- Handshake was completed\n"); /* see the Getting peer's information example */ /* print_info(session); */ for (;;) { ret = gnutls_record_recv(session, buffer, MAX_BUF); if (ret == 0) { printf("\n- Peer has closed the GnuTLS connection\n"); break; } else if (ret < 0 && gnutls_error_is_fatal(ret) == 0) { fprintf(stderr, "*** Warning: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); } else if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "\n*** Received corrupted " "data(%d). Closing the connection.\n\n", ret); break; } else if (ret > 0) { /* echo data back to the client */ gnutls_record_send(session, buffer, ret); } } printf("\n"); /* do not wait for the peer to close the connection. */ gnutls_bye(session, GNUTLS_SHUT_WR); close(sd); gnutls_deinit(session); } close(listen_sd); gnutls_anon_free_server_credentials(anoncred); gnutls_global_deinit(); return 0; }
Next: Helper functions for UDP connections, Previous: Echo server with anonymous authentication, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
Those helper function abstract away TCP connection handling from the other examples. It is required to build some examples.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <unistd.h> /* tcp.c */ int tcp_connect(void); void tcp_close(int sd); /* Connects to the peer and returns a socket * descriptor. */ extern int tcp_connect(void) { const char *PORT = "5556"; const char *SERVER = "127.0.0.1"; int err, sd; struct sockaddr_in sa; /* connects to server */ sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_STREAM, 0); memset(&sa, '\0', sizeof(sa)); sa.sin_family = AF_INET; sa.sin_port = htons(atoi(PORT)); inet_pton(AF_INET, SERVER, &sa.sin_addr); err = connect(sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa, sizeof(sa)); if (err < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Connect error\n"); exit(1); } return sd; } /* closes the given socket descriptor. */ extern void tcp_close(int sd) { shutdown(sd, SHUT_RDWR); /* no more receptions */ close(sd); }
Previous: Helper functions for TCP connections, Up: More advanced client and servers [Contents][Index]
The UDP helper functions abstract away UDP connection handling from the other examples. It is required to build the examples using UDP.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <sys/types.h> #include <sys/socket.h> #include <arpa/inet.h> #include <netinet/in.h> #include <unistd.h> /* udp.c */ int udp_connect(void); void udp_close(int sd); /* Connects to the peer and returns a socket * descriptor. */ extern int udp_connect(void) { const char *PORT = "5557"; const char *SERVER = "127.0.0.1"; int err, sd; #if defined(IP_DONTFRAG) || defined(IP_MTU_DISCOVER) int optval; #endif struct sockaddr_in sa; /* connects to server */ sd = socket(AF_INET, SOCK_DGRAM, 0); memset(&sa, '\0', sizeof(sa)); sa.sin_family = AF_INET; sa.sin_port = htons(atoi(PORT)); inet_pton(AF_INET, SERVER, &sa.sin_addr); #if defined(IP_DONTFRAG) optval = 1; setsockopt(sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_DONTFRAG, (const void *)&optval, sizeof(optval)); #elif defined(IP_MTU_DISCOVER) optval = IP_PMTUDISC_DO; setsockopt(sd, IPPROTO_IP, IP_MTU_DISCOVER, (const void *)&optval, sizeof(optval)); #endif err = connect(sd, (struct sockaddr *)&sa, sizeof(sa)); if (err < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Connect error\n"); exit(1); } return sd; } /* closes the given socket descriptor. */ extern void udp_close(int sd) { close(sd); }
Next: Miscellaneous examples, Previous: More advanced client and servers, Up: GnuTLS application examples [Contents][Index]
A small tool to generate OCSP requests.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/crypto.h> #include <gnutls/ocsp.h> #ifndef NO_LIBCURL #include <curl/curl.h> #endif #include "read-file.h" size_t get_data(void *buffer, size_t size, size_t nmemb, void *userp); static gnutls_x509_crt_t load_cert(const char *cert_file); static void _response_info(const gnutls_datum_t *data); static void _generate_request(gnutls_datum_t *rdata, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce); static int _verify_response(gnutls_datum_t *data, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce); /* This program queries an OCSP server. It expects three files. argv[1] containing the certificate to be checked, argv[2] holding the issuer for this certificate, and argv[3] holding a trusted certificate to verify OCSP's response. argv[4] is optional and should hold the server host name. For simplicity the libcurl library is used. */ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { gnutls_datum_t ud, tmp; int ret; gnutls_datum_t req; gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, issuer, signer; #ifndef NO_LIBCURL CURL *handle; struct curl_slist *headers = NULL; #endif int v, seq; const char *cert_file = argv[1]; const char *issuer_file = argv[2]; const char *signer_file = argv[3]; char *hostname = NULL; unsigned char noncebuf[23]; gnutls_datum_t nonce = { noncebuf, sizeof(noncebuf) }; gnutls_global_init(); if (argc > 4) hostname = argv[4]; ret = gnutls_rnd(GNUTLS_RND_NONCE, nonce.data, nonce.size); if (ret < 0) exit(1); cert = load_cert(cert_file); issuer = load_cert(issuer_file); signer = load_cert(signer_file); if (hostname == NULL) { for (seq = 0;; seq++) { ret = gnutls_x509_crt_get_authority_info_access( cert, seq, GNUTLS_IA_OCSP_URI, &tmp, NULL); if (ret == GNUTLS_E_UNKNOWN_ALGORITHM) continue; if (ret == GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE) { fprintf(stderr, "No URI was found in the certificate.\n"); exit(1); } if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "error: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); exit(1); } printf("CA issuers URI: %.*s\n", tmp.size, tmp.data); hostname = malloc(tmp.size + 1); if (!hostname) { fprintf(stderr, "error: cannot allocate memory\n"); exit(1); } memcpy(hostname, tmp.data, tmp.size); hostname[tmp.size] = 0; gnutls_free(tmp.data); break; } } /* Note that the OCSP servers hostname might be available * using gnutls_x509_crt_get_authority_info_access() in the issuer's * certificate */ memset(&ud, 0, sizeof(ud)); fprintf(stderr, "Connecting to %s\n", hostname); _generate_request(&req, cert, issuer, &nonce); #ifndef NO_LIBCURL curl_global_init(CURL_GLOBAL_ALL); handle = curl_easy_init(); if (handle == NULL) exit(1); headers = curl_slist_append(headers, "Content-Type: application/ocsp-request"); curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_HTTPHEADER, headers); curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_POSTFIELDS, (void *)req.data); curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_POSTFIELDSIZE, req.size); curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_URL, hostname); curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_WRITEFUNCTION, get_data); curl_easy_setopt(handle, CURLOPT_WRITEDATA, &ud); ret = curl_easy_perform(handle); if (ret != 0) { fprintf(stderr, "curl[%d] error %d\n", __LINE__, ret); exit(1); } curl_easy_cleanup(handle); #endif _response_info(&ud); v = _verify_response(&ud, cert, signer, &nonce); gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(cert); gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(issuer); gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(signer); gnutls_global_deinit(); return v; } static void _response_info(const gnutls_datum_t *data) { gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp; int ret; gnutls_datum buf; ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_init(&resp); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_import(resp, data); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_print(resp, GNUTLS_OCSP_PRINT_FULL, &buf); if (ret != 0) exit(1); printf("%.*s", buf.size, buf.data); gnutls_free(buf.data); gnutls_ocsp_resp_deinit(resp); } static gnutls_x509_crt_t load_cert(const char *cert_file) { gnutls_x509_crt_t crt; int ret; gnutls_datum_t data; size_t size; ret = gnutls_x509_crt_init(&crt); if (ret < 0) exit(1); data.data = (void *)read_file(cert_file, RF_BINARY, &size); data.size = size; if (!data.data) { fprintf(stderr, "Cannot open file: %s\n", cert_file); exit(1); } ret = gnutls_x509_crt_import(crt, &data, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_PEM); free(data.data); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Cannot import certificate in %s: %s\n", cert_file, gnutls_strerror(ret)); exit(1); } return crt; } static void _generate_request(gnutls_datum_t *rdata, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t issuer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce) { gnutls_ocsp_req_t req; int ret; ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_init(&req); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_add_cert(req, GNUTLS_DIG_SHA1, issuer, cert); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_set_nonce(req, 0, nonce); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_req_export(req, rdata); if (ret != 0) exit(1); gnutls_ocsp_req_deinit(req); return; } static int _verify_response(gnutls_datum_t *data, gnutls_x509_crt_t cert, gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, gnutls_datum_t *nonce) { gnutls_ocsp_resp_t resp; int ret; unsigned verify; gnutls_datum_t rnonce; ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_init(&resp); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_import(resp, data); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_check_crt(resp, 0, cert); if (ret < 0) exit(1); ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_get_nonce(resp, NULL, &rnonce); if (ret < 0) exit(1); if (rnonce.size != nonce->size || memcmp(nonce->data, rnonce.data, nonce->size) != 0) { exit(1); } ret = gnutls_ocsp_resp_verify_direct(resp, signer, &verify, 0); if (ret < 0) exit(1); printf("Verifying OCSP Response: "); if (verify == 0) printf("Verification success!\n"); else printf("Verification error!\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_SIGNER_NOT_FOUND) printf("Signer cert not found\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_SIGNER_KEYUSAGE_ERROR) printf("Signer cert keyusage error\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_UNTRUSTED_SIGNER) printf("Signer cert is not trusted\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_INSECURE_ALGORITHM) printf("Insecure algorithm\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_SIGNATURE_FAILURE) printf("Signature failure\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_CERT_NOT_ACTIVATED) printf("Signer cert not yet activated\n"); if (verify & GNUTLS_OCSP_VERIFY_CERT_EXPIRED) printf("Signer cert expired\n"); gnutls_free(rnonce.data); gnutls_ocsp_resp_deinit(resp); return verify; } size_t get_data(void *buffer, size_t size, size_t nmemb, void *userp) { gnutls_datum_t *ud = userp; size *= nmemb; ud->data = realloc(ud->data, size + ud->size); if (ud->data == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "Not enough memory for the request\n"); exit(1); } memcpy(&ud->data[ud->size], buffer, size); ud->size += size; return size; }
Previous: OCSP example, Up: GnuTLS application examples [Contents][Index]
• Checking for an alert | ||
• X.509 certificate parsing example | ||
• Listing the ciphersuites in a priority string | ||
• PKCS12 structure generation example |
Next: X.509 certificate parsing example, Up: Miscellaneous examples [Contents][Index]
This is a function that checks if an alert has been received in the current session.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include "examples.h" /* This function will check whether the given return code from * a gnutls function (recv/send), is an alert, and will print * that alert. */ void check_alert(gnutls_session_t session, int ret) { int last_alert; if (ret == GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED || ret == GNUTLS_E_FATAL_ALERT_RECEIVED) { last_alert = gnutls_alert_get(session); /* The check for renegotiation is only useful if we are * a server, and we had requested a rehandshake. */ if (last_alert == GNUTLS_A_NO_RENEGOTIATION && ret == GNUTLS_E_WARNING_ALERT_RECEIVED) printf("* Received NO_RENEGOTIATION alert. " "Client Does not support renegotiation.\n"); else printf("* Received alert '%d': %s.\n", last_alert, gnutls_alert_get_name(last_alert)); } }
Next: Listing the ciphersuites in a priority string, Previous: Checking for an alert, Up: Miscellaneous examples [Contents][Index]
To demonstrate the X.509 parsing capabilities an example program is listed below. That program reads the peer’s certificate, and prints information about it.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/x509.h> #include "examples.h" static const char *bin2hex(const void *bin, size_t bin_size) { static char printable[110]; const unsigned char *_bin = bin; char *print; size_t i; if (bin_size > 50) bin_size = 50; print = printable; for (i = 0; i < bin_size; i++) { sprintf(print, "%.2x ", _bin[i]); print += 2; } return printable; } /* This function will print information about this session's peer * certificate. */ void print_x509_certificate_info(gnutls_session_t session) { char serial[40]; char dn[256]; size_t size; unsigned int algo, bits; time_t expiration_time, activation_time; const gnutls_datum_t *cert_list; unsigned int cert_list_size = 0; gnutls_x509_crt_t cert; gnutls_datum_t cinfo; /* This function only works for X.509 certificates. */ if (gnutls_certificate_type_get(session) != GNUTLS_CRT_X509) return; cert_list = gnutls_certificate_get_peers(session, &cert_list_size); printf("Peer provided %d certificates.\n", cert_list_size); if (cert_list_size > 0) { int ret; /* we only print information about the first certificate. */ gnutls_x509_crt_init(&cert); gnutls_x509_crt_import(cert, &cert_list[0], GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER); printf("Certificate info:\n"); /* This is the preferred way of printing short information about a certificate. */ ret = gnutls_x509_crt_print(cert, GNUTLS_CRT_PRINT_ONELINE, &cinfo); if (ret == 0) { printf("\t%s\n", cinfo.data); gnutls_free(cinfo.data); } /* If you want to extract fields manually for some other reason, below are popular example calls. */ expiration_time = gnutls_x509_crt_get_expiration_time(cert); activation_time = gnutls_x509_crt_get_activation_time(cert); printf("\tCertificate is valid since: %s", ctime(&activation_time)); printf("\tCertificate expires: %s", ctime(&expiration_time)); /* Print the serial number of the certificate. */ size = sizeof(serial); gnutls_x509_crt_get_serial(cert, serial, &size); printf("\tCertificate serial number: %s\n", bin2hex(serial, size)); /* Extract some of the public key algorithm's parameters */ algo = gnutls_x509_crt_get_pk_algorithm(cert, &bits); printf("Certificate public key: %s", gnutls_pk_algorithm_get_name(algo)); /* Print the version of the X.509 * certificate. */ printf("\tCertificate version: #%d\n", gnutls_x509_crt_get_version(cert)); size = sizeof(dn); gnutls_x509_crt_get_dn(cert, dn, &size); printf("\tDN: %s\n", dn); size = sizeof(dn); gnutls_x509_crt_get_issuer_dn(cert, dn, &size); printf("\tIssuer's DN: %s\n", dn); gnutls_x509_crt_deinit(cert); } }
Next: PKCS12 structure generation example, Previous: X.509 certificate parsing example, Up: Miscellaneous examples [Contents][Index]
This is a small program to list the enabled ciphersuites by a priority string.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #include <config.h> #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <string.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> static void print_cipher_suite_list(const char *priorities) { size_t i; int ret; unsigned int idx; const char *name; const char *err; unsigned char id[2]; gnutls_protocol_t version; gnutls_priority_t pcache; if (priorities != NULL) { printf("Cipher suites for %s\n", priorities); ret = gnutls_priority_init(&pcache, priorities, &err); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "Syntax error at: %s\n", err); exit(1); } for (i = 0;; i++) { ret = gnutls_priority_get_cipher_suite_index(pcache, i, &idx); if (ret == GNUTLS_E_REQUESTED_DATA_NOT_AVAILABLE) break; if (ret == GNUTLS_E_UNKNOWN_CIPHER_SUITE) continue; name = gnutls_cipher_suite_info(idx, id, NULL, NULL, NULL, &version); if (name != NULL) printf("%-50s\t0x%02x, 0x%02x\t%s\n", name, (unsigned char)id[0], (unsigned char)id[1], gnutls_protocol_get_name(version)); } return; } } int main(int argc, char **argv) { if (argc > 1) print_cipher_suite_list(argv[1]); return 0; }
Previous: Listing the ciphersuites in a priority string, Up: Miscellaneous examples [Contents][Index]
This small program demonstrates the usage of the PKCS #12 API, by generating such a structure.
/* This example code is placed in the public domain. */ #ifdef HAVE_CONFIG_H #include <config.h> #endif #include <stdio.h> #include <stdlib.h> #include <gnutls/gnutls.h> #include <gnutls/pkcs12.h> #include "examples.h" #define OUTFILE "out.p12" /* This function will write a pkcs12 structure into a file. * cert: is a DER encoded certificate * pkcs8_key: is a PKCS #8 encrypted key (note that this must be * encrypted using a PKCS #12 cipher, or some browsers will crash) * password: is the password used to encrypt the PKCS #12 packet. */ int write_pkcs12(const gnutls_datum_t *cert, const gnutls_datum_t *pkcs8_key, const char *password) { gnutls_pkcs12_t pkcs12; int ret, bag_index; gnutls_pkcs12_bag_t bag, key_bag; char pkcs12_struct[10 * 1024]; size_t pkcs12_struct_size; FILE *fp; /* A good idea might be to use gnutls_x509_privkey_get_key_id() * to obtain a unique ID. */ gnutls_datum_t key_id = { (void *)"\x00\x00\x07", 3 }; gnutls_global_init(); /* Firstly we create two helper bags, which hold the certificate, * and the (encrypted) key. */ gnutls_pkcs12_bag_init(&bag); gnutls_pkcs12_bag_init(&key_bag); ret = gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_data(bag, GNUTLS_BAG_CERTIFICATE, cert); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "ret: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); return 1; } /* ret now holds the bag's index. */ bag_index = ret; /* Associate a friendly name with the given certificate. Used * by browsers. */ gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_friendly_name(bag, bag_index, "My name"); /* Associate the certificate with the key using a unique key * ID. */ gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_key_id(bag, bag_index, &key_id); /* use weak encryption for the certificate. */ gnutls_pkcs12_bag_encrypt(bag, password, GNUTLS_PKCS_USE_PKCS12_RC2_40); /* Now the key. */ ret = gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_data( key_bag, GNUTLS_BAG_PKCS8_ENCRYPTED_KEY, pkcs8_key); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "ret: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); return 1; } /* Note that since the PKCS #8 key is already encrypted we don't * bother encrypting that bag. */ bag_index = ret; gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_friendly_name(key_bag, bag_index, "My name"); gnutls_pkcs12_bag_set_key_id(key_bag, bag_index, &key_id); /* The bags were filled. Now create the PKCS #12 structure. */ gnutls_pkcs12_init(&pkcs12); /* Insert the two bags in the PKCS #12 structure. */ gnutls_pkcs12_set_bag(pkcs12, bag); gnutls_pkcs12_set_bag(pkcs12, key_bag); /* Generate a message authentication code for the PKCS #12 * structure. */ gnutls_pkcs12_generate_mac(pkcs12, password); pkcs12_struct_size = sizeof(pkcs12_struct); ret = gnutls_pkcs12_export(pkcs12, GNUTLS_X509_FMT_DER, pkcs12_struct, &pkcs12_struct_size); if (ret < 0) { fprintf(stderr, "ret: %s\n", gnutls_strerror(ret)); return 1; } fp = fopen(OUTFILE, "w"); if (fp == NULL) { fprintf(stderr, "cannot open file\n"); return 1; } fwrite(pkcs12_struct, 1, pkcs12_struct_size, fp); fclose(fp); gnutls_pkcs12_bag_deinit(bag); gnutls_pkcs12_bag_deinit(key_bag); gnutls_pkcs12_deinit(pkcs12); return 0; }
Next: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library, Previous: GnuTLS application examples, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
GnuTLS 3.6.9 introduced a system-wide configuration of the library
which can be used to disable or mark algorithms and protocols as insecure
system-wide, overriding the library defaults. The format of this
configuration file is of an INI file, with the hash (’#’) allowed for
commenting. It intentionally does not allow switching algorithms or protocols
which were disabled or marked as insecure during compile time to the secure
set. This is to prevent the feature from being used to attack the system.
Unknown options or sections in the configuration file are skipped unless
the environment variable GNUTLS_SYSTEM_PRIORITY_FAIL_ON_INVALID
is
set to 1, where it would cause the library to exit on unknown options.
The location of the default configuration file is /etc/gnutls/config
,
but its actual location may be overridden during compile time or at run-time
using the GNUTLS_SYSTEM_PRIORITY_FILE
environment variable. The file
used can be queried using gnutls_get_system_config_file.
Returns the filename of the system wide configuration file to be loaded by the library.
Returns: a constant pointer to the config file path
Since: 3.6.9
Next: Disabling algorithms and protocols, Up: System-wide configuration of the library [Contents][Index]
It is possible to specify custom cipher priority strings, in addition to the
default priority strings (NORMAL
, PERFORMANCE
, etc.). These can
be used either by individual applications, or even as the default option if
the library is compiled with the configuration option
--with-default-priority-string
. In the latter case the defined
priority string will be used for applications using gnutls_set_default_priority
or gnutls_set_default_priority_append.
The priority strings can be specified in the global section of the
configuration file, or in the section named [priorities]
.
The format is ’KEYWORD = VALUE
’, e.g.,
When used they may be followed by additional options that will be appended to the
system string (e.g., ’@EXAMPLE-PRIORITY:+SRP
’). ’EXAMPLE-PRIORITY=NORMAL:+ARCFOUR-128
’.
Since version 3.5.1 applications are allowed to specify fallback keywords such as
@KEYWORD1,@KEYWORD2, and the first valid keyword will be used.
The following example configuration defines a priority string called @SYSTEM
.
When set, its full settings can be queried using gnutls-cli --priority @SYSTEM --list
.
[priorities] SYSTEM = NORMAL:-AES-128-CBC:-AES-256-CBC
Next: Querying for disabled algorithms and protocols, Previous: Application-specific priority strings, Up: System-wide configuration of the library [Contents][Index]
The approach above works well to create consistent system-wide settings for cooperative GnuTLS applications. When an application however does not use the gnutls_set_default_priority or gnutls_set_default_priority_append functions, the method is not sufficient to prevent applications from using protocols or algorithms forbidden by a local policy. The override method described below enables the deprecation of algorithms and protocols system-wide for all applications.
The available options must be set in the [overrides]
section of the
configuration file and can be
insecure-sig-for-cert
: to mark the signature algorithm as insecure when used in certificates.
insecure-sig
: to mark the signature algorithm as insecure for any use.
insecure-hash
: to mark the hash algorithm as insecure for digital signature use (provides a more generic way to disable digital signatures for broken hash algorithms).
disabled-curve
: to disable the specified elliptic curve.
disabled-version
: to disable the specified TLS versions.
tls-disabled-cipher
: to disable the specified ciphers for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols.
tls-disabled-mac
: to disable the specified MAC algorithms for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols.
tls-disabled-group
: to disable the specified group for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols.
tls-disabled-kx
: to disable the specified key exchange algorithms for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols (applies to TLS1.2 or earlier).
Each of the options can be repeated multiple times when multiple values need to be disabled or enabled.
The valid values for the options above can be found in the ’Protocols’, ’Digests’
’PK-signatures’, ’Protocols’, ’Ciphers’, and ’MACs’ fields of the output of gnutls-cli --list
.
Sometimes the system administrator wants to enable only specific algorithms, despite the library defaults. GnuTLS provides an alternative mode of overriding: allowlisting.
As shown below in the examples, it is hard to use this mode correctly,
as it requires understanding of how algorithms are used underneath by
the protocols. Allowlisting configuration mode is intended to be used
by the operating system vendors that prefer laying out the library
defaults exhaustively from scratch instead on depending on gnutls
presets, such as NORMAL
. Applications are then expected to
optionally disable or enable only a subset algorithms on top of the
vendor-provided configuration.
In the allowlisting mode, all the algorithms are initially marked as
insecure or disabled, and shall be explicitly turned on by the options
listed below in the [overrides]
section. As the allowlisting
mode is mutually exclusive to the blocklisting mode, the options
listed above for the blocklisting mode are forbidden in the
allowlisting mode, and vice versa.
secure-sig-for-cert
: to mark the signature algorithm as secure when used in certificates.
secure-sig
: to mark the signature algorithm as secure for any use.
secure-hash
: to mark the hash algorithm as secure for digital signature use (provides a more generic way to enable digital signatures for broken hash algorithms).
enabled-curve
: to enable the specified elliptic curve.
enabled-version
: to enable the specified TLS versions.
tls-enabled-cipher
: to enable the specified ciphers for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols.
tls-enabled-mac
: to enable the specified MAC algorithms for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols.
tls-enabled-group
: to enable the specified group for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols.
tls-enabled-kx
: to enable the specified key exchange algorithms for use in the TLS or DTLS protocols (applies to TLS1.2 or earlier).
The allowlisting mode can be enabled by adding override-mode =
allowlist
in the [global]
section.
The following functions allow the applications to modify the setting.
int gnutls_ecc_curve_set_enabled (gnutls_ecc_curve_t curve, unsigned int enabled)
int gnutls_sign_set_secure (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t sign, unsigned int secure)
int gnutls_sign_set_secure_for_certs (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t sign, unsigned int secure)
int gnutls_digest_set_secure (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t dig, unsigned int secure)
int gnutls_protocol_set_enabled (gnutls_protocol_t version, unsigned int enabled)
When the allowlisting mode is in effect, a @SYSTEM
priority
string is automatically constructed from the options in the
[overrides]
section. For this reason, the above functions
should be called before the @SYSTEM
priority is used.
The following example marks as insecure all digital signature algorithms which depend on SHA384, as well as the RSA-SHA1 signature algorithm.
[overrides] insecure-hash = sha384 insecure-sig = rsa-sha1
The following example marks RSA-SHA256 as insecure for use in certificates and disables the TLS1.0 and TLS1.1 protocols.
[overrides] insecure-sig-for-cert = rsa-sha256 disabled-version = tls1.0 disabled-version = tls1.1
The following example disables the AES-128-CBC
and AES-256-CBC
ciphers, the HMAC-SHA1
MAC algorithm and the GROUP-FFDHE8192
group for TLS and DTLS protocols.
[overrides] tls-disabled-cipher = aes-128-cbc tls-disabled-cipher = aes-256-cbc tls-disabled-mac = sha1 tls-disabled-group = group-ffdhe8192
The following example demonstrates the use of the allowlisting
mode. All the signature algorithms are disabled by default but
RSA-SHA256
. Note that the hash algorithm SHA256
also
needs to be explicitly enabled.
[global] override-mode = allowlist [overrides] secure-hash = sha256 secure-sig = rsa-sha256
To enable a TLS ciphersuite in the allowlist mode requires a more verbose configuration, explicitly listing algorithm dependencies. The following example enables TLS_AES_128_GCM_SHA256, using the SECP256R1 curve for signing and key exchange.
[global] override-mode = allowlist [overrides] secure-hash = sha256 enabled-curve = secp256r1 secure-sig = ecdsa-secp256r1-sha256 enabled-version = tls1.3 tls-enabled-cipher = aes-128-gcm tls-enabled-mac = aead tls-enabled-group = secp256r1
Next: Overriding the parameter verification profile, Previous: Disabling algorithms and protocols, Up: System-wide configuration of the library [Contents][Index]
When necessary applications can query whether a particular algorithm or protocol has been marked as insecure or disabled system-wide. Digital signatures can be queried using the following algorithms.
unsigned gnutls_sign_is_secure (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algorithm)
unsigned gnutls_sign_is_secure2 (gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algorithm, unsigned int flags)
Any disabled protocol versions or elliptic curves will not show up in the lists provided by the following functions.
const gnutls_protocol_t * gnutls_protocol_list ( void)
const gnutls_group_t * gnutls_group_list ( void)
const gnutls_ecc_curve_t * gnutls_ecc_curve_list ( void)
It is not possible to query for insecure hash algorithms directly (only indirectly through the signature API).
Next: Overriding the default priority string, Previous: Querying for disabled algorithms and protocols, Up: System-wide configuration of the library [Contents][Index]
When verifying a certificate or TLS session parameters, GnuTLS uses a set
of profiles associated with the session to determine whether the parameters
seen in the session are acceptable. For example, whether the RSA public key
size as seen on the wire, or the Diffie-Hellman parameters for the session.
These profiles are normally set using the %PROFILE
priority string
(see Priority Strings and Selecting cryptographic key sizes).
It is possible to set the low bar profile that applications cannot override using the following.
[overrides] # do not allow applications use the LOW or VERY-WEAK profiles. min-verification-profile = legacy
Next: Enabling/Disabling system/acceleration protocols, Previous: Overriding the parameter verification profile, Up: System-wide configuration of the library [Contents][Index]
GnuTLS uses default priority string which is defined at compiled
time. Usually it is set to NORMAL
. This override allows to set
the default priority string to something more appropriate for a given
deployment.
Below example sets a more specific default priority string.
[overrides] default-priority-string = SECURE128:-VERS-TLS-ALL:+VERS-TLS1.3
Previous: Overriding the default priority string, Up: System-wide configuration of the library [Contents][Index]
The following options can overwrite default behavior of protocols system-wide.
[global] ktls = true
When GnuTLS is build with -–enable-ktls configuration, KTLS is disabled by default.
This can be enabled by setting ktls = true
in [global]
section.
Next: Other included programs, Previous: System-wide configuration of the library, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
GnuTLS is not a low-level cryptographic library, i.e., it does not provide access to basic cryptographic primitives. However it abstracts the internal cryptographic back-end (see Cryptographic Backend), providing symmetric crypto, hash and HMAC algorithms, as well access to the random number generation. For a low-level crypto API the usage of nettle 21 library is recommended.
• Symmetric algorithms | ||
• Public key algorithms | ||
• Cryptographic Message Syntax / PKCS7 | ||
• Hash and MAC functions | ||
• Random number generation | ||
• Overriding algorithms |
The available functions to access symmetric crypto algorithms operations are listed in the sections below. The supported algorithms are the algorithms required by the TLS protocol. They are listed in Figure 9.1. Note that there two types of ciphers, the ones providing an authenticated-encryption with associated data (AEAD), and the legacy ciphers which provide raw access to the ciphers. We recommend the use of the AEAD ciphers under the AEAD APIs for new applications as they are designed to minimize the misuse of cryptographic primitives.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_UNKNOWN
Value to identify an unknown/unsupported algorithm.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_NULL
The NULL (identity) encryption algorithm.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_ARCFOUR_128
ARCFOUR stream cipher with 128-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_3DES_CBC
3DES in CBC mode.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CBC
AES in CBC mode with 128-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CBC
AES in CBC mode with 256-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_ARCFOUR_40
ARCFOUR stream cipher with 40-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_128_CBC
Camellia in CBC mode with 128-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_256_CBC
Camellia in CBC mode with 256-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_192_CBC
AES in CBC mode with 192-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_GCM
AES in GCM mode with 128-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_GCM
AES in GCM mode with 256-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_192_CBC
Camellia in CBC mode with 192-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_SALSA20_256
Salsa20 with 256-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_ESTREAM_SALSA20_256
Estream’s Salsa20 variant with 256-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_128_GCM
CAMELLIA in GCM mode with 128-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAMELLIA_256_GCM
CAMELLIA in GCM mode with 256-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_RC2_40_CBC
RC2 in CBC mode with 40-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_DES_CBC
DES in CBC mode (56-bit keys).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CCM
AES in CCM mode with 128-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CCM
AES in CCM mode with 256-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CCM_8
AES in CCM mode with 64-bit tag and 128-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CCM_8
AES in CCM mode with 64-bit tag and 256-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CHACHA20_POLY1305
The Chacha20 cipher with the Poly1305 authenticator (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_TC26Z_CFB
GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with TC26 Z S-box.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPA_CFB
GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro A S-box.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPB_CFB
GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro B S-box.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPC_CFB
GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro C S-box.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_CPD_CFB
GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CFB mode with CryptoPro D S-box.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_CFB8
AES in CFB8 mode with 128-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_192_CFB8
AES in CFB8 mode with 192-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_CFB8
AES in CFB8 mode with 256-bit keys.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_XTS
AES in XTS mode with 128-bit key + 128bit tweak key.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_XTS
AES in XTS mode with 256-bit key + 256bit tweak key. Note that the XTS ciphers are message oriented. The whole message needs to be provided with a single call, because cipher-stealing requires to know where the message actually terminates in order to be able to compute where the stealing occurs.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_GOST28147_TC26Z_CNT
GOST 28147-89 (Magma) cipher in CNT mode with TC26 Z S-box.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CHACHA20_64
Chacha20 cipher with 64-bit nonces and 64-bit block counters.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CHACHA20_32
Chacha20 cipher with 96-bit nonces and 32-bit block counters.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_SIV
AES in SIV mode with 128-bit key.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_SIV
AES in SIV mode with 256-bit key. Note that the SIV ciphers can only be used with the AEAD interface, and the IV plays a role as the authentication tag while it is prepended to the cipher text.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_192_GCM
AES in GCM mode with 192-bit keys (AEAD).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_MAGMA_CTR_ACPKM
GOST R 34.12-2015 (Magma) cipher in CTR-ACPKM mode.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_KUZNYECHIK_CTR_ACPKM
GOST R 34.12-2015 (Kuznyechik) cipher in CTR-ACPKM mode.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_128_SIV_GCM
AES in SIV-GCM mode with 128-bit key.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES_256_SIV_GCM
AES in SIV-GCM mode with 256-bit key.
GNUTLS_CIPHER_IDEA_PGP_CFB
IDEA in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_3DES_PGP_CFB
3DES in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_CAST5_PGP_CFB
CAST5 in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_BLOWFISH_PGP_CFB
Blowfish in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_SAFER_SK128_PGP_CFB
Safer-SK in CFB mode with 128-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES128_PGP_CFB
AES in CFB mode with 128-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES192_PGP_CFB
AES in CFB mode with 192-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_AES256_PGP_CFB
AES in CFB mode with 256-bit keys (placeholder - unsupported).
GNUTLS_CIPHER_TWOFISH_PGP_CFB
Twofish in CFB mode (placeholder - unsupported).
The AEAD API provides access to all ciphers supported by GnuTLS which support
authenticated encryption with associated data; these ciphers are marked with
the AEAD keyword on the table above. The AEAD cipher API is
particularly suitable for message or packet-encryption as it provides
authentication and encryption on the same API. See RFC5116
for more
information on authenticated encryption.
int gnutls_aead_cipher_init (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t * handle, gnutls_cipher_algorithm_t cipher, const gnutls_datum_t * key)
int gnutls_aead_cipher_encrypt (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * nonce, size_t nonce_len, const void * auth, size_t auth_len, size_t tag_size, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * ctext, size_t * ctext_len)
int gnutls_aead_cipher_decrypt (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * nonce, size_t nonce_len, const void * auth, size_t auth_len, size_t tag_size, const void * ctext, size_t ctext_len, void * ptext, size_t * ptext_len)
void gnutls_aead_cipher_deinit (gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t handle)
Because the encryption function above may be difficult to use with scattered data, we provide the following API.
handle: is a gnutls_aead_cipher_hd_t
type.
nonce: the nonce to set
nonce_len: The length of the nonce
auth_iov: additional data to be authenticated
auth_iovcnt: The number of buffers in auth_iov
tag_size: The size of the tag to use (use zero for the default)
iov: the data to be encrypted
iovcnt: The number of buffers in iov
ctext: the encrypted data including authentication tag
ctext_len: the length of encrypted data (initially must hold the maximum available size, including space for tag)
This function will encrypt the provided data buffers using the algorithm specified by the context. The output data will contain the authentication tag.
Returns: Zero or a negative error code on error.
Since: 3.6.3
The legacy API provides low-level access to all legacy ciphers supported by GnuTLS, and some of the AEAD ciphers (e.g., AES-GCM and CHACHA20). The restrictions of the nettle library implementation of the ciphers apply verbatim to this API22.
int gnutls_cipher_init (gnutls_cipher_hd_t * handle, gnutls_cipher_algorithm_t cipher, const gnutls_datum_t * key, const gnutls_datum_t * iv)
int gnutls_cipher_encrypt2 (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * ctext, size_t ctext_len)
int gnutls_cipher_decrypt2 (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * ctext, size_t ctext_len, void * ptext, size_t ptext_len)
void gnutls_cipher_set_iv (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, void * iv, size_t ivlen)
void gnutls_cipher_deinit (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle)
int gnutls_cipher_add_auth (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_size)
int gnutls_cipher_tag (gnutls_cipher_hd_t handle, void * tag, size_t tag_size)
While the latter two functions allow the same API can be used with authenticated encryption ciphers, it is recommended to use the following functions which are solely for AEAD ciphers. The latter API is designed to be simple to use and also hard to misuse, by handling the tag verification and addition in transparent way.
Next: Cryptographic Message Syntax / PKCS7, Previous: Symmetric algorithms, Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library [Contents][Index]
Public key cryptography algorithms such as RSA, DSA and ECDSA, are accessed using the abstract key API in Abstract key types. This is a high level API with the advantage of transparently handling keys stored in memory and keys present in smart cards.
int gnutls_privkey_init (gnutls_privkey_t * key)
int gnutls_privkey_import_url (gnutls_privkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw (gnutls_privkey_t pkey, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, const char * password, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_privkey_sign_data (gnutls_privkey_t signer, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_datum_t * signature)
int gnutls_privkey_sign_hash (gnutls_privkey_t signer, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t hash_algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * hash_data, gnutls_datum_t * signature)
void gnutls_privkey_deinit (gnutls_privkey_t key)
int gnutls_pubkey_init (gnutls_pubkey_t * key)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_url (gnutls_pubkey_t key, const char * url, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_import_x509 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt, unsigned int flags)
int gnutls_pubkey_verify_data2 (gnutls_pubkey_t pubkey, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * data, const gnutls_datum_t * signature)
int gnutls_pubkey_verify_hash2 (gnutls_pubkey_t key, gnutls_sign_algorithm_t algo, unsigned int flags, const gnutls_datum_t * hash, const gnutls_datum_t * signature)
void gnutls_pubkey_deinit (gnutls_pubkey_t key)
Keys stored in memory can be imported using functions like gnutls_privkey_import_x509_raw, while keys on smart cards or HSMs should be imported using their PKCS#11 URL with gnutls_privkey_import_url.
If any of the smart card operations require PIN, that should be provided either by setting the global PIN function (gnutls_pkcs11_set_pin_function), or better with the targeted to structures functions such as gnutls_privkey_set_pin_function.
All supported key types (including RSA, DSA, ECDSA, Ed25519, Ed448) can be generated with GnuTLS. They can be generated with the simpler gnutls_privkey_generate or with the more advanced gnutls_privkey_generate2.
pkey: The private key
algo: is one of the algorithms in gnutls_pk_algorithm_t
.
bits: the size of the modulus
flags: Must be zero or flags from gnutls_privkey_flags_t
.
data: Allow specifying gnutls_keygen_data_st
types such as the seed to be used.
data_size: The number of data
available.
This function will generate a random private key. Note that this function must be called on an initialized private key.
The flag GNUTLS_PRIVKEY_FLAG_PROVABLE
instructs the key generation process to use algorithms like Shawe-Taylor
(from FIPS PUB186-4) which generate provable parameters out of a seed
for RSA and DSA keys. On DSA keys the PQG parameters are generated using the
seed, while on RSA the two primes. To specify an explicit seed
(by default a random seed is used), use the data
with a GNUTLS_KEYGEN_SEED
type.
Note that when generating an elliptic curve key, the curve
can be substituted in the place of the bits parameter using the
GNUTLS_CURVE_TO_BITS()
macro.
To export the generated keys in memory or in files it is recommended to use the
PKCS8
form as it can handle all key types, and can store additional parameters
such as the seed, in case of provable RSA or DSA keys.
Generated keys can be exported in memory using gnutls_privkey_export_x509()
,
and then with gnutls_x509_privkey_export2_pkcs8()
.
If key generation is part of your application, avoid setting the number
of bits directly, and instead use gnutls_sec_param_to_pk_bits()
.
That way the generated keys will adapt to the security levels
of the underlying GnuTLS library.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.5.0
Next: Hash and MAC functions, Previous: Public key algorithms, Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library [Contents][Index]
The CMS or PKCS #7 format is a commonly used format for digital signatures. PKCS #7 is the name of the original standard when published by RSA, though today the standard is adopted by IETF under the name CMS.
The standards include multiple ways of signing a digital document, e.g., by embedding the data into the signature, or creating detached signatures of the data, including a timestamp, additional certificates etc. In certain cases the same format is also used to transport lists of certificates and CRLs.
It is a relatively popular standard to sign structures, and is being used to sign in PDF files, as well as for signing kernel modules and other structures.
In GnuTLS, the basic functions to initialize, deinitialize, import, export or print information about a PKCS #7 structure are listed below.
int gnutls_pkcs7_init (gnutls_pkcs7_t * pkcs7)
void gnutls_pkcs7_deinit (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_export2 (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)
int gnutls_pkcs7_import (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, const gnutls_datum_t * data, gnutls_x509_crt_fmt_t format)
int gnutls_pkcs7_print (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_certificate_print_formats_t format, gnutls_datum_t * out)
The following functions allow the verification of a structure using either a trust list, or individual certificates. The gnutls_pkcs7_sign function is the data signing function.
int gnutls_pkcs7_verify_direct (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_t signer, unsigned idx, const gnutls_datum_t * data, unsigned flags)
int gnutls_pkcs7_verify (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_trust_list_t tl, gnutls_typed_vdata_st * vdata, unsigned int vdata_size, unsigned idx, const gnutls_datum_t * data, unsigned flags)
pkcs7: should contain a gnutls_pkcs7_t
type
signer: the certificate to sign the structure
signer_key: the key to sign the structure
data: The data to be signed or NULL
if the data are already embedded
signed_attrs: Any additional attributes to be included in the signed ones (or NULL
)
unsigned_attrs: Any additional attributes to be included in the unsigned ones (or NULL
)
dig: The digest algorithm to use for signing
flags: Should be zero or one of GNUTLS_PKCS7
flags
This function will add a signature in the provided PKCS 7
structure
for the provided data. Multiple signatures can be made with different
signers.
The available flags are:
GNUTLS_PKCS7_EMBED_DATA
, GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_TIME
, GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_CERT
,
and GNUTLS_PKCS7_WRITE_SPKI
. They are explained in the gnutls_pkcs7_sign_flags
definition.
Returns: On success, GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
(0) is returned, otherwise a
negative error value.
Since: 3.4.2
GNUTLS_PKCS7_EMBED_DATA
The signed data will be embedded in the structure.
GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_TIME
The signing time will be included in the structure.
GNUTLS_PKCS7_INCLUDE_CERT
The signer’s certificate will be included in the cert list.
GNUTLS_PKCS7_WRITE_SPKI
Use the signer’s key identifier instead of name.
Other helper functions which allow to access the signatures, or certificates attached in the structure are listed below.
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_signature_count (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_signature_info (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, unsigned idx, gnutls_pkcs7_signature_info_st * info)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crt_count (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crt_raw2 (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * cert)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crl_count (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7)
int gnutls_pkcs7_get_crl_raw2 (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, unsigned indx, gnutls_datum_t * crl)
To append certificates, or CRLs in the structure the following functions are provided.
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crt_raw (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, const gnutls_datum_t * crt)
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crt (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crt_t crt)
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crl_raw (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, const gnutls_datum_t * crl)
int gnutls_pkcs7_set_crl (gnutls_pkcs7_t pkcs7, gnutls_x509_crl_t crl)
Next: Random number generation, Previous: Cryptographic Message Syntax / PKCS7, Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library [Contents][Index]
The available operations to access hash functions and hash-MAC (HMAC) algorithms
are shown below. HMAC algorithms provided keyed hash functionality. The supported MAC and HMAC
algorithms are listed in Figure 9.3. Note that, despite the hmac
part
in the name of the MAC functions listed below, they can be used either for HMAC or MAC operations.
GNUTLS_MAC_UNKNOWN
Unknown MAC algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_NULL
NULL MAC algorithm (empty output).
GNUTLS_MAC_MD5
HMAC-MD5 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA1
HMAC-SHA-1 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_RMD160
HMAC-RMD160 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_MD2
HMAC-MD2 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA256
HMAC-SHA-256 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA384
HMAC-SHA-384 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA512
HMAC-SHA-512 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA224
HMAC-SHA-224 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_224
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_256
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_384
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHA3_512
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_MAC_MD5_SHA1
Combined MD5+SHA1 MAC placeholder.
GNUTLS_MAC_GOSTR_94
HMAC GOST R 34.11-94 algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_STREEBOG_256
HMAC GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 256 bit.
GNUTLS_MAC_STREEBOG_512
HMAC GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 512 bit.
GNUTLS_MAC_AEAD
MAC implicit through AEAD cipher.
GNUTLS_MAC_UMAC_96
The UMAC-96 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).
GNUTLS_MAC_UMAC_128
The UMAC-128 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).
GNUTLS_MAC_AES_CMAC_128
The AES-CMAC-128 MAC algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_AES_CMAC_256
The AES-CMAC-256 MAC algorithm.
GNUTLS_MAC_AES_GMAC_128
The AES-GMAC-128 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).
GNUTLS_MAC_AES_GMAC_192
The AES-GMAC-192 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).
GNUTLS_MAC_AES_GMAC_256
The AES-GMAC-256 MAC algorithm (requires nonce).
GNUTLS_MAC_GOST28147_TC26Z_IMIT
The GOST 28147-89 working in IMIT mode with TC26 Z S-box.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHAKE_128
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_MAC_SHAKE_256
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_MAC_MAGMA_OMAC
GOST R 34.12-2015 (Magma) in OMAC (CMAC) mode.
GNUTLS_MAC_KUZNYECHIK_OMAC
GOST R 34.12-2015 (Kuznyechik) in OMAC (CMAC) mode.
int gnutls_hmac_init (gnutls_hmac_hd_t * dig, gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm, const void * key, size_t keylen)
int gnutls_hmac (gnutls_hmac_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len)
void gnutls_hmac_output (gnutls_hmac_hd_t handle, void * digest)
void gnutls_hmac_deinit (gnutls_hmac_hd_t handle, void * digest)
unsigned gnutls_hmac_get_len (gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm)
int gnutls_hmac_fast (gnutls_mac_algorithm_t algorithm, const void * key, size_t keylen, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * digest)
The available functions to access hash functions are shown below. The supported hash functions are shown in Figure 9.4.
int gnutls_hash_init (gnutls_hash_hd_t * dig, gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm)
int gnutls_hash (gnutls_hash_hd_t handle, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len)
void gnutls_hash_output (gnutls_hash_hd_t handle, void * digest)
void gnutls_hash_deinit (gnutls_hash_hd_t handle, void * digest)
unsigned gnutls_hash_get_len (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm)
int gnutls_hash_fast (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algorithm, const void * ptext, size_t ptext_len, void * digest)
int gnutls_fingerprint (gnutls_digest_algorithm_t algo, const gnutls_datum_t * data, void * result, size_t * result_size)
GNUTLS_DIG_UNKNOWN
Unknown hash algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_NULL
NULL hash algorithm (empty output).
GNUTLS_DIG_MD5
MD5 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA1
SHA-1 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_RMD160
RMD160 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_MD2
MD2 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA256
SHA-256 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA384
SHA-384 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA512
SHA-512 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA224
SHA-224 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_224
SHA3-224 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_256
SHA3-256 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_384
SHA3-384 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHA3_512
SHA3-512 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_MD5_SHA1
Combined MD5+SHA1 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_GOSTR_94
GOST R 34.11-94 algorithm.
GNUTLS_DIG_STREEBOG_256
GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 256 bit.
GNUTLS_DIG_STREEBOG_512
GOST R 34.11-2001 (Streebog) algorithm, 512 bit.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHAKE_128
Reserved; unimplemented.
GNUTLS_DIG_SHAKE_256
Reserved; unimplemented.
Next: Overriding algorithms, Previous: Hash and MAC functions, Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library [Contents][Index]
Access to the random number generator is provided using the gnutls_rnd function. It allows obtaining random data of various levels.
GNUTLS_RND_NONCE
Non-predictable random number. Fatal in parts of session if broken, i.e., vulnerable to statistical analysis.
GNUTLS_RND_RANDOM
Pseudo-random cryptographic random number. Fatal in session if broken. Example use: temporal keys.
GNUTLS_RND_KEY
Fatal in many sessions if broken. Example use: Long-term keys.
level: a security level
data: place to store random bytes
len: The requested size
This function will generate random data and store it to output
buffer. The value of level
should be one of GNUTLS_RND_NONCE
,
GNUTLS_RND_RANDOM
and GNUTLS_RND_KEY
. See the manual and
gnutls_rnd_level_t
for detailed information.
This function is thread-safe and also fork-safe.
Returns: Zero on success, or a negative error code on error.
Since: 2.12.0
See Random Number Generators-internals for more information on the random number generator operation.
Previous: Random number generation, Up: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library [Contents][Index]
In systems which provide a hardware accelerated cipher implementation that is not directly supported by GnuTLS, it is possible to utilize it. There are functions which allow overriding the default cipher, digest and MAC implementations. Those are described below.
To override public key operations see Abstract private keys.
algorithm: is the gnutls algorithm identifier
priority: is the priority of the algorithm
init: A function which initializes the cipher
setkey: A function which sets the key of the cipher
setiv: A function which sets the nonce/IV of the cipher (non-AEAD)
encrypt: A function which performs encryption (non-AEAD)
decrypt: A function which performs decryption (non-AEAD)
deinit: A function which deinitializes the cipher
This function will register a cipher algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.
In the case the registered init or setkey functions return GNUTLS_E_NEED_FALLBACK
,
GnuTLS will attempt to use the next in priority registered cipher.
The functions which are marked as non-AEAD they are not required when registering a cipher to be used with the new AEAD API introduced in GnuTLS 3.4.0. Internally GnuTLS uses the new AEAD API.
Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, otherwise a negative error code.
Since: 3.4.0
algorithm: is the gnutls AEAD cipher identifier
priority: is the priority of the algorithm
init: A function which initializes the cipher
setkey: A function which sets the key of the cipher
aead_encrypt: Perform the AEAD encryption
aead_decrypt: Perform the AEAD decryption
deinit: A function which deinitializes the cipher
This function will register a cipher algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.
In the case the registered init or setkey functions return GNUTLS_E_NEED_FALLBACK
,
GnuTLS will attempt to use the next in priority registered cipher.
The functions registered will be used with the new AEAD API introduced in GnuTLS 3.4.0. Internally GnuTLS uses the new AEAD API.
Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, otherwise a negative error code.
Since: 3.4.0
algorithm: is the gnutls MAC identifier
priority: is the priority of the algorithm
init: A function which initializes the MAC
setkey: A function which sets the key of the MAC
setnonce: A function which sets the nonce for the mac (may be NULL
for common MAC algorithms)
hash: Perform the hash operation
output: Provide the output of the MAC
deinit: A function which deinitializes the MAC
hash_fast: Perform the MAC operation in one go
This function will register a MAC algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.
Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, otherwise a negative error code.
Since: 3.4.0
algorithm: is the gnutls digest identifier
priority: is the priority of the algorithm
init: A function which initializes the digest
hash: Perform the hash operation
output: Provide the output of the digest
deinit: A function which deinitializes the digest
hash_fast: Perform the digest operation in one go
This function will register a digest algorithm to be used by gnutls. Any algorithm registered will override the included algorithms and by convention kernel implemented algorithms have priority of 90 and CPU-assisted of 80. The algorithm with the lowest priority will be used by gnutls.
Deprecated: since 3.7.0 it is no longer possible to override cipher implementation
Returns: GNUTLS_E_SUCCESS
on success, otherwise a negative error code.
Since: 3.4.0
Next: Internal architecture of GnuTLS, Previous: Using GnuTLS as a cryptographic library, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
Included with GnuTLS are also a few command line tools that let you use the library for common tasks without writing an application. The applications are discussed in this chapter.
• gnutls-cli Invocation | Invoking gnutls-cli | |
• gnutls-serv Invocation | Invoking gnutls-serv | |
• gnutls-cli-debug Invocation | Invoking gnutls-cli-debug |
Next: gnutls-serv Invocation, Up: Other included programs [Contents][Index]
Simple client program to set up a TLS connection to some other computer. It sets up a TLS connection and forwards data from the standard input to the secured socket and vice versa.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
gnutls-cli - GnuTLS client Usage: gnutls-cli [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [hostname] None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -V, --verbose More verbose output --tofu Enable trust on first use authentication --strict-tofu Fail to connect if a certificate is unknown or a known certificate has changed --dane Enable DANE certificate verification (DNSSEC) --local-dns Use the local DNS server for DNSSEC resolving --ca-verification Enable CA certificate verification - enabled by default - disabled as '--no-ca-verification' --ocsp Enable OCSP certificate verification -r, --resume Establish a session and resume --earlydata=str Send early data on resumption from the specified file -e, --rehandshake Establish a session and rehandshake --sni-hostname=str Server's hostname for server name indication extension --verify-hostname=str Server's hostname to use for validation -s, --starttls Connect, establish a plain session and start TLS --app-proto an alias for the 'starttls-proto' option --starttls-proto=str The application protocol to be used to obtain the server's certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres) - prohibits the option 'starttls' --starttls-name=str The hostname presented to the application protocol for STARTTLS (for smtp, xmpp, lmtp) - prohibits the option 'starttls' - requires the option 'starttls-proto' -u, --udp Use DTLS (datagram TLS) over UDP --mtu=num Set MTU for datagram TLS - it must be in the range: 0 to 17000 --crlf Send CR LF instead of LF --fastopen Enable TCP Fast Open --x509fmtder Use DER format for certificates to read from --print-cert Print peer's certificate in PEM format --save-cert=str Save the peer's certificate chain in the specified file in PEM format --save-ocsp=str Save the peer's OCSP status response in the provided file - prohibits the option 'save-ocsp-multi' --save-ocsp-multi=str Save all OCSP responses provided by the peer in this file - prohibits the option 'save-ocsp' --save-server-trace=str Save the server-side TLS message trace in the provided file --save-client-trace=str Save the client-side TLS message trace in the provided file --dh-bits=num The minimum number of bits allowed for DH --priority=str Priorities string --x509cafile=str Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use --x509crlfile=file CRL file to use - file must pre-exist --x509keyfile=str X.509 key file or PKCS #11 URL to use --x509certfile=str X.509 Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use - requires the option 'x509keyfile' --rawpkkeyfile=str Private key file (PKCS #8 or PKCS #12) or PKCS #11 URL to use --rawpkfile=str Raw public-key file to use - requires the option 'rawpkkeyfile' --srpusername=str SRP username to use --srppasswd=str SRP password to use --pskusername=str PSK username to use --pskkey=str PSK key (in hex) to use -p, --port=str The port or service to connect to --insecure Don't abort program if server certificate can't be validated --verify-allow-broken Allow broken algorithms, such as MD5 for certificate verification --benchmark-ciphers Benchmark individual ciphers --benchmark-tls-kx Benchmark TLS key exchange methods --benchmark-tls-ciphers Benchmark TLS ciphers -l, --list Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes - prohibits the option 'port' --priority-list Print a list of the supported priority strings --noticket Don't allow session tickets --srtp-profiles=str Offer SRTP profiles --alpn=str Application layer protocol --compress-cert=str Compress certificate -b, --heartbeat Activate heartbeat support --recordsize=num The maximum record size to advertise - it must be in the range: 0 to 4096 --disable-sni Do not send a Server Name Indication (SNI) --single-key-share Send a single key share under TLS1.3 --post-handshake-auth Enable post-handshake authentication under TLS1.3 --inline-commands Inline commands of the form ^<cmd>^ --inline-commands-prefix=str Change the default delimiter for inline commands --provider=file Specify the PKCS #11 provider library - file must pre-exist --fips140-mode Reports the status of the FIPS140-2 mode in gnutls library --list-config Reports the configuration of the library --logfile=str Redirect informational messages to a specific file --keymatexport=str Label used for exporting keying material --keymatexportsize=num Size of the exported keying material --waitresumption Block waiting for the resumption data under TLS1.3 --ca-auto-retrieve Enable automatic retrieval of missing CA certificates --attime=str Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Operands and options may be intermixed. They will be reordered. Simple client program to set up a TLS connection to some other computer. It sets up a TLS connection and forwards data from the standard input to the secured socket and vice versa. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “enable trust on first use authentication” option. This option will, in addition to certificate authentication, perform authentication based on previously seen public keys, a model similar to SSH authentication. Note that when tofu is specified (PKI) and DANE authentication will become advisory to assist the public key acceptance process.
This is the “fail to connect if a certificate is unknown or a known certificate has changed” option. This option will perform authentication as with option –tofu; however, no questions shall be asked whatsoever, neither to accept an unknown certificate nor a changed one.
This is the “enable dane certificate verification (dnssec)” option. This option will, in addition to certificate authentication using the trusted CAs, verify the server certificates using on the DANE information available via DNSSEC.
This is the “use the local dns server for dnssec resolving” option. This option will use the local DNS server for DNSSEC. This is disabled by default due to many servers not allowing DNSSEC.
This is the “enable ca certificate verification” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
This option can be used to enable or disable CA certificate verification. It is to be used with the –dane or –tofu options.
This is the “enable ocsp certificate verification” option. This option will enable verification of the peer’s certificate using ocsp
This is the “establish a session and resume” option. Connect, establish a session, reconnect and resume.
This is the “establish a session and rehandshake” option. Connect, establish a session and rehandshake immediately.
This is the “server’s hostname for server name indication extension” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Set explicitly the server name used in the TLS server name indication extension. That is useful when testing with servers setup on different DNS name than the intended. If not specified, the provided hostname is used. Even with this option server certificate verification still uses the hostname passed on the main commandline. Use –verify-hostname to change this.
This is the “server’s hostname to use for validation” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Set explicitly the server name to be used when validating the server’s certificate.
This is the “connect, establish a plain session and start tls” option. The TLS session will be initiated when EOF or a SIGALRM is received.
This is an alias for the starttls-proto
option,
see the starttls-proto option documentation.
This is the “the application protocol to be used to obtain the server’s certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Specify the application layer protocol for STARTTLS. If the protocol is supported, gnutls-cli will proceed to the TLS negotiation.
This is the “the hostname presented to the application protocol for starttls (for smtp, xmpp, lmtp)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Specify the hostname presented to the application protocol for STARTTLS.
This is the “save all ocsp responses provided by the peer in this file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
The file will contain a list of PEM encoded OCSP status responses if any were provided by the peer, starting with the one for the peer’s server certificate.
This is the “the minimum number of bits allowed for dh” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. This option sets the minimum number of bits allowed for a Diffie-Hellman key exchange. You may want to lower the default value if the peer sends a weak prime and you get an connection error with unacceptable prime.
This is the “priorities string” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. TLS algorithms and protocols to enable. You can use predefined sets of ciphersuites such as PERFORMANCE, NORMAL, PFS, SECURE128, SECURE256. The default is NORMAL.
Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on the allowed keywords
This is the “private key file (pkcs #8 or pkcs #12) or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).
Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.
This is the “raw public-key file to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).
Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.
This is the “use length-hiding padding to prevent traffic analysis” option. When possible (e.g., when using CBC ciphersuites), use length-hiding padding to prevent traffic analysis.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “benchmark individual ciphers” option. By default the benchmarked ciphers will utilize any capabilities of the local CPU to improve performance. To test against the raw software implementation set the environment variable GNUTLS_CPUID_OVERRIDE to 0x1.
This is the “benchmark tls ciphers” option. By default the benchmarked ciphers will utilize any capabilities of the local CPU to improve performance. To test against the raw software implementation set the environment variable GNUTLS_CPUID_OVERRIDE to 0x1.
This is the “print a list of the supported algorithms and modes” option.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes. If a priority string is given then only the enabled ciphersuites are shown.
This is the “print a list of the supported priority strings” option. Print a list of the supported priority strings. The ciphersuites corresponding to each priority string can be examined using -l -p.
This is the “don’t allow session tickets” option. Disable the request of receiving of session tickets under TLS1.2 or earlier
This is the “application layer protocol” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option will set and enable the Application Layer Protocol Negotiation (ALPN) in the TLS protocol.
This is the “compress certificate” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option sets a supported compression method for certificate compression.
This is the “disable all the tls extensions” option. This option disables all TLS extensions. Deprecated option. Use the priority string.
NOTE: THIS OPTION IS DEPRECATED
This is the “send a single key share under tls1.3” option. This option switches the default mode of sending multiple key shares, to send a single one (the top one).
This is the “enable post-handshake authentication under tls1.3” option. This option enables post-handshake authentication when under TLS1.3.
This is the “inline commands of the form ^<cmd>^” option. Enable inline commands of the form ^<cmd>^. The inline commands are expected to be in a line by themselves. The available commands are: resume, rekey1 (local rekey), rekey (rekey on both peers) and renegotiate.
This is the “change the default delimiter for inline commands” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Change the default delimiter (^) used for inline commands. The delimiter is expected to be a single US-ASCII character (octets 0 - 127). This option is only relevant if inline commands are enabled via the inline-commands option
This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf
This is the “redirect informational messages to a specific file” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Redirect informational messages to a specific file. The file may be /dev/null also to make the gnutls client quiet to use it in piped server connections where only the server communication may appear on stdout.
This is the “block waiting for the resumption data under tls1.3” option. This option makes the client to block waiting for the resumption data under TLS1.3. The option has effect only when –resume is provided.
This is the “enable automatic retrieval of missing ca certificates” option. This option enables the client to automatically retrieve the missing intermediate CA certificates in the certificate chain, based on the Authority Information Access (AIA) extension.
This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
gnutls-cli-debug(1), gnutls-serv(1)
To connect to a server using PSK authentication, you need to enable the choice of PSK by using a cipher priority parameter such as in the example below.
$ ./gnutls-cli -p 5556 localhost --pskusername psk_identity \ --pskkey 88f3824b3e5659f52d00e959bacab954b6540344 \ --priority NORMAL:-KX-ALL:+ECDHE-PSK:+DHE-PSK:+PSK Resolving 'localhost'... Connecting to '127.0.0.1:5556'... - PSK authentication. - Version: TLS1.1 - Key Exchange: PSK - Cipher: AES-128-CBC - MAC: SHA1 - Compression: NULL - Handshake was completed - Simple Client Mode:
By keeping the –pskusername parameter and removing the –pskkey parameter, it will query only for the password during the handshake.
To connect to a server using raw public-key authentication, you need to enable the option to negotiate raw public-keys via the priority strings such as in the example below.
$ ./gnutls-cli -p 5556 localhost --priority NORMAL:-CTYPE-CLI-ALL:+CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK \ --rawpkkeyfile cli.key.pem \ --rawpkfile cli.rawpk.pem Processed 1 client raw public key pair... Resolving 'localhost'... Connecting to '127.0.0.1:5556'... - Successfully sent 1 certificate(s) to server. - Server has requested a certificate. - Certificate type: X.509 - Got a certificate list of 1 certificates. - Certificate[0] info: - skipped - Description: (TLS1.3-Raw Public Key-X.509)-(ECDHE-SECP256R1)-(RSA-PSS-RSAE-SHA256)-(AES-256-GCM) - Options: - Handshake was completed - Simple Client Mode:
You could also use the client to connect to services with starttls capability.
$ gnutls-cli --starttls-proto smtp --port 25 localhost
To list the ciphersuites in a priority string:
$ ./gnutls-cli --priority SECURE192 -l Cipher suites for SECURE192 TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA384 0xc0, 0x24 TLS1.2 TLS_ECDHE_ECDSA_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0xc0, 0x2e TLS1.2 TLS_ECDHE_RSA_AES_256_GCM_SHA384 0xc0, 0x30 TLS1.2 TLS_DHE_RSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x6b TLS1.2 TLS_DHE_DSS_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x6a TLS1.2 TLS_RSA_AES_256_CBC_SHA256 0x00, 0x3d TLS1.2 Certificate types: CTYPE-X.509 Protocols: VERS-TLS1.2, VERS-TLS1.1, VERS-TLS1.0, VERS-SSL3.0, VERS-DTLS1.0 Compression: COMP-NULL Elliptic curves: CURVE-SECP384R1, CURVE-SECP521R1 PK-signatures: SIGN-RSA-SHA384, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA384, SIGN-RSA-SHA512, SIGN-ECDSA-SHA512
To connect to a server using a certificate and a private key present in a PKCS #11 token you need to substitute the PKCS 11 URLs in the x509certfile and x509keyfile parameters.
Those can be found using "p11tool –list-tokens" and then listing all the objects in the needed token, and using the appropriate.
$ p11tool --list-tokens Token 0: URL: pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test Label: Test Manufacturer: EnterSafe Model: PKCS15 Serial: 1234 $ p11tool --login --list-certs "pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test" Object 0: URL: pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test;object=client;type=cert Type: X.509 Certificate Label: client ID: 2a:97:0d:58:d1:51:3c:23:07:ae:4e:0d:72:26:03:7d:99:06:02:6a $ MYCERT="pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test;object=client;type=cert" $ MYKEY="pkcs11:model=PKCS15;manufacturer=MyMan;serial=1234;token=Test;object=client;type=private" $ export MYCERT MYKEY $ gnutls-cli www.example.com --x509keyfile $MYKEY --x509certfile $MYCERT
Notice that the private key only differs from the certificate in the type.
Next: gnutls-cli-debug Invocation, Previous: gnutls-cli Invocation, Up: Other included programs [Contents][Index]
Server program that listens to incoming TLS connections.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
gnutls-serv - GnuTLS server Usage: gnutls-serv [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 --sni-hostname=str Server's hostname for server name extension --sni-hostname-fatal Send fatal alert on sni-hostname mismatch --alpn=str Specify ALPN protocol to be enabled by the server --alpn-fatal Send fatal alert on non-matching ALPN name --noticket Don't accept session tickets --earlydata Accept early data --maxearlydata=num The maximum early data size to accept - it must be in the range: 1 to 2147483648 --nocookie Don't require cookie on DTLS sessions -g, --generate Generate Diffie-Hellman parameters -q, --quiet Suppress some messages --nodb Do not use a resumption database --http Act as an HTTP server --echo Act as an Echo server --crlf Do not replace CRLF by LF in Echo server mode -u, --udp Use DTLS (datagram TLS) over UDP --mtu=num Set MTU for datagram TLS - it must be in the range: 0 to 17000 --srtp-profiles=str Offer SRTP profiles -a, --disable-client-cert Do not request a client certificate - prohibits the option 'require-client-cert' -r, --require-client-cert Require a client certificate --verify-client-cert If a client certificate is sent then verify it --compress-cert=str Compress certificate -b, --heartbeat Activate heartbeat support --x509fmtder Use DER format for certificates to read from --priority=str Priorities string --dhparams=file DH params file to use - file must pre-exist --x509cafile=str Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use --x509crlfile=file CRL file to use - file must pre-exist --x509keyfile=str X.509 key file or PKCS #11 URL to use --x509certfile=str X.509 Certificate file or PKCS #11 URL to use --rawpkkeyfile=str Private key file (PKCS #8 or PKCS #12) or PKCS #11 URL to use --rawpkfile=str Raw public-key file to use - requires the option 'rawpkkeyfile' --srppasswd=file SRP password file to use - file must pre-exist --srppasswdconf=file SRP password configuration file to use - file must pre-exist --pskpasswd=file PSK password file to use - file must pre-exist --pskhint=str PSK identity hint to use --ocsp-response=str The OCSP response to send to client --ignore-ocsp-response-errors Ignore any errors when setting the OCSP response -p, --port=num The port to connect to -l, --list Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes --provider=file Specify the PKCS #11 provider library - file must pre-exist --keymatexport=str Label used for exporting keying material --keymatexportsize=num Size of the exported keying material --recordsize=num The maximum record size to advertise - it must be in the range: 0 to 16384 --httpdata=file The data used as HTTP response - file must pre-exist --timeout=num The timeout period for server --attime=str Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Server program that listens to incoming TLS connections. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is the “server’s hostname for server name extension” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Server name of type host_name that the server will recognise as its own. If the server receives client hello with different name, it will send a warning-level unrecognized_name alert.
This is the “specify alpn protocol to be enabled by the server” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the (textual) ALPN protocol for the server to use.
This is the “require a client certificate” option. This option before 3.6.0 used to imply –verify-client-cert. Since 3.6.0 it will no longer verify the certificate by default.
This is the “if a client certificate is sent then verify it” option. Do not require, but if a client certificate is sent then verify it and close the connection if invalid.
This is the “compress certificate” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. This option sets a supported compression method for certificate compression.
This is the “activate heartbeat support” option. Regularly ping client via heartbeat extension messages
This is the “priorities string” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. TLS algorithms and protocols to enable. You can use predefined sets of ciphersuites such as PERFORMANCE, NORMAL, SECURE128, SECURE256. The default is NORMAL.
Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on allowed keywords
This is the “x.509 key file or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the private key file or URI to use; it must correspond to the certificate specified in –x509certfile. Multiple keys and certificates can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding x509certfile or vice-versa.
This is the “x.509 certificate file or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the certificate file or URI to use; it must correspond to the key specified in –x509keyfile. Multiple keys and certificates can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding x509certfile or vice-versa.
This is an alias for the x509keyfile
option,
see the x509keyfile option documentation.
This is an alias for the x509certfile
option,
see the x509certfile option documentation.
This is an alias for the x509keyfile
option,
see the x509keyfile option documentation.
This is an alias for the x509certfile
option,
see the x509certfile option documentation.
This is the “private key file (pkcs #8 or pkcs #12) or pkcs #11 url to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the private key file or URI to use; it must correspond to the raw public-key specified in –rawpkfile. Multiple key pairs can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding rawpkfile or vice-versa.
In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).
Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.
This is the “raw public-key file to use” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument.
This option has some usage constraints. It:
Specify the raw public-key file to use; it must correspond to the private key specified in –rawpkkeyfile. Multiple key pairs can be specified with this option and in that case each occurrence of keyfile must be followed by the corresponding rawpkfile or vice-versa.
In order to instruct the application to negotiate raw public keys one must enable the respective certificate types via the priority strings (i.e. CTYPE-CLI-* and CTYPE-SRV-* flags).
Check the GnuTLS manual on section “Priority strings” for more information on how to set certificate types.
This is the “the ocsp response to send to client” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. If the client requested an OCSP response, return data from this file to the client.
This is the “ignore any errors when setting the ocsp response” option. That option instructs gnutls to not attempt to match the provided OCSP responses with the certificates.
This is the “print a list of the supported algorithms and modes” option. Print a list of the supported algorithms and modes. If a priority string is given then only the enabled ciphersuites are shown.
This is the “specify the pkcs #11 provider library” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.FILE argument. This will override the default options in /etc/gnutls/pkcs11.conf
This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
gnutls-cli-debug(1), gnutls-cli(1)
Running your own TLS server based on GnuTLS can be useful when
debugging clients and/or GnuTLS itself. This section describes how to
use gnutls-serv
as a simple HTTPS server.
The most basic server can be started as:
gnutls-serv --http --priority "NORMAL:+ANON-ECDH:+ANON-DH"
It will only support anonymous ciphersuites, which many TLS clients refuse to use.
The next step is to add support for X.509. First we generate a CA:
$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-ca-key.pem $ echo 'cn = GnuTLS test CA' > ca.tmpl $ echo 'ca' >> ca.tmpl $ echo 'cert_signing_key' >> ca.tmpl $ certtool --generate-self-signed --load-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \ --template ca.tmpl --outfile x509-ca.pem
Then generate a server certificate. Remember to change the dns_name value to the name of your server host, or skip that command to avoid the field.
$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-server-key.pem $ echo 'organization = GnuTLS test server' > server.tmpl $ echo 'cn = test.gnutls.org' >> server.tmpl $ echo 'tls_www_server' >> server.tmpl $ echo 'encryption_key' >> server.tmpl $ echo 'signing_key' >> server.tmpl $ echo 'dns_name = test.gnutls.org' >> server.tmpl $ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey x509-server-key.pem \ --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \ --template server.tmpl --outfile x509-server.pem
For use in the client, you may want to generate a client certificate as well.
$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-client-key.pem $ echo 'cn = GnuTLS test client' > client.tmpl $ echo 'tls_www_client' >> client.tmpl $ echo 'encryption_key' >> client.tmpl $ echo 'signing_key' >> client.tmpl $ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey x509-client-key.pem \ --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \ --template client.tmpl --outfile x509-client.pem
To be able to import the client key/certificate into some applications, you will need to convert them into a PKCS#12 structure. This also encrypts the security sensitive key with a password.
$ certtool --to-p12 --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem \ --load-privkey x509-client-key.pem --load-certificate x509-client.pem \ --outder --outfile x509-client.p12
For icing, we’ll create a proxy certificate for the client too.
$ certtool --generate-privkey > x509-proxy-key.pem $ echo 'cn = GnuTLS test client proxy' > proxy.tmpl $ certtool --generate-proxy --load-privkey x509-proxy-key.pem \ --load-ca-certificate x509-client.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-client-key.pem \ --load-certificate x509-client.pem --template proxy.tmpl \ --outfile x509-proxy.pem
Then start the server again:
$ gnutls-serv --http \ --x509cafile x509-ca.pem \ --x509keyfile x509-server-key.pem \ --x509certfile x509-server.pem
Try connecting to the server using your web browser. Note that the server listens to port 5556 by default.
While you are at it, to allow connections using ECDSA, you can also create a ECDSA key and certificate for the server. These credentials will be used in the final example below.
$ certtool --generate-privkey --ecdsa > x509-server-key-ecc.pem $ certtool --generate-certificate --load-privkey x509-server-key-ecc.pem \ --load-ca-certificate x509-ca.pem --load-ca-privkey x509-ca-key.pem \ --template server.tmpl --outfile x509-server-ecc.pem
The next step is to add support for SRP authentication. This requires
an SRP password file created with srptool
.
To start the server with SRP support:
gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+SRP-RSA:+SRP \ --srppasswdconf srp-tpasswd.conf \ --srppasswd srp-passwd.txt
Let’s also start a server with support for PSK. This would require
a password file created with psktool
.
gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+ECDHE-PSK:+PSK \ --pskpasswd psk-passwd.txt
If you want a server with support for raw public-keys we can also add these credentials. Note however that there is no identity information linked to these keys as is the case with regular x509 certificates. Authentication must be done via different means. Also we need to explicitly enable raw public-key certificates via the priority strings.
gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK:+CTYPE-SRV-RAWPK \ --rawpkfile srv.rawpk.pem \ --rawpkkeyfile srv.key.pem
Finally, we start the server with all the earlier parameters and you get this command:
gnutls-serv --http --priority NORMAL:+PSK:+SRP:+CTYPE-CLI-RAWPK:+CTYPE-SRV-RAWPK \ --x509cafile x509-ca.pem \ --x509keyfile x509-server-key.pem \ --x509certfile x509-server.pem \ --x509keyfile x509-server-key-ecc.pem \ --x509certfile x509-server-ecc.pem \ --srppasswdconf srp-tpasswd.conf \ --srppasswd srp-passwd.txt \ --pskpasswd psk-passwd.txt \ --rawpkfile srv.rawpk.pem \ --rawpkkeyfile srv.key.pem
Previous: gnutls-serv Invocation, Up: Other included programs [Contents][Index]
TLS debug client. It sets up multiple TLS connections to a server and queries its capabilities. It was created to assist in debugging GnuTLS, but it might be useful to extract a TLS server’s capabilities. It connects to a TLS server, performs tests and print the server’s capabilities. If called with the ‘-V’ parameter more checks will be performed. Can be used to check for servers with special needs or bugs.
The text printed is the same whether selected with the help
option
(--help) or the more-help
option (--more-help). more-help
will print
the usage text by passing it through a pager program.
more-help
is disabled on platforms without a working
fork(2)
function. The PAGER
environment variable is
used to select the program, defaulting to more. Both will exit
with a status code of 0.
gnutls-cli-debug - GnuTLS debug client Usage: gnutls-cli-debug [ -<flag> [<val>] | --<name>[{=| }<val>] ]... [hostname] None: -d, --debug=num Enable debugging - it must be in the range: 0 to 9999 -V, --verbose More verbose output -p, --port=num The port to connect to - it must be in the range: 0 to 65536 --app-proto an alias for the 'starttls-proto' option --starttls-proto=str The application protocol to be used to obtain the server's certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres) --attime=str Perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time Version, usage and configuration options: -v, --version[=arg] output version information and exit -h, --help display extended usage information and exit -!, --more-help extended usage information passed thru pager Options are specified by doubled hyphens and their name or by a single hyphen and the flag character. Operands and options may be intermixed. They will be reordered. TLS debug client. It sets up multiple TLS connections to a server and queries its capabilities. It was created to assist in debugging GnuTLS, but it might be useful to extract a TLS server's capabilities. It connects to a TLS server, performs tests and print the server's capabilities. If called with the `-V' parameter more checks will be performed. Can be used to check for servers with special needs or bugs. Please send bug reports to: <bugs@gnutls.org>
This is the “enable debugging” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.NUMBER argument. Specifies the debug level.
This is an alias for the starttls-proto
option,
see the starttls-proto option documentation.
This is the “the application protocol to be used to obtain the server’s certificate (https, ftp, smtp, imap, ldap, xmpp, lmtp, pop3, nntp, sieve, postgres)” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument. Specify the application layer protocol for STARTTLS. If the protocol is supported, gnutls-cli will proceed to the TLS negotiation.
This is the “perform validation at the timestamp instead of the system time” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.STRING argument timestamp. timestamp is an instance in time encoded as Unix time or in a human readable timestring such as "29 Feb 2004", "2004-02-29". Full documentation available at <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/manual/html_node/Date-input-formats.html> or locally via info ’(coreutils) date invocation’.
This is the “output version information and exit” option. This option takes a ArgumentType.KEYWORD argument. Output version of program and exit. The default mode is ‘v’, a simple version. The ‘c’ mode will print copyright information and ‘n’ will print the full copyright notice.
This is the “display extended usage information and exit” option. Display usage information and exit.
This is the “extended usage information passed thru pager” option. Pass the extended usage information through a pager.
One of the following exit values will be returned:
Successful program execution.
The operation failed or the command syntax was not valid.
gnutls-cli(1), gnutls-serv(1)
$ gnutls-cli-debug localhost GnuTLS debug client 3.5.0 Checking localhost:443 for SSL 3.0 (RFC6101) support... yes whether we need to disable TLS 1.2... no whether we need to disable TLS 1.1... no whether we need to disable TLS 1.0... no whether %NO_EXTENSIONS is required... no whether %COMPAT is required... no for TLS 1.0 (RFC2246) support... yes for TLS 1.1 (RFC4346) support... yes for TLS 1.2 (RFC5246) support... yes fallback from TLS 1.6 to... TLS1.2 for RFC7507 inappropriate fallback... yes for HTTPS server name... Local for certificate chain order... sorted for safe renegotiation (RFC5746) support... yes for Safe renegotiation support (SCSV)... no for encrypt-then-MAC (RFC7366) support... no for ext master secret (RFC7627) support... no for heartbeat (RFC6520) support... no for version rollback bug in RSA PMS... dunno for version rollback bug in Client Hello... no whether the server ignores the RSA PMS version... yes whether small records (512 bytes) are tolerated on handshake... yes whether cipher suites not in SSL 3.0 spec are accepted... yes whether a bogus TLS record version in the client hello is accepted... yes whether the server understands TLS closure alerts... partially whether the server supports session resumption... yes for anonymous authentication support... no for ephemeral Diffie-Hellman support... no for ephemeral EC Diffie-Hellman support... yes ephemeral EC Diffie-Hellman group info... SECP256R1 for AES-128-GCM cipher (RFC5288) support... yes for AES-128-CCM cipher (RFC6655) support... no for AES-128-CCM-8 cipher (RFC6655) support... no for AES-128-CBC cipher (RFC3268) support... yes for CAMELLIA-128-GCM cipher (RFC6367) support... no for CAMELLIA-128-CBC cipher (RFC5932) support... no for 3DES-CBC cipher (RFC2246) support... yes for ARCFOUR 128 cipher (RFC2246) support... yes for MD5 MAC support... yes for SHA1 MAC support... yes for SHA256 MAC support... yes for ZLIB compression support... no for max record size (RFC6066) support... no for OCSP status response (RFC6066) support... no for OpenPGP authentication (RFC6091) support... no
You could also use the client to debug services with starttls capability.
$ gnutls-cli-debug --starttls-proto smtp --port 25 localhost
Next: Upgrading from previous versions, Previous: Other included programs, Up: Top [Contents][Index]
This chapter is to give a brief description of the way GnuTLS works. The focus is to give an idea to potential developers and those who want to know what happens inside the black box.
• The TLS Protocol | ||
• TLS Handshake Protocol | ||
• TLS Authentication Methods | ||
• TLS Hello Extension Handling | ||
• Cryptographic Backend | ||
• Random Number Generators-internals | ||
• FIPS140-2 mode |
Next: TLS Handshake Protocol, Up: Internal architecture of GnuTLS [Contents][Index]
The main use case for the TLS protocol is shown in Figure 11.1. A user of a library implementing the protocol expects no less than this functionality, i.e., to be able to set parameters such as the accepted security level, perform a negotiation with the peer and be able to exchange data.
Next: TLS Authentication Methods, Previous: The TLS Protocol, Up: Internal architecture of GnuTLS [Contents][Index]
The GnuTLS handshake protocol is implemented as a state machine that waits for input or returns immediately when the non-blocking transport layer functions are used. The main idea is shown in Figure 11.2.
Also the way the input is processed varies per ciphersuite. Several
implementations of the internal handlers are available and
gnutls_handshake only multiplexes the input to the appropriate
handler. For example a PSK ciphersuite has a different
implementation of the process_client_key_exchange
than a
certificate ciphersuite. We illustrate the idea in Figure 11.3.
Next: TLS Hello Extension Handling, Previous: TLS Handshake Protocol, Up: Internal architecture of GnuTLS [Contents][Index]
In GnuTLS authentication methods can be implemented quite easily. Since the required changes to add a new authentication method affect only the handshake protocol, a simple interface is used. An authentication method needs to implement the functions shown below.
typedef struct { const char *name; int (*gnutls_generate_server_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*); int (*gnutls_generate_client_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*); int (*gnutls_generate_server_kx) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*); int (*gnutls_generate_client_kx) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st*); int (*gnutls_generate_client_cert_vrfy) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st *); int (*gnutls_generate_server_certificate_request) (gnutls_session_t, gnutls_buffer_st *); int (*gnutls_process_server_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *, size_t); int (*gnutls_process_client_certificate) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *, size_t); int (*gnutls_process_server_kx) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *, size_t); int (*gnutls_process_client_kx) (gnutls_session_t, opaque *, size_t); int (*gnutls_process_client_cert_